diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation')
299 files changed, 6250 insertions, 1356 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/00-INDEX b/Documentation/00-INDEX index f607367e642..1f89424c36a 100644 --- a/Documentation/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/00-INDEX @@ -192,10 +192,6 @@ kernel-docs.txt - listing of various WWW + books that document kernel internals. kernel-parameters.txt - summary listing of command line / boot prompt args for the kernel. -keys-request-key.txt - - description of the kernel key request service. -keys.txt - - description of the kernel key retention service. kobject.txt - info of the kobject infrastructure of the Linux kernel. kprobes.txt @@ -206,8 +202,8 @@ laptops/ - directory with laptop related info and laptop driver documentation. ldm.txt - a brief description of LDM (Windows Dynamic Disks). -leds-class.txt - - documents LED handling under Linux. +leds/ + - directory with info about LED handling under Linux. local_ops.txt - semantics and behavior of local atomic operations. lockdep-design.txt @@ -294,6 +290,8 @@ scheduler/ - directory with info on the scheduler. scsi/ - directory with info on Linux scsi support. +security/ + - directory that contains security-related info serial/ - directory with info on the low level serial API. serial-console.txt @@ -328,8 +326,6 @@ sysrq.txt - info on the magic SysRq key. telephony/ - directory with info on telephony (e.g. voice over IP) support. -uml/ - - directory with information about User Mode Linux. unicode.txt - info on the Unicode character/font mapping used in Linux. unshare.txt diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c2a270b45b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/startup_profile +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4. + When read, this attribute returns the number of the actual + profile. This value is persistent, so its equivalent to the + profile that's active when the mouse is powered on next time. + When written, this file sets the number of the startup profile + and the mouse activates this profile immediately. + Please use actual_profile, it does the same thing. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/o2cb b/Documentation/ABI/removed/o2cb index 9c49d8e6c0c..7f5daa46509 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/o2cb +++ b/Documentation/ABI/removed/o2cb @@ -1,11 +1,10 @@ What: /sys/o2cb symlink -Date: Dec 2005 -KernelVersion: 2.6.16 +Date: May 2011 +KernelVersion: 2.6.40 Contact: ocfs2-devel@oss.oracle.com -Description: This is a symlink: /sys/o2cb to /sys/fs/o2cb. The symlink will - be removed when new versions of ocfs2-tools which know to look +Description: This is a symlink: /sys/o2cb to /sys/fs/o2cb. The symlink is + removed when new versions of ocfs2-tools which know to look in /sys/fs/o2cb are sufficiently prevalent. Don't code new software to look here, it should try /sys/fs/o2cb instead. - See Documentation/ABI/stable/o2cb for more information on usage. Users: ocfs2-tools. It's sufficient to mail proposed changes to ocfs2-devel@oss.oracle.com. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block index 4873c759d53..c1eb41cb987 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block @@ -142,3 +142,67 @@ Description: with the previous I/O request are enabled. When set to 2, all merge tries are disabled. The default value is 0 - which enables all types of merge tries. + +What: /sys/block/<disk>/discard_alignment +Date: May 2011 +Contact: Martin K. Petersen <martin.petersen@oracle.com> +Description: + Devices that support discard functionality may + internally allocate space in units that are bigger than + the exported logical block size. The discard_alignment + parameter indicates how many bytes the beginning of the + device is offset from the internal allocation unit's + natural alignment. + +What: /sys/block/<disk>/<partition>/discard_alignment +Date: May 2011 +Contact: Martin K. Petersen <martin.petersen@oracle.com> +Description: + Devices that support discard functionality may + internally allocate space in units that are bigger than + the exported logical block size. The discard_alignment + parameter indicates how many bytes the beginning of the + partition is offset from the internal allocation unit's + natural alignment. + +What: /sys/block/<disk>/queue/discard_granularity +Date: May 2011 +Contact: Martin K. Petersen <martin.petersen@oracle.com> +Description: + Devices that support discard functionality may + internally allocate space using units that are bigger + than the logical block size. The discard_granularity + parameter indicates the size of the internal allocation + unit in bytes if reported by the device. Otherwise the + discard_granularity will be set to match the device's + physical block size. A discard_granularity of 0 means + that the device does not support discard functionality. + +What: /sys/block/<disk>/queue/discard_max_bytes +Date: May 2011 +Contact: Martin K. Petersen <martin.petersen@oracle.com> +Description: + Devices that support discard functionality may have + internal limits on the number of bytes that can be + trimmed or unmapped in a single operation. Some storage + protocols also have inherent limits on the number of + blocks that can be described in a single command. The + discard_max_bytes parameter is set by the device driver + to the maximum number of bytes that can be discarded in + a single operation. Discard requests issued to the + device must not exceed this limit. A discard_max_bytes + value of 0 means that the device does not support + discard functionality. + +What: /sys/block/<disk>/queue/discard_zeroes_data +Date: May 2011 +Contact: Martin K. Petersen <martin.petersen@oracle.com> +Description: + Devices that support discard functionality may return + stale or random data when a previously discarded block + is read back. This can cause problems if the filesystem + expects discarded blocks to be explicitly cleared. If a + device reports that it deterministically returns zeroes + when a discarded area is read the discard_zeroes_data + parameter will be set to one. Otherwise it will be 0 and + the result of reading a discarded area is undefined. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-bcma b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-bcma new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..06b62badddd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-bcma @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +What: /sys/bus/bcma/devices/.../manuf +Date: May 2011 +KernelVersion: 2.6.40 +Contact: Rafał Miłecki <zajec5@gmail.com> +Description: + Each BCMA core has it's manufacturer id. See + include/linux/bcma/bcma.h for possible values. + +What: /sys/bus/bcma/devices/.../id +Date: May 2011 +KernelVersion: 2.6.40 +Contact: Rafał Miłecki <zajec5@gmail.com> +Description: + There are a few types of BCMA cores, they can be identified by + id field. + +What: /sys/bus/bcma/devices/.../rev +Date: May 2011 +KernelVersion: 2.6.40 +Contact: Rafał Miłecki <zajec5@gmail.com> +Description: + BCMA cores of the same type can still slightly differ depending + on their revision. Use it for detailed programming. + +What: /sys/bus/bcma/devices/.../class +Date: May 2011 +KernelVersion: 2.6.40 +Contact: Rafał Miłecki <zajec5@gmail.com> +Description: + Each BCMA core is identified by few fields, including class it + belongs to. See include/linux/bcma/bcma.h for possible values. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-css b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-css index b585ec258a0..2979c40c10e 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-css +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-css @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ Contact: Cornelia Huck <cornelia.huck@de.ibm.com> linux-s390@vger.kernel.org Description: Contains the PIM/PAM/POM values, as reported by the channel subsystem when last queried by the common I/O - layer (this implies that this attribute is not neccessarily + layer (this implies that this attribute is not necessarily in sync with the values current in the channel subsystem). Note: This is an I/O-subchannel specific attribute. Users: s390-tools, HAL diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci index 36bf454ba85..349ecf26ce1 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci @@ -74,6 +74,15 @@ Description: hot-remove the PCI device and any of its children. Depends on CONFIG_HOTPLUG. +What: /sys/bus/pci/devices/.../pci_bus/.../rescan +Date: May 2011 +Contact: Linux PCI developers <linux-pci@vger.kernel.org> +Description: + Writing a non-zero value to this attribute will + force a rescan of the bus and all child buses, + and re-discover devices removed earlier from this + part of the device tree. Depends on CONFIG_HOTPLUG. + What: /sys/bus/pci/devices/.../rescan Date: January 2009 Contact: Linux PCI developers <linux-pci@vger.kernel.org> diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led index edff6630c80..3646ec85d51 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led @@ -33,5 +33,5 @@ Contact: Richard Purdie <rpurdie@rpsys.net> Description: Invert the LED on/off state. This parameter is specific to gpio and backlight triggers. In case of the backlight trigger, - it is usefull when driving a LED which is intended to indicate + it is useful when driving a LED which is intended to indicate a device in a standby like state. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu index 7564e88bfa4..e7be75b96e4 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu @@ -183,21 +183,21 @@ Description: Discover and change clock speed of CPUs to learn how to control the knobs. -What: /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu*/cache/index*/cache_disable_X -Date: August 2008 +What: /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu*/cache/index3/cache_disable_{0,1} +Date: August 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.27 -Contact: mark.langsdorf@amd.com -Description: These files exist in every cpu's cache index directories. - There are currently 2 cache_disable_# files in each - directory. Reading from these files on a supported - processor will return that cache disable index value - for that processor and node. Writing to one of these - files will cause the specificed cache index to be disabled. - - Currently, only AMD Family 10h Processors support cache index - disable, and only for their L3 caches. See the BIOS and - Kernel Developer's Guide at - http://support.amd.com/us/Embedded_TechDocs/31116-Public-GH-BKDG_3-28_5-28-09.pdf - for formatting information and other details on the - cache index disable. -Users: joachim.deguara@amd.com +Contact: discuss@x86-64.org +Description: Disable L3 cache indices + + These files exist in every CPU's cache/index3 directory. Each + cache_disable_{0,1} file corresponds to one disable slot which + can be used to disable a cache index. Reading from these files + on a processor with this functionality will return the currently + disabled index for that node. There is one L3 structure per + node, or per internal node on MCM machines. Writing a valid + index to one of these files will cause the specificed cache + index to be disabled. + + All AMD processors with L3 caches provide this functionality. + For details, see BKDGs at + http://developer.amd.com/documentation/guides/Pages/default.aspx diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone index b4c4f158ab9..3ca3971109b 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid- Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the - press of a button. A profile holds informations like button + press of a button. A profile holds information like button mappings, sensitivity, the colors of the 5 leds and light effects. When read, these files return the respective profile. The diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus index 00efced7396..c1b53b8bc2a 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus @@ -1,9 +1,12 @@ What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/actual_profile Date: October 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> -Description: When read, this file returns the number of the actual profile in - range 0-4. - This file is readonly. +Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4. + When read, this attribute returns the number of the actual + profile. This value is persistent, so its equivalent to the + profile that's active when the mouse is powered on next time. + When written, this file sets the number of the startup profile + and the mouse activates this profile immediately. Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/firmware_version @@ -33,7 +36,7 @@ Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. - profile_buttons holds informations about button layout. + profile_buttons holds information about button layout. When written, this file lets one write the respective profile buttons back to the mouse. The data has to be 77 bytes long. The mouse will reject invalid data. @@ -47,7 +50,7 @@ Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. - profile_buttons holds informations about button layout. + profile_buttons holds information about button layout. When read, these files return the respective profile buttons. The returned data is 77 bytes in size. This file is readonly. @@ -58,7 +61,7 @@ Date: October 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. - profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity + profile_settings holds information like resolution, sensitivity and light effects. When written, this file lets one write the respective profile settings back to the mouse. The data has to be 43 bytes long. @@ -73,7 +76,7 @@ Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. - profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity + profile_settings holds information like resolution, sensitivity and light effects. When read, these files return the respective profile settings. The returned data is 43 bytes in size. @@ -89,16 +92,6 @@ Description: The mouse has a tracking- and a distance-control-unit. These This file is writeonly. Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/startup_profile -Date: October 2010 -Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> -Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4. - When read, this attribute returns the number of the profile - that's active when the mouse is powered on. - When written, this file sets the number of the startup profile - and the mouse activates this profile immediately. -Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net - What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/tcu Date: October 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kovaplus b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kovaplus index fdfa16f8189..20f937c9d84 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kovaplus +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kovaplus @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ Date: January 2011 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. - profile_buttons holds informations about button layout. + profile_buttons holds information about button layout. When written, this file lets one write the respective profile buttons back to the mouse. The data has to be 23 bytes long. The mouse will reject invalid data. @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Date: January 2011 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. - profile_buttons holds informations about button layout. + profile_buttons holds information about button layout. When read, these files return the respective profile buttons. The returned data is 23 bytes in size. This file is readonly. @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Date: January 2011 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. - profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity + profile_settings holds information like resolution, sensitivity and light effects. When written, this file lets one write the respective profile settings back to the mouse. The data has to be 16 bytes long. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Date: January 2011 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. - profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity + profile_settings holds information like resolution, sensitivity and light effects. When read, these files return the respective profile settings. The returned data is 16 bytes in size. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra index 5fab71af3c4..3f8de50e4ff 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. - profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity + profile_settings holds information like resolution, sensitivity and light effects. When written, this file lets one write the respective profile settings back to the mouse. The data has to be 13 bytes long. @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. - profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity + profile_settings holds information like resolution, sensitivity and light effects. When read, these files return the respective profile settings. The returned data is 13 bytes in size. @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. - profile_buttons holds informations about button layout. + profile_buttons holds information about button layout. When written, this file lets one write the respective profile buttons back to the mouse. The data has to be 19 bytes long. The mouse will reject invalid data. @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. - profile_buttons holds informations about button layout. + profile_buttons holds information about button layout. When read, these files return the respective profile buttons. The returned data is 19 bytes in size. This file is readonly. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-dmi b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-dmi index ba9da9503c2..c78f9ab01e5 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-dmi +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-dmi @@ -14,14 +14,15 @@ Description: DMI is structured as a large table of entries, where each entry has a common header indicating the type and - length of the entry, as well as 'handle' that is - supposed to be unique amongst all entries. + length of the entry, as well as a firmware-provided + 'handle' that is supposed to be unique amongst all + entries. Some entries are required by the specification, but many others are optional. In general though, users should never expect to find a specific entry type on their system unless they know for certain what their firmware - is doing. Machine to machine will vary. + is doing. Machine to machine experiences will vary. Multiple entries of the same type are allowed. In order to handle these duplicate entry types, each entry is @@ -67,25 +68,24 @@ Description: and the two terminating nul characters. type : The type of the entry. This value is the same as found in the directory name. It indicates - how the rest of the entry should be - interpreted. + how the rest of the entry should be interpreted. instance: The instance ordinal of the entry for the given type. This value is the same as found in the parent directory name. - position: The position of the entry within the entirety - of the entirety. + position: The ordinal position (zero-based) of the entry + within the entirety of the DMI entry table. === Entry Specialization === Some entry types may have other information available in - sysfs. + sysfs. Not all types are specialized. --- Type 15 - System Event Log --- This entry allows the firmware to export a log of events the system has taken. This information is typically backed by nvram, but the implementation - details are abstracted by this table. This entries data + details are abstracted by this table. This entry's data is exported in the directory: /sys/firmware/dmi/entries/15-0/system_event_log diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-gsmi b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-gsmi new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0faa0aaf4b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-gsmi @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +What: /sys/firmware/gsmi +Date: March 2011 +Contact: Mike Waychison <mikew@google.com> +Description: + Some servers used internally at Google have firmware + that provides callback functionality via explicit SMI + triggers. Some of the callbacks are similar to those + provided by the EFI runtime services page, but due to + historical reasons this different entry-point has been + used. + + The gsmi driver implements the kernel's abstraction for + these firmware callbacks. Currently, this functionality + is limited to handling the system event log and getting + access to EFI-style variables stored in nvram. + + Layout: + + /sys/firmware/gsmi/vars: + + This directory has the same layout (and + underlying implementation as /sys/firmware/efi/vars. + See Documentation/ABI/*/sysfs-firmware-efi-vars + for more information on how to interact with + this structure. + + /sys/firmware/gsmi/append_to_eventlog - write-only: + + This file takes a binary blob and passes it onto + the firmware to be timestamped and appended to + the system eventlog. The binary format is + interpreted by the firmware and may change from + platform to platform. The only kernel-enforced + requirement is that the blob be prefixed with a + 32bit host-endian type used as part of the + firmware call. + + /sys/firmware/gsmi/clear_config - write-only: + + Writing any value to this file will cause the + entire firmware configuration to be reset to + "factory defaults". Callers should assume that + a reboot is required for the configuration to be + cleared. + + /sys/firmware/gsmi/clear_eventlog - write-only: + + This file is used to clear out a portion/the + whole of the system event log. Values written + should be values between 1 and 100 inclusive (in + ASCII) representing the fraction of the log to + clear. Not all platforms support fractional + clearing though, and this writes to this file + will error out if the firmware doesn't like your + submitted fraction. + + Callers should assume that a reboot is needed + for this operation to complete. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-log b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-log new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9b58e7c5365 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-log @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ +What: /sys/firmware/log +Date: February 2011 +Contact: Mike Waychison <mikew@google.com> +Description: + The /sys/firmware/log is a binary file that represents a + read-only copy of the firmware's log if one is + available. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-fscaps b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-fscaps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..50a3033b5e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-fscaps @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +What: /sys/kernel/fscaps +Date: February 2011 +KernelVersion: 2.6.38 +Contact: Ludwig Nussel <ludwig.nussel@suse.de> +Description + Shows whether file system capabilities are honored + when executing a binary + diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm-cleancache b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm-cleancache new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..662ae646ea1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm-cleancache @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +What: /sys/kernel/mm/cleancache/ +Date: April 2011 +Contact: Dan Magenheimer <dan.magenheimer@oracle.com> +Description: + /sys/kernel/mm/cleancache/ contains a number of files which + record a count of various cleancache operations + (sum across all filesystems): + succ_gets + failed_gets + puts + flushes diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop index 41ff8ae4dee..cd9d667c3da 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ KernelVersion: 2.6.20 Contact: "Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net> Description: Some models like the W1N have a LED display that can be - used to display several informations. + used to display several items of information. To control the LED display, use the following : echo 0x0T000DDD > /sys/devices/platform/asus_laptop/ where T control the 3 letters display, and DDD the 3 digits display. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power index 194ca446ac2..b464d12761b 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power @@ -158,3 +158,17 @@ Description: successful, will make the kernel abort a subsequent transition to a sleep state if any wakeup events are reported after the write has returned. + +What: /sys/power/reserved_size +Date: May 2011 +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Description: + The /sys/power/reserved_size file allows user space to control + the amount of memory reserved for allocations made by device + drivers during the "device freeze" stage of hibernation. It can + be written a string representing a non-negative integer that + will be used as the amount of memory to reserve for allocations + made by device drivers' "freeze" callbacks, in bytes. + + Reading from this file will display the current value, which is + set to 1 MB by default. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-ptp b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-ptp new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d40d2b55050 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-ptp @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +What: /sys/class/ptp/ +Date: September 2010 +Contact: Richard Cochran <richardcochran@gmail.com> +Description: + This directory contains files and directories + providing a standardized interface to the ancillary + features of PTP hardware clocks. + +What: /sys/class/ptp/ptpN/ +Date: September 2010 +Contact: Richard Cochran <richardcochran@gmail.com> +Description: + This directory contains the attributes of the Nth PTP + hardware clock registered into the PTP class driver + subsystem. + +What: /sys/class/ptp/ptpN/clock_name +Date: September 2010 +Contact: Richard Cochran <richardcochran@gmail.com> +Description: + This file contains the name of the PTP hardware clock + as a human readable string. + +What: /sys/class/ptp/ptpN/max_adjustment +Date: September 2010 +Contact: Richard Cochran <richardcochran@gmail.com> +Description: + This file contains the PTP hardware clock's maximum + frequency adjustment value (a positive integer) in + parts per billion. + +What: /sys/class/ptp/ptpN/n_alarms +Date: September 2010 +Contact: Richard Cochran <richardcochran@gmail.com> +Description: + This file contains the number of periodic or one shot + alarms offer by the PTP hardware clock. + +What: /sys/class/ptp/ptpN/n_external_timestamps +Date: September 2010 +Contact: Richard Cochran <richardcochran@gmail.com> +Description: + This file contains the number of external timestamp + channels offered by the PTP hardware clock. + +What: /sys/class/ptp/ptpN/n_periodic_outputs +Date: September 2010 +Contact: Richard Cochran <richardcochran@gmail.com> +Description: + This file contains the number of programmable periodic + output channels offered by the PTP hardware clock. + +What: /sys/class/ptp/ptpN/pps_avaiable +Date: September 2010 +Contact: Richard Cochran <richardcochran@gmail.com> +Description: + This file indicates whether the PTP hardware clock + supports a Pulse Per Second to the host CPU. Reading + "1" means that the PPS is supported, while "0" means + not supported. + +What: /sys/class/ptp/ptpN/extts_enable +Date: September 2010 +Contact: Richard Cochran <richardcochran@gmail.com> +Description: + This write-only file enables or disables external + timestamps. To enable external timestamps, write the + channel index followed by a "1" into the file. + To disable external timestamps, write the channel + index followed by a "0" into the file. + +What: /sys/class/ptp/ptpN/fifo +Date: September 2010 +Contact: Richard Cochran <richardcochran@gmail.com> +Description: + This file provides timestamps on external events, in + the form of three integers: channel index, seconds, + and nanoseconds. + +What: /sys/class/ptp/ptpN/period +Date: September 2010 +Contact: Richard Cochran <richardcochran@gmail.com> +Description: + This write-only file enables or disables periodic + outputs. To enable a periodic output, write five + integers into the file: channel index, start time + seconds, start time nanoseconds, period seconds, and + period nanoseconds. To disable a periodic output, set + all the seconds and nanoseconds values to zero. + +What: /sys/class/ptp/ptpN/pps_enable +Date: September 2010 +Contact: Richard Cochran <richardcochran@gmail.com> +Description: + This write-only file enables or disables delivery of + PPS events to the Linux PPS subsystem. To enable PPS + events, write a "1" into the file. To disable events, + write a "0" into the file. diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/.gitignore b/Documentation/DocBook/.gitignore index c6def352fe3..679034cbd68 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/.gitignore +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/.gitignore @@ -8,3 +8,4 @@ *.dvi *.log *.out +media/ diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl index 36f63d4a0a0..b638e50cf8f 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl @@ -96,10 +96,10 @@ X!Iinclude/linux/kobject.h <chapter id="devdrivers"> <title>Device drivers infrastructure</title> + <sect1><title>The Basic Device Driver-Model Structures </title> +!Iinclude/linux/device.h + </sect1> <sect1><title>Device Drivers Base</title> -<!-- -X!Iinclude/linux/device.h ---> !Edrivers/base/driver.c !Edrivers/base/core.c !Edrivers/base/class.c diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/dvbapi.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/dvbapi.xml index ad8678d4891..9fad86ce7f5 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/dvbapi.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/dvbapi.xml @@ -35,6 +35,14 @@ <revhistory> <!-- Put document revisions here, newest first. --> <revision> + <revnumber>2.0.4</revnumber> + <date>2011-05-06</date> + <authorinitials>mcc</authorinitials> + <revremark> + Add more information about DVB APIv5, better describing the frontend GET/SET props ioctl's. + </revremark> +</revision> +<revision> <revnumber>2.0.3</revnumber> <date>2010-07-03</date> <authorinitials>mcc</authorinitials> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/dvbproperty.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/dvbproperty.xml index 5f57c7ccd4b..b5365f61d69 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/dvbproperty.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/dvbproperty.xml @@ -1,6 +1,330 @@ -<section id="FE_GET_PROPERTY"> +<section id="FE_GET_SET_PROPERTY"> <title>FE_GET_PROPERTY/FE_SET_PROPERTY</title> +<programlisting> +/* Reserved fields should be set to 0 */ +struct dtv_property { + __u32 cmd; + union { + __u32 data; + struct { + __u8 data[32]; + __u32 len; + __u32 reserved1[3]; + void *reserved2; + } buffer; + } u; + int result; +} __attribute__ ((packed)); + +/* num of properties cannot exceed DTV_IOCTL_MAX_MSGS per ioctl */ +#define DTV_IOCTL_MAX_MSGS 64 + +struct dtv_properties { + __u32 num; + struct dtv_property *props; +}; +</programlisting> + +<section id="FE_GET_PROPERTY"> +<title>FE_GET_PROPERTY</title> +<para>DESCRIPTION +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>This ioctl call returns one or more frontend properties. This call only + requires read-only access to the device.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>SYNOPSIS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int ioctl(int fd, int request = <link linkend="FE_GET_PROPERTY">FE_GET_PROPERTY</link>, + dtv_properties ⋆props);</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>PARAMETERS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry align="char"> +<para>int fd</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int num</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Equals <link linkend="FE_GET_PROPERTY">FE_GET_PROPERTY</link> for this command.</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>struct dtv_property *props</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Points to the location where the front-end property commands are stored.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>ERRORS</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row> + <entry align="char"><para>EINVAL</para></entry> + <entry align="char"><para>Invalid parameter(s) received or number of parameters out of the range.</para></entry> + </row><row> + <entry align="char"><para>ENOMEM</para></entry> + <entry align="char"><para>Out of memory.</para></entry> + </row><row> + <entry align="char"><para>EFAULT</para></entry> + <entry align="char"><para>Failure while copying data from/to userspace.</para></entry> + </row><row> + <entry align="char"><para>EOPNOTSUPP</para></entry> + <entry align="char"><para>Property type not supported.</para></entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +</section> + +<section id="FE_SET_PROPERTY"> +<title>FE_SET_PROPERTY</title> +<para>DESCRIPTION +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>This ioctl call sets one or more frontend properties. This call only + requires read-only access to the device.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>SYNOPSIS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int ioctl(int fd, int request = <link linkend="FE_SET_PROPERTY">FE_SET_PROPERTY</link>, + dtv_properties ⋆props);</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>PARAMETERS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row><entry align="char"> +<para>int fd</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>File descriptor returned by a previous call to open().</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>int num</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Equals <link linkend="FE_SET_PROPERTY">FE_SET_PROPERTY</link> for this command.</para> +</entry> + </row><row><entry + align="char"> +<para>struct dtv_property *props</para> +</entry><entry + align="char"> +<para>Points to the location where the front-end property commands are stored.</para> +</entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +<para>ERRORS +</para> +<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><tbody><row> + <entry align="char"><para>EINVAL</para></entry> + <entry align="char"><para>Invalid parameter(s) received or number of parameters out of the range.</para></entry> + </row><row> + <entry align="char"><para>ENOMEM</para></entry> + <entry align="char"><para>Out of memory.</para></entry> + </row><row> + <entry align="char"><para>EFAULT</para></entry> + <entry align="char"><para>Failure while copying data from/to userspace.</para></entry> + </row><row> + <entry align="char"><para>EOPNOTSUPP</para></entry> + <entry align="char"><para>Property type not supported.</para></entry> + </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> +</section> + +<section> + <title>Property types</title> +<para> +On <link linkend="FE_GET_PROPERTY">FE_GET_PROPERTY</link>/<link linkend="FE_SET_PROPERTY">FE_SET_PROPERTY</link>, +the actual action is determined by the dtv_property cmd/data pairs. With one single ioctl, is possible to +get/set up to 64 properties. The actual meaning of each property is described on the next sections. +</para> + +<para>The available frontend property types are:</para> +<programlisting> +#define DTV_UNDEFINED 0 +#define DTV_TUNE 1 +#define DTV_CLEAR 2 +#define DTV_FREQUENCY 3 +#define DTV_MODULATION 4 +#define DTV_BANDWIDTH_HZ 5 +#define DTV_INVERSION 6 +#define DTV_DISEQC_MASTER 7 +#define DTV_SYMBOL_RATE 8 +#define DTV_INNER_FEC 9 +#define DTV_VOLTAGE 10 +#define DTV_TONE 11 +#define DTV_PILOT 12 +#define DTV_ROLLOFF 13 +#define DTV_DISEQC_SLAVE_REPLY 14 +#define DTV_FE_CAPABILITY_COUNT 15 +#define DTV_FE_CAPABILITY 16 +#define DTV_DELIVERY_SYSTEM 17 +#define DTV_ISDBT_PARTIAL_RECEPTION 18 +#define DTV_ISDBT_SOUND_BROADCASTING 19 +#define DTV_ISDBT_SB_SUBCHANNEL_ID 20 +#define DTV_ISDBT_SB_SEGMENT_IDX 21 +#define DTV_ISDBT_SB_SEGMENT_COUNT 22 +#define DTV_ISDBT_LAYERA_FEC 23 +#define DTV_ISDBT_LAYERA_MODULATION 24 +#define DTV_ISDBT_LAYERA_SEGMENT_COUNT 25 +#define DTV_ISDBT_LAYERA_TIME_INTERLEAVING 26 +#define DTV_ISDBT_LAYERB_FEC 27 +#define DTV_ISDBT_LAYERB_MODULATION 28 +#define DTV_ISDBT_LAYERB_SEGMENT_COUNT 29 +#define DTV_ISDBT_LAYERB_TIME_INTERLEAVING 30 +#define DTV_ISDBT_LAYERC_FEC 31 +#define DTV_ISDBT_LAYERC_MODULATION 32 +#define DTV_ISDBT_LAYERC_SEGMENT_COUNT 33 +#define DTV_ISDBT_LAYERC_TIME_INTERLEAVING 34 +#define DTV_API_VERSION 35 +#define DTV_CODE_RATE_HP 36 +#define DTV_CODE_RATE_LP 37 +#define DTV_GUARD_INTERVAL 38 +#define DTV_TRANSMISSION_MODE 39 +#define DTV_HIERARCHY 40 +#define DTV_ISDBT_LAYER_ENABLED 41 +#define DTV_ISDBS_TS_ID 42 +</programlisting> +</section> + +<section id="fe_property_common"> + <title>Parameters that are common to all Digital TV standards</title> + <section id="DTV_FREQUENCY"> + <title><constant>DTV_FREQUENCY</constant></title> + + <para>Central frequency of the channel, in HZ.</para> + + <para>Notes:</para> + <para>1)For ISDB-T, the channels are usually transmitted with an offset of 143kHz. + E.g. a valid frequncy could be 474143 kHz. The stepping is bound to the bandwidth of + the channel which is 6MHz.</para> + + <para>2)As in ISDB-Tsb the channel consists of only one or three segments the + frequency step is 429kHz, 3*429 respectively. As for ISDB-T the + central frequency of the channel is expected.</para> + </section> + + <section id="DTV_BANDWIDTH_HZ"> + <title><constant>DTV_BANDWIDTH_HZ</constant></title> + + <para>Bandwidth for the channel, in HZ.</para> + + <para>Possible values: + <constant>1712000</constant>, + <constant>5000000</constant>, + <constant>6000000</constant>, + <constant>7000000</constant>, + <constant>8000000</constant>, + <constant>10000000</constant>. + </para> + + <para>Notes:</para> + + <para>1) For ISDB-T it should be always 6000000Hz (6MHz)</para> + <para>2) For ISDB-Tsb it can vary depending on the number of connected segments</para> + <para>3) Bandwidth doesn't apply for DVB-C transmissions, as the bandwidth + for DVB-C depends on the symbol rate</para> + <para>4) Bandwidth in ISDB-T is fixed (6MHz) or can be easily derived from + other parameters (DTV_ISDBT_SB_SEGMENT_IDX, + DTV_ISDBT_SB_SEGMENT_COUNT).</para> + <para>5) DVB-T supports 6, 7 and 8MHz.</para> + <para>6) In addition, DVB-T2 supports 1.172, 5 and 10MHz.</para> + </section> + + <section id="DTV_DELIVERY_SYSTEM"> + <title><constant>DTV_DELIVERY_SYSTEM</constant></title> + + <para>Specifies the type of Delivery system</para> + + <para>Possible values: </para> +<programlisting> +typedef enum fe_delivery_system { + SYS_UNDEFINED, + SYS_DVBC_ANNEX_AC, + SYS_DVBC_ANNEX_B, + SYS_DVBT, + SYS_DSS, + SYS_DVBS, + SYS_DVBS2, + SYS_DVBH, + SYS_ISDBT, + SYS_ISDBS, + SYS_ISDBC, + SYS_ATSC, + SYS_ATSCMH, + SYS_DMBTH, + SYS_CMMB, + SYS_DAB, + SYS_DVBT2, +} fe_delivery_system_t; +</programlisting> + + </section> + + <section id="DTV_TRANSMISSION_MODE"> + <title><constant>DTV_TRANSMISSION_MODE</constant></title> + + <para>Specifies the number of carriers used by the standard</para> + + <para>Possible values are:</para> +<programlisting> +typedef enum fe_transmit_mode { + TRANSMISSION_MODE_2K, + TRANSMISSION_MODE_8K, + TRANSMISSION_MODE_AUTO, + TRANSMISSION_MODE_4K, + TRANSMISSION_MODE_1K, + TRANSMISSION_MODE_16K, + TRANSMISSION_MODE_32K, +} fe_transmit_mode_t; +</programlisting> + + <para>Notes:</para> + <para>1) ISDB-T supports three carrier/symbol-size: 8K, 4K, 2K. It is called + 'mode' in the standard: Mode 1 is 2K, mode 2 is 4K, mode 3 is 8K</para> + + <para>2) If <constant>DTV_TRANSMISSION_MODE</constant> is set the <constant>TRANSMISSION_MODE_AUTO</constant> the + hardware will try to find the correct FFT-size (if capable) and will + use TMCC to fill in the missing parameters.</para> + <para>3) DVB-T specifies 2K and 8K as valid sizes.</para> + <para>4) DVB-T2 specifies 1K, 2K, 4K, 8K, 16K and 32K.</para> + </section> + + <section id="DTV_GUARD_INTERVAL"> + <title><constant>DTV_GUARD_INTERVAL</constant></title> + + <para>Possible values are:</para> +<programlisting> +typedef enum fe_guard_interval { + GUARD_INTERVAL_1_32, + GUARD_INTERVAL_1_16, + GUARD_INTERVAL_1_8, + GUARD_INTERVAL_1_4, + GUARD_INTERVAL_AUTO, + GUARD_INTERVAL_1_128, + GUARD_INTERVAL_19_128, + GUARD_INTERVAL_19_256, +} fe_guard_interval_t; +</programlisting> + + <para>Notes:</para> + <para>1) If <constant>DTV_GUARD_INTERVAL</constant> is set the <constant>GUARD_INTERVAL_AUTO</constant> the hardware will + try to find the correct guard interval (if capable) and will use TMCC to fill + in the missing parameters.</para> + <para>2) Intervals 1/128, 19/128 and 19/256 are used only for DVB-T2 at present</para> + </section> +</section> + <section id="isdbt"> <title>ISDB-T frontend</title> <para>This section describes shortly what are the possible parameters in the Linux @@ -32,73 +356,6 @@ <para>Parameters used by ISDB-T and ISDB-Tsb.</para> - <section id="isdbt-parms"> - <title>Parameters that are common with DVB-T and ATSC</title> - - <section id="isdbt-freq"> - <title><constant>DTV_FREQUENCY</constant></title> - - <para>Central frequency of the channel.</para> - - <para>For ISDB-T the channels are usally transmitted with an offset of 143kHz. E.g. a - valid frequncy could be 474143 kHz. The stepping is bound to the bandwidth of - the channel which is 6MHz.</para> - - <para>As in ISDB-Tsb the channel consists of only one or three segments the - frequency step is 429kHz, 3*429 respectively. As for ISDB-T the - central frequency of the channel is expected.</para> - </section> - - <section id="isdbt-bw"> - <title><constant>DTV_BANDWIDTH_HZ</constant> (optional)</title> - - <para>Possible values:</para> - - <para>For ISDB-T it should be always 6000000Hz (6MHz)</para> - <para>For ISDB-Tsb it can vary depending on the number of connected segments</para> - - <para>Note: Hardware specific values might be given here, but standard - applications should not bother to set a value to this field as - standard demods are ignoring it anyway.</para> - - <para>Bandwidth in ISDB-T is fixed (6MHz) or can be easily derived from - other parameters (DTV_ISDBT_SB_SEGMENT_IDX, - DTV_ISDBT_SB_SEGMENT_COUNT).</para> - </section> - - <section id="isdbt-delivery-sys"> - <title><constant>DTV_DELIVERY_SYSTEM</constant></title> - - <para>Possible values: <constant>SYS_ISDBT</constant></para> - </section> - - <section id="isdbt-tx-mode"> - <title><constant>DTV_TRANSMISSION_MODE</constant></title> - - <para>ISDB-T supports three carrier/symbol-size: 8K, 4K, 2K. It is called - 'mode' in the standard: Mode 1 is 2K, mode 2 is 4K, mode 3 is 8K</para> - - <para>Possible values: <constant>TRANSMISSION_MODE_2K</constant>, <constant>TRANSMISSION_MODE_8K</constant>, - <constant>TRANSMISSION_MODE_AUTO</constant>, <constant>TRANSMISSION_MODE_4K</constant></para> - - <para>If <constant>DTV_TRANSMISSION_MODE</constant> is set the <constant>TRANSMISSION_MODE_AUTO</constant> the - hardware will try to find the correct FFT-size (if capable) and will - use TMCC to fill in the missing parameters.</para> - - <para><constant>TRANSMISSION_MODE_4K</constant> is added at the same time as the other new parameters.</para> - </section> - - <section id="isdbt-guard-interval"> - <title><constant>DTV_GUARD_INTERVAL</constant></title> - - <para>Possible values: <constant>GUARD_INTERVAL_1_32</constant>, <constant>GUARD_INTERVAL_1_16</constant>, <constant>GUARD_INTERVAL_1_8</constant>, - <constant>GUARD_INTERVAL_1_4</constant>, <constant>GUARD_INTERVAL_AUTO</constant></para> - - <para>If <constant>DTV_GUARD_INTERVAL</constant> is set the <constant>GUARD_INTERVAL_AUTO</constant> the hardware will - try to find the correct guard interval (if capable) and will use TMCC to fill - in the missing parameters.</para> - </section> - </section> <section id="isdbt-new-parms"> <title>ISDB-T only parameters</title> @@ -314,5 +571,20 @@ </section> </section> </section> + <section id="dvbt2-params"> + <title>DVB-T2 parameters</title> + + <para>This section covers parameters that apply only to the DVB-T2 delivery method. DVB-T2 + support is currently in the early stages development so expect this section to grow + and become more detailed with time.</para> + + <section id="dvbt2-plp-id"> + <title><constant>DTV_DVBT2_PLP_ID</constant></title> + + <para>DVB-T2 supports Physical Layer Pipes (PLP) to allow transmission of + many data types via a single multiplex. The API will soon support this + at which point this section will be expanded.</para> + </section> + </section> </section> </section> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/frontend.h.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/frontend.h.xml index d08e0d40141..d792f789ad3 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/frontend.h.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/frontend.h.xml @@ -176,14 +176,20 @@ typedef enum fe_transmit_mode { TRANSMISSION_MODE_2K, TRANSMISSION_MODE_8K, TRANSMISSION_MODE_AUTO, - TRANSMISSION_MODE_4K + TRANSMISSION_MODE_4K, + TRANSMISSION_MODE_1K, + TRANSMISSION_MODE_16K, + TRANSMISSION_MODE_32K, } fe_transmit_mode_t; typedef enum fe_bandwidth { BANDWIDTH_8_MHZ, BANDWIDTH_7_MHZ, BANDWIDTH_6_MHZ, - BANDWIDTH_AUTO + BANDWIDTH_AUTO, + BANDWIDTH_5_MHZ, + BANDWIDTH_10_MHZ, + BANDWIDTH_1_712_MHZ, } fe_bandwidth_t; @@ -192,7 +198,10 @@ typedef enum fe_guard_interval { GUARD_INTERVAL_1_16, GUARD_INTERVAL_1_8, GUARD_INTERVAL_1_4, - GUARD_INTERVAL_AUTO + GUARD_INTERVAL_AUTO, + GUARD_INTERVAL_1_128, + GUARD_INTERVAL_19_128, + GUARD_INTERVAL_19_256, } fe_guard_interval_t; @@ -306,7 +315,9 @@ struct dvb_frontend_event { #define DTV_ISDBS_TS_ID 42 -#define DTV_MAX_COMMAND DTV_ISDBS_TS_ID +#define DTV_DVBT2_PLP_ID 43 + +#define DTV_MAX_COMMAND DTV_DVBT2_PLP_ID typedef enum fe_pilot { PILOT_ON, @@ -338,6 +349,7 @@ typedef enum fe_delivery_system { SYS_DMBTH, SYS_CMMB, SYS_DAB, + SYS_DVBT2, } fe_delivery_system_t; struct dtv_cmds_h { diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/frontend.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/frontend.xml index 78d756de590..60c6976fb31 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/frontend.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/frontend.xml @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ consistently to the DiSEqC commands as described in the DiSEqC spec.</para> <section id="frontend_sec_tone"> <title>SEC continuous tone</title> -<para>The continous 22KHz tone is usually used with non-DiSEqC capable LNBs to switch the +<para>The continuous 22KHz tone is usually used with non-DiSEqC capable LNBs to switch the high/low band of a dual-band LNB. When using DiSEqC epuipment this voltage has to be switched consistently to the DiSEqC commands as described in the DiSEqC spec.</para> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/genericirq.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/genericirq.tmpl index fb10fd08c05..b3422341d65 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/genericirq.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/genericirq.tmpl @@ -191,8 +191,8 @@ <para> Whenever an interrupt triggers, the lowlevel arch code calls into the generic interrupt code by calling desc->handle_irq(). - This highlevel IRQ handling function only uses desc->chip primitives - referenced by the assigned chip descriptor structure. + This highlevel IRQ handling function only uses desc->irq_data.chip + primitives referenced by the assigned chip descriptor structure. </para> </sect1> <sect1 id="Highlevel_Driver_API"> @@ -206,11 +206,11 @@ <listitem><para>enable_irq()</para></listitem> <listitem><para>disable_irq_nosync() (SMP only)</para></listitem> <listitem><para>synchronize_irq() (SMP only)</para></listitem> - <listitem><para>set_irq_type()</para></listitem> - <listitem><para>set_irq_wake()</para></listitem> - <listitem><para>set_irq_data()</para></listitem> - <listitem><para>set_irq_chip()</para></listitem> - <listitem><para>set_irq_chip_data()</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>irq_set_irq_type()</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>irq_set_irq_wake()</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>irq_set_handler_data()</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>irq_set_chip()</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>irq_set_chip_data()</para></listitem> </itemizedlist> See the autogenerated function documentation for details. </para> @@ -225,6 +225,8 @@ <listitem><para>handle_fasteoi_irq</para></listitem> <listitem><para>handle_simple_irq</para></listitem> <listitem><para>handle_percpu_irq</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>handle_edge_eoi_irq</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>handle_bad_irq</para></listitem> </itemizedlist> The interrupt flow handlers (either predefined or architecture specific) are assigned to specific interrupts by the architecture @@ -241,13 +243,13 @@ <programlisting> default_enable(struct irq_data *data) { - desc->chip->irq_unmask(data); + desc->irq_data.chip->irq_unmask(data); } default_disable(struct irq_data *data) { if (!delay_disable(data)) - desc->chip->irq_mask(data); + desc->irq_data.chip->irq_mask(data); } default_ack(struct irq_data *data) @@ -284,9 +286,9 @@ noop(struct irq_data *data)) <para> The following control flow is implemented (simplified excerpt): <programlisting> -desc->chip->irq_mask(); -handle_IRQ_event(desc->action); -desc->chip->irq_unmask(); +desc->irq_data.chip->irq_mask_ack(); +handle_irq_event(desc->action); +desc->irq_data.chip->irq_unmask(); </programlisting> </para> </sect3> @@ -300,8 +302,8 @@ desc->chip->irq_unmask(); <para> The following control flow is implemented (simplified excerpt): <programlisting> -handle_IRQ_event(desc->action); -desc->chip->irq_eoi(); +handle_irq_event(desc->action); +desc->irq_data.chip->irq_eoi(); </programlisting> </para> </sect3> @@ -315,17 +317,17 @@ desc->chip->irq_eoi(); The following control flow is implemented (simplified excerpt): <programlisting> if (desc->status & running) { - desc->chip->irq_mask(); + desc->irq_data.chip->irq_mask_ack(); desc->status |= pending | masked; return; } -desc->chip->irq_ack(); +desc->irq_data.chip->irq_ack(); desc->status |= running; do { if (desc->status & masked) - desc->chip->irq_unmask(); + desc->irq_data.chip->irq_unmask(); desc->status &= ~pending; - handle_IRQ_event(desc->action); + handle_irq_event(desc->action); } while (status & pending); desc->status &= ~running; </programlisting> @@ -344,7 +346,7 @@ desc->status &= ~running; <para> The following control flow is implemented (simplified excerpt): <programlisting> -handle_IRQ_event(desc->action); +handle_irq_event(desc->action); </programlisting> </para> </sect3> @@ -362,12 +364,29 @@ handle_IRQ_event(desc->action); <para> The following control flow is implemented (simplified excerpt): <programlisting> -handle_IRQ_event(desc->action); -if (desc->chip->irq_eoi) - desc->chip->irq_eoi(); +if (desc->irq_data.chip->irq_ack) + desc->irq_data.chip->irq_ack(); +handle_irq_event(desc->action); +if (desc->irq_data.chip->irq_eoi) + desc->irq_data.chip->irq_eoi(); </programlisting> </para> </sect3> + <sect3 id="EOI_Edge_IRQ_flow_handler"> + <title>EOI Edge IRQ flow handler</title> + <para> + handle_edge_eoi_irq provides an abnomination of the edge + handler which is solely used to tame a badly wreckaged + irq controller on powerpc/cell. + </para> + </sect3> + <sect3 id="BAD_IRQ_flow_handler"> + <title>Bad IRQ flow handler</title> + <para> + handle_bad_irq is used for spurious interrupts which + have no real handler assigned.. + </para> + </sect3> </sect2> <sect2 id="Quirks_and_optimizations"> <title>Quirks and optimizations</title> @@ -410,6 +429,7 @@ if (desc->chip->irq_eoi) <listitem><para>irq_mask_ack() - Optional, recommended for performance</para></listitem> <listitem><para>irq_mask()</para></listitem> <listitem><para>irq_unmask()</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>irq_eoi() - Optional, required for eoi flow handlers</para></listitem> <listitem><para>irq_retrigger() - Optional</para></listitem> <listitem><para>irq_set_type() - Optional</para></listitem> <listitem><para>irq_set_wake() - Optional</para></listitem> @@ -424,32 +444,24 @@ if (desc->chip->irq_eoi) <chapter id="doirq"> <title>__do_IRQ entry point</title> <para> - The original implementation __do_IRQ() is an alternative entry - point for all types of interrupts. + The original implementation __do_IRQ() was an alternative entry + point for all types of interrupts. It not longer exists. </para> <para> This handler turned out to be not suitable for all interrupt hardware and was therefore reimplemented with split - functionality for egde/level/simple/percpu interrupts. This is not + functionality for edge/level/simple/percpu interrupts. This is not only a functional optimization. It also shortens code paths for interrupts. </para> - <para> - To make use of the split implementation, replace the call to - __do_IRQ by a call to desc->handle_irq() and associate - the appropriate handler function to desc->handle_irq(). - In most cases the generic handler implementations should - be sufficient. - </para> </chapter> <chapter id="locking"> <title>Locking on SMP</title> <para> The locking of chip registers is up to the architecture that - defines the chip primitives. There is a chip->lock field that can be used - for serialization, but the generic layer does not touch it. The per-irq - structure is protected via desc->lock, by the generic layer. + defines the chip primitives. The per-irq structure is + protected via desc->lock, by the generic layer. </para> </chapter> <chapter id="structs"> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl index f66f4df1869..67e7ab41c0a 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl @@ -1763,7 +1763,7 @@ as it would be on UP. There is a furthur optimization possible here: remember our original cache code, where there were no reference counts and the caller simply held the lock whenever using the object? This is still possible: if -you hold the lock, noone can delete the object, so you don't need to +you hold the lock, no one can delete the object, so you don't need to get and put the reference count. </para> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/libata.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/libata.tmpl index 8c5411cfeaf..cdd1bb9aac0 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/libata.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/libata.tmpl @@ -1032,7 +1032,7 @@ and other resources, etc. <listitem> <para> This is indicated by ICRC bit in the ERROR register and - means that corruption occurred during data transfer. Upto + means that corruption occurred during data transfer. Up to ATA/ATAPI-7, the standard specifies that this bit is only applicable to UDMA transfers but ATA/ATAPI-8 draft revision 1f says that the bit may be applicable to multiword DMA and @@ -1045,10 +1045,10 @@ and other resources, etc. <term>ABRT error during data transfer or on completion</term> <listitem> <para> - Upto ATA/ATAPI-7, the standard specifies that ABRT could be + Up to ATA/ATAPI-7, the standard specifies that ABRT could be set on ICRC errors and on cases where a device is not able to complete a command. Combined with the fact that MWDMA - and PIO transfer errors aren't allowed to use ICRC bit upto + and PIO transfer errors aren't allowed to use ICRC bit up to ATA/ATAPI-7, it seems to imply that ABRT bit alone could indicate tranfer errors. </para> @@ -1122,7 +1122,7 @@ and other resources, etc. <para> Depending on commands, not all STATUS/ERROR bits are applicable. These non-applicable bits are marked with - "na" in the output descriptions but upto ATA/ATAPI-7 + "na" in the output descriptions but up to ATA/ATAPI-7 no definition of "na" can be found. However, ATA/ATAPI-8 draft revision 1f describes "N/A" as follows. @@ -1507,7 +1507,7 @@ and other resources, etc. <listitem> <para> - CHS set up with INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS (seldomly used) + CHS set up with INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS (seldom used) </para> </listitem> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media-entities.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/media-entities.tmpl index 5d259c632cd..e5fe09430fd 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media-entities.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media-entities.tmpl @@ -270,6 +270,7 @@ <!ENTITY sub-write SYSTEM "v4l/func-write.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-io SYSTEM "v4l/io.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-grey SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-grey.xml"> +<!ENTITY sub-m420 SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-m420.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-nv12 SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-nv12.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-nv12m SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-nv12m.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-nv12mt SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-nv12mt.xml"> @@ -292,8 +293,11 @@ <!ENTITY sub-yuyv SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-yuyv.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-yvyu SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-yvyu.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-srggb10 SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-srggb10.xml"> +<!ENTITY sub-srggb12 SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-srggb12.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-srggb8 SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-srggb8.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-y10 SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-y10.xml"> +<!ENTITY sub-y12 SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-y12.xml"> +<!ENTITY sub-y10b SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-y10b.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-pixfmt SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-cropcap SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-cropcap.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-dbg-g-register SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-dbg-g-register.xml"> @@ -370,9 +374,9 @@ <!ENTITY sub-media-indices SYSTEM "media-indices.tmpl"> <!ENTITY sub-media-controller SYSTEM "v4l/media-controller.xml"> -<!ENTITY sub-media-open SYSTEM "v4l/media-func-open.xml"> -<!ENTITY sub-media-close SYSTEM "v4l/media-func-close.xml"> -<!ENTITY sub-media-ioctl SYSTEM "v4l/media-func-ioctl.xml"> +<!ENTITY sub-media-func-open SYSTEM "v4l/media-func-open.xml"> +<!ENTITY sub-media-func-close SYSTEM "v4l/media-func-close.xml"> +<!ENTITY sub-media-func-ioctl SYSTEM "v4l/media-func-ioctl.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-media-ioc-device-info SYSTEM "v4l/media-ioc-device-info.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-media-ioc-enum-entities SYSTEM "v4l/media-ioc-enum-entities.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-media-ioc-enum-links SYSTEM "v4l/media-ioc-enum-links.xml"> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl index 620eb3f6a90..17910e2052a 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl @@ -189,8 +189,7 @@ static void __iomem *baseaddr; <title>Partition defines</title> <para> If you want to divide your device into partitions, then - enable the configuration switch CONFIG_MTD_PARTITIONS and define - a partitioning scheme suitable to your board. + define a partitioning scheme suitable to your board. </para> <programlisting> #define NUM_PARTITIONS 2 @@ -485,7 +484,7 @@ static void board_select_chip (struct mtd_info *mtd, int chip) Reed-Solomon library. </para> <para> - The ECC bytes must be placed immidiately after the data + The ECC bytes must be placed immediately after the data bytes in order to make the syndrome generator work. This is contrary to the usual layout used by software ECC. The separation of data and out of band area is not longer @@ -629,7 +628,7 @@ static void board_select_chip (struct mtd_info *mtd, int chip) holds the bad block table. Store a pointer to the pattern in the pattern field. Further the length of the pattern has to be stored in len and the offset in the spare area must be given - in the offs member of the nand_bbt_descr stucture. For mirrored + in the offs member of the nand_bbt_descr structure. For mirrored bad block tables different patterns are mandatory.</para></listitem> <listitem><para>Table creation</para> <para>Set the option NAND_BBT_CREATE to enable the table creation @@ -648,7 +647,7 @@ static void board_select_chip (struct mtd_info *mtd, int chip) <listitem><para>Table version control</para> <para>Set the option NAND_BBT_VERSION to enable the table version control. It's highly recommended to enable this for mirrored tables with write - support. It makes sure that the risk of loosing the bad block + support. It makes sure that the risk of losing the bad block table information is reduced to the loss of the information about the one worn out block which should be marked bad. The version is stored in 4 consecutive bytes in the spare area of the device. The position of @@ -1060,19 +1059,19 @@ data in this page</entry> <row> <entry>0x3D</entry> <entry>ECC byte 21</entry> -<entry>Error correction code byte 0 of the eigth 256 Bytes of data +<entry>Error correction code byte 0 of the eighth 256 Bytes of data in this page</entry> </row> <row> <entry>0x3E</entry> <entry>ECC byte 22</entry> -<entry>Error correction code byte 1 of the eigth 256 Bytes of data +<entry>Error correction code byte 1 of the eighth 256 Bytes of data in this page</entry> </row> <row> <entry>0x3F</entry> <entry>ECC byte 23</entry> -<entry>Error correction code byte 2 of the eigth 256 Bytes of data +<entry>Error correction code byte 2 of the eighth 256 Bytes of data in this page</entry> </row> </tbody></tgroup></informaltable> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/regulator.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/regulator.tmpl index 53f4f8d3b81..346e552fa2c 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/regulator.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/regulator.tmpl @@ -267,8 +267,8 @@ <sect1 id="machine-constraint"> <title>Constraints</title> <para> - As well as definining the connections the machine interface - also provides constraints definining the operations that + As well as defining the connections the machine interface + also provides constraints defining the operations that clients are allowed to perform and the parameters that may be set. This is required since generally regulator devices will offer more flexibility than it is safe to use on a given diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl index b4665b9c40b..7c4b514d62b 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl @@ -797,7 +797,7 @@ framework to set up sysfs files for this region. Simply leave it alone. perform some initialization. After that, your hardware starts working and will generate an interrupt as soon as it's finished, has some data available, or needs your - attention because an error occured. + attention because an error occurred. </para> <para> <filename>/dev/uioX</filename> is a read-only file. A diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/usb.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/usb.tmpl index af293606fbe..8d57c1888dc 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/usb.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/usb.tmpl @@ -690,7 +690,7 @@ usbdev_ioctl (int fd, int ifno, unsigned request, void *param) </para><para> This request lets kernel drivers talk to user mode code through filesystem operations even when they don't create - a charactor or block special device. + a character or block special device. It's also been used to do things like ask devices what device special file should be used. Two pre-defined ioctls are used diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/common.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/common.xml index dbab79c215c..9028721438d 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/common.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/common.xml @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org, 2002-11-20. --></para> <para>By convention system administrators create various character device special files with these major and minor numbers in -the <filename>/dev</filename> directory. The names recomended for the +the <filename>/dev</filename> directory. The names recommended for the different V4L2 device types are listed in <xref linkend="devices" />. </para> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/controls.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/controls.xml index 2fae3e87ce7..a920ee80f64 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/controls.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/controls.xml @@ -1243,7 +1243,7 @@ values are:</entry> </row><row><entry spanname="descr">Mutes the audio when capturing. This is not done by muting audio hardware, which can still produce a slight hiss, but in the encoder itself, guaranteeing a fixed -and reproducable audio bitstream. 0 = unmuted, 1 = muted.</entry> +and reproducible audio bitstream. 0 = unmuted, 1 = muted.</entry> </row> <row><entry></entry></row> <row id="v4l2-mpeg-video-encoding"> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-subdev.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-subdev.xml index 21caff6d159..05c8fefcbcb 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-subdev.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-subdev.xml @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ processing hardware.</para> <figure id="pipeline-scaling"> - <title>Image Format Negotation on Pipelines</title> + <title>Image Format Negotiation on Pipelines</title> <mediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="pipeline.pdf" format="PS" /> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/libv4l.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/libv4l.xml index c14fc3db2a8..3cb10ec5192 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/libv4l.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/libv4l.xml @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ and is not locked sets the cid to the scaled value. <para>int v4l2_get_control(int fd, int cid) - This function returns a value of 0 - 65535, scaled to from the actual range of the given v4l control id. when the cid does not exist, could not be -accessed for some reason, or some error occured 0 is returned. +accessed for some reason, or some error occurred 0 is returned. </para></listitem> </itemizedlist> </section> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/media-controller.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/media-controller.xml index 2dc25e1d408..873ac3a621f 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/media-controller.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/media-controller.xml @@ -78,9 +78,9 @@ <appendix id="media-user-func"> <title>Function Reference</title> <!-- Keep this alphabetically sorted. --> - &sub-media-open; - &sub-media-close; - &sub-media-ioctl; + &sub-media-func-open; + &sub-media-func-close; + &sub-media-func-ioctl; <!-- All ioctls go here. --> &sub-media-ioc-device-info; &sub-media-ioc-enum-entities; diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/media-ioc-setup-link.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/media-ioc-setup-link.xml index 2331e76ded1..cec97af4dab 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/media-ioc-setup-link.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/media-ioc-setup-link.xml @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ <varlistentry> <term><parameter>request</parameter></term> <listitem> - <para>MEDIA_IOC_ENUM_LINKS</para> + <para>MEDIA_IOC_SETUP_LINK</para> </listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-m420.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-m420.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ce4bc019e5c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-m420.xml @@ -0,0 +1,147 @@ + <refentry id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-M420"> + <refmeta> + <refentrytitle>V4L2_PIX_FMT_M420 ('M420')</refentrytitle> + &manvol; + </refmeta> + <refnamediv> + <refname><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_M420</constant></refname> + <refpurpose>Format with ½ horizontal and vertical chroma + resolution, also known as YUV 4:2:0. Hybrid plane line-interleaved + layout.</refpurpose> + </refnamediv> + <refsect1> + <title>Description</title> + + <para>M420 is a YUV format with ½ horizontal and vertical chroma + subsampling (YUV 4:2:0). Pixels are organized as interleaved luma and + chroma planes. Two lines of luma data are followed by one line of chroma + data.</para> + <para>The luma plane has one byte per pixel. The chroma plane contains + interleaved CbCr pixels subsampled by ½ in the horizontal and + vertical directions. Each CbCr pair belongs to four pixels. For example, +Cb<subscript>0</subscript>/Cr<subscript>0</subscript> belongs to +Y'<subscript>00</subscript>, Y'<subscript>01</subscript>, +Y'<subscript>10</subscript>, Y'<subscript>11</subscript>.</para> + + <para>All line lengths are identical: if the Y lines include pad bytes + so do the CbCr lines.</para> + + <example> + <title><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_M420</constant> 4 × 4 +pixel image</title> + + <formalpara> + <title>Byte Order.</title> + <para>Each cell is one byte. + <informaltable frame="none"> + <tgroup cols="5" align="center"> + <colspec align="left" colwidth="2*" /> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry>start + 0:</entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>00</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>01</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>02</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>03</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 4:</entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>10</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>11</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>12</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>13</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 8:</entry> + <entry>Cb<subscript>00</subscript></entry> + <entry>Cr<subscript>00</subscript></entry> + <entry>Cb<subscript>01</subscript></entry> + <entry>Cr<subscript>01</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 16:</entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>20</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>21</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>22</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>23</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 20:</entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>30</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>31</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>32</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>33</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 24:</entry> + <entry>Cb<subscript>10</subscript></entry> + <entry>Cr<subscript>10</subscript></entry> + <entry>Cb<subscript>11</subscript></entry> + <entry>Cr<subscript>11</subscript></entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </informaltable> + </para> + </formalpara> + + <formalpara> + <title>Color Sample Location.</title> + <para> + <informaltable frame="none"> + <tgroup cols="7" align="center"> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry></entry> + <entry>0</entry><entry></entry><entry>1</entry><entry></entry> + <entry>2</entry><entry></entry><entry>3</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>0</entry> + <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry><entry></entry> + <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry></entry> + <entry></entry><entry>C</entry><entry></entry><entry></entry> + <entry></entry><entry>C</entry><entry></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>1</entry> + <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry><entry></entry> + <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>2</entry> + <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry><entry></entry> + <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry></entry> + <entry></entry><entry>C</entry><entry></entry><entry></entry> + <entry></entry><entry>C</entry><entry></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>3</entry> + <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry><entry></entry> + <entry>Y</entry><entry></entry><entry>Y</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </informaltable> + </para> + </formalpara> + </example> + </refsect1> + </refentry> + + <!-- +Local Variables: +mode: sgml +sgml-parent-document: "pixfmt.sgml" +indent-tabs-mode: nil +End: + --> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-y10b.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-y10b.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..adb0ad808c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-y10b.xml @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +<refentry id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-Y10BPACK"> + <refmeta> + <refentrytitle>V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y10BPACK ('Y10B')</refentrytitle> + &manvol; + </refmeta> + <refnamediv> + <refname><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y10BPACK</constant></refname> + <refpurpose>Grey-scale image as a bit-packed array</refpurpose> + </refnamediv> + <refsect1> + <title>Description</title> + + <para>This is a packed grey-scale image format with a depth of 10 bits per + pixel. Pixels are stored in a bit-packed array of 10bit bits per pixel, + with no padding between them and with the most significant bits coming + first from the left.</para> + + <example> + <title><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y10BPACK</constant> 4 pixel data stream taking 5 bytes</title> + + <formalpara> + <title>Bit-packed representation</title> + <para>pixels cross the byte boundary and have a ratio of 5 bytes for each 4 + pixels. + <informaltable frame="all"> + <tgroup cols="5" align="center"> + <colspec align="left" colwidth="2*" /> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry>Y'<subscript>00[9:2]</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>00[1:0]</subscript>Y'<subscript>01[9:4]</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>01[3:0]</subscript>Y'<subscript>02[9:6]</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>02[5:0]</subscript>Y'<subscript>03[9:8]</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>03[7:0]</subscript></entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </informaltable> + </para> + </formalpara> + </example> + </refsect1> +</refentry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-y12.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-y12.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ff417b858cc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-y12.xml @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +<refentry id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-Y12"> + <refmeta> + <refentrytitle>V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y12 ('Y12 ')</refentrytitle> + &manvol; + </refmeta> + <refnamediv> + <refname><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y12</constant></refname> + <refpurpose>Grey-scale image</refpurpose> + </refnamediv> + <refsect1> + <title>Description</title> + + <para>This is a grey-scale image with a depth of 12 bits per pixel. Pixels +are stored in 16-bit words with unused high bits padded with 0. The least +significant byte is stored at lower memory addresses (little-endian).</para> + + <example> + <title><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y12</constant> 4 × 4 +pixel image</title> + + <formalpara> + <title>Byte Order.</title> + <para>Each cell is one byte. + <informaltable frame="none"> + <tgroup cols="9" align="center"> + <colspec align="left" colwidth="2*" /> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry>start + 0:</entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>00low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>00high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>01low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>01high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>02low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>02high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>03low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>03high</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 8:</entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>10low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>10high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>11low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>11high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>12low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>12high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>13low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>13high</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 16:</entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>20low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>20high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>21low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>21high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>22low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>22high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>23low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>23high</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 24:</entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>30low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>30high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>31low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>31high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>32low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>32high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>33low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>33high</subscript></entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </informaltable> + </para> + </formalpara> + </example> + </refsect1> +</refentry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt.xml index c6fdcbbd1b4..deb660207f9 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt.xml @@ -673,6 +673,7 @@ access the palette, this must be done with ioctls of the Linux framebuffer API.< &sub-srggb8; &sub-sbggr16; &sub-srggb10; + &sub-srggb12; </section> <section id="yuv-formats"> @@ -696,6 +697,8 @@ information.</para> &sub-packed-yuv; &sub-grey; &sub-y10; + &sub-y12; + &sub-y10b; &sub-y16; &sub-yuyv; &sub-uyvy; @@ -711,6 +714,7 @@ information.</para> &sub-nv12m; &sub-nv12mt; &sub-nv16; + &sub-m420; </section> <section> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/remote_controllers.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/remote_controllers.xml index 3c3b667b28e..160e464d44b 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/remote_controllers.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/remote_controllers.xml @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ different IR's. Due to that, V4L2 API now specifies a standard for mapping Media <row><entry><constant>KEY_LEFT</constant></entry><entry>Left key</entry><entry>LEFT</entry></row> <row><entry><constant>KEY_RIGHT</constant></entry><entry>Right key</entry><entry>RIGHT</entry></row> -<row><entry><emphasis role="bold">Miscelaneous keys</emphasis></entry></row> +<row><entry><emphasis role="bold">Miscellaneous keys</emphasis></entry></row> <row><entry><constant>KEY_DOT</constant></entry><entry>Return a dot</entry><entry>.</entry></row> <row><entry><constant>KEY_FN</constant></entry><entry>Select a function</entry><entry>FUNCTION</entry></row> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/subdev-formats.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/subdev-formats.xml index 7041127d6df..8d3409d2c63 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/subdev-formats.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/subdev-formats.xml @@ -456,6 +456,23 @@ <entry>b<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>b<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> + <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SGBRG8-1X8"> + <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SGBRG8_1X8</entry> + <entry>0x3013</entry> + <entry></entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>g<subscript>7</subscript></entry> + <entry>g<subscript>6</subscript></entry> + <entry>g<subscript>5</subscript></entry> + <entry>g<subscript>4</subscript></entry> + <entry>g<subscript>3</subscript></entry> + <entry>g<subscript>2</subscript></entry> + <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry> + <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry> + </row> <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SGRBG8-1X8"> <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SGRBG8_1X8</entry> <entry>0x3002</entry> @@ -473,6 +490,23 @@ <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> + <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SRGGB8-1X8"> + <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SRGGB8_1X8</entry> + <entry>0x3014</entry> + <entry></entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>r<subscript>7</subscript></entry> + <entry>r<subscript>6</subscript></entry> + <entry>r<subscript>5</subscript></entry> + <entry>r<subscript>4</subscript></entry> + <entry>r<subscript>3</subscript></entry> + <entry>r<subscript>2</subscript></entry> + <entry>r<subscript>1</subscript></entry> + <entry>r<subscript>0</subscript></entry> + </row> <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SBGGR10-DPCM8-1X8"> <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SBGGR10_DPCM8_1X8</entry> <entry>0x300b</entry> @@ -2159,6 +2193,31 @@ <entry>u<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>u<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> + <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-Y12-1X12"> + <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_Y12_1X12</entry> + <entry>0x2013</entry> + <entry></entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>y<subscript>11</subscript></entry> + <entry>y<subscript>10</subscript></entry> + <entry>y<subscript>9</subscript></entry> + <entry>y<subscript>8</subscript></entry> + <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry> + <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry> + <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry> + <entry>y<subscript>4</subscript></entry> + <entry>y<subscript>3</subscript></entry> + <entry>y<subscript>2</subscript></entry> + <entry>y<subscript>1</subscript></entry> + <entry>y<subscript>0</subscript></entry> + </row> <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-UYVY8-1X16"> <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_UYVY8_1X16</entry> <entry>0x200f</entry> @@ -2463,5 +2522,51 @@ </tgroup> </table> </section> + + <section> + <title>JPEG Compressed Formats</title> + + <para>Those data formats consist of an ordered sequence of 8-bit bytes + obtained from JPEG compression process. Additionally to the + <constant>_JPEG</constant> prefix the format code is made of + the following information. + <itemizedlist> + <listitem><para>The number of bus samples per entropy encoded byte.</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>The bus width.</para></listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </para> + + <para>For instance, for a JPEG baseline process and an 8-bit bus width + the format will be named <constant>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_JPEG_1X8</constant>. + </para> + + <para>The following table lists existing JPEG compressed formats.</para> + + <table pgwide="0" frame="none" id="v4l2-mbus-pixelcode-jpeg"> + <title>JPEG Formats</title> + <tgroup cols="3"> + <colspec colname="id" align="left" /> + <colspec colname="code" align="left"/> + <colspec colname="remarks" align="left"/> + <thead> + <row> + <entry>Identifier</entry> + <entry>Code</entry> + <entry>Remarks</entry> + </row> + </thead> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-JPEG-1X8"> + <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_JPEG_1X8</entry> + <entry>0x4001</entry> + <entry>Besides of its usage for the parallel bus this format is + recommended for transmission of JPEG data over MIPI CSI bus + using the User Defined 8-bit Data types. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + </section> </section> </section> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/videodev2.h.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/videodev2.h.xml index 2b796a2ee98..c50536a4f59 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/videodev2.h.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/videodev2.h.xml @@ -311,6 +311,9 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-pix-format">v4l2_pix_format</link> { #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-Y10">V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y10</link> v4l2_fourcc('Y', '1', '0', ' ') /* 10 Greyscale */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-Y16">V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y16</link> v4l2_fourcc('Y', '1', '6', ' ') /* 16 Greyscale */ +/* Grey bit-packed formats */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-Y10BPACK">V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y10BPACK</link> v4l2_fourcc('Y', '1', '0', 'B') /* 10 Greyscale bit-packed */ + /* Palette formats */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-PAL8">V4L2_PIX_FMT_PAL8</link> v4l2_fourcc('P', 'A', 'L', '8') /* 8 8-bit palette */ @@ -333,6 +336,7 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-pix-format">v4l2_pix_format</link> { #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-YUV420">V4L2_PIX_FMT_YUV420</link> v4l2_fourcc('Y', 'U', '1', '2') /* 12 YUV 4:2:0 */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-HI240">V4L2_PIX_FMT_HI240</link> v4l2_fourcc('H', 'I', '2', '4') /* 8 8-bit color */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-HM12">V4L2_PIX_FMT_HM12</link> v4l2_fourcc('H', 'M', '1', '2') /* 8 YUV 4:2:0 16x16 macroblocks */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-M420">V4L2_PIX_FMT_M420</link> v4l2_fourcc('M', '4', '2', '0') /* 12 YUV 4:2:0 2 lines y, 1 line uv interleaved */ /* two planes -- one Y, one Cr + Cb interleaved */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-NV12">V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12</link> v4l2_fourcc('N', 'V', '1', '2') /* 12 Y/CbCr 4:2:0 */ diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl index 0ba149de260..58ced2346e6 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl @@ -4784,7 +4784,7 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime { FM registers can be directly accessed through the direct-FM API, defined in <filename><sound/asound_fm.h></filename>. In ALSA native mode, FM registers are accessed through - the Hardware-Dependant Device direct-FM extension API, whereas in + the Hardware-Dependent Device direct-FM extension API, whereas in OSS compatible mode, FM registers can be accessed with the OSS direct-FM compatible API in <filename>/dev/dmfmX</filename> device. </para> diff --git a/Documentation/HOWTO b/Documentation/HOWTO index 365bda9a0d9..81bc1a9ab9d 100644 --- a/Documentation/HOWTO +++ b/Documentation/HOWTO @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ tools. One such tool that is particularly recommended is the Linux Cross-Reference project, which is able to present source code in a self-referential, indexed webpage format. An excellent up-to-date repository of the kernel code may be found at: - http://users.sosdg.org/~qiyong/lxr/ + http://lxr.linux.no/+trees The development process diff --git a/Documentation/IRQ-affinity.txt b/Documentation/IRQ-affinity.txt index b4a615b7840..7890fae1852 100644 --- a/Documentation/IRQ-affinity.txt +++ b/Documentation/IRQ-affinity.txt @@ -4,10 +4,11 @@ ChangeLog: SMP IRQ affinity -/proc/irq/IRQ#/smp_affinity specifies which target CPUs are permitted -for a given IRQ source. It's a bitmask of allowed CPUs. It's not allowed -to turn off all CPUs, and if an IRQ controller does not support IRQ -affinity then the value will not change from the default 0xffffffff. +/proc/irq/IRQ#/smp_affinity and /proc/irq/IRQ#/smp_affinity_list specify +which target CPUs are permitted for a given IRQ source. It's a bitmask +(smp_affinity) or cpu list (smp_affinity_list) of allowed CPUs. It's not +allowed to turn off all CPUs, and if an IRQ controller does not support +IRQ affinity then the value will not change from the default of all cpus. /proc/irq/default_smp_affinity specifies default affinity mask that applies to all non-active IRQs. Once IRQ is allocated/activated its affinity bitmask @@ -54,3 +55,11 @@ round-trip min/avg/max = 0.1/0.5/585.4 ms This time around IRQ44 was delivered only to the last four processors. i.e counters for the CPU0-3 did not change. +Here is an example of limiting that same irq (44) to cpus 1024 to 1031: + +[root@moon 44]# echo 1024-1031 > smp_affinity +[root@moon 44]# cat smp_affinity +1024-1031 + +Note that to do this with a bitmask would require 32 bitmasks of zero +to follow the pertinent one. diff --git a/Documentation/PCI/MSI-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/PCI/MSI-HOWTO.txt index dcf7acc720e..3f5e0b09bed 100644 --- a/Documentation/PCI/MSI-HOWTO.txt +++ b/Documentation/PCI/MSI-HOWTO.txt @@ -253,8 +253,8 @@ In constrast, MSI is restricted to a maximum of 32 interrupts (and must be a power of two). In addition, the MSI interrupt vectors must be allocated consecutively, so the system may not be able to allocate as many vectors for MSI as it could for MSI-X. On some platforms, MSI -interrupts must all be targetted at the same set of CPUs whereas MSI-X -interrupts can all be targetted at different CPUs. +interrupts must all be targeted at the same set of CPUs whereas MSI-X +interrupts can all be targeted at different CPUs. 4.5.2 Spinlocks diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX b/Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX index 71b6f500ddb..1d7a885761f 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ rcu.txt RTFP.txt - List of RCU papers (bibliography) going back to 1980. stallwarn.txt - - RCU CPU stall warnings (CONFIG_RCU_CPU_STALL_DETECTOR) + - RCU CPU stall warnings (module parameter rcu_cpu_stall_suppress) torture.txt - RCU Torture Test Operation (CONFIG_RCU_TORTURE_TEST) trace.txt diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt b/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt index 862c08ef1fd..4e959208f73 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt @@ -1,22 +1,25 @@ Using RCU's CPU Stall Detector -The CONFIG_RCU_CPU_STALL_DETECTOR kernel config parameter enables -RCU's CPU stall detector, which detects conditions that unduly delay -RCU grace periods. The stall detector's idea of what constitutes -"unduly delayed" is controlled by a set of C preprocessor macros: +The rcu_cpu_stall_suppress module parameter enables RCU's CPU stall +detector, which detects conditions that unduly delay RCU grace periods. +This module parameter enables CPU stall detection by default, but +may be overridden via boot-time parameter or at runtime via sysfs. +The stall detector's idea of what constitutes "unduly delayed" is +controlled by a set of kernel configuration variables and cpp macros: -RCU_SECONDS_TILL_STALL_CHECK +CONFIG_RCU_CPU_STALL_TIMEOUT - This macro defines the period of time that RCU will wait from - the beginning of a grace period until it issues an RCU CPU - stall warning. This time period is normally ten seconds. + This kernel configuration parameter defines the period of time + that RCU will wait from the beginning of a grace period until it + issues an RCU CPU stall warning. This time period is normally + ten seconds. RCU_SECONDS_TILL_STALL_RECHECK This macro defines the period of time that RCU will wait after issuing a stall warning until it issues another stall warning - for the same stall. This time period is normally set to thirty - seconds. + for the same stall. This time period is normally set to three + times the check interval plus thirty seconds. RCU_STALL_RAT_DELAY diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt index 6a8c73f55b8..8173cec473a 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt @@ -10,34 +10,46 @@ for rcutree and next for rcutiny. CONFIG_TREE_RCU and CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU debugfs Files and Formats -These implementations of RCU provides five debugfs files under the -top-level directory RCU: rcu/rcudata (which displays fields in struct -rcu_data), rcu/rcudata.csv (which is a .csv spreadsheet version of -rcu/rcudata), rcu/rcugp (which displays grace-period counters), -rcu/rcuhier (which displays the struct rcu_node hierarchy), and -rcu/rcu_pending (which displays counts of the reasons that the -rcu_pending() function decided that there was core RCU work to do). +These implementations of RCU provides several debugfs files under the +top-level directory "rcu": + +rcu/rcudata: + Displays fields in struct rcu_data. +rcu/rcudata.csv: + Comma-separated values spreadsheet version of rcudata. +rcu/rcugp: + Displays grace-period counters. +rcu/rcuhier: + Displays the struct rcu_node hierarchy. +rcu/rcu_pending: + Displays counts of the reasons rcu_pending() decided that RCU had + work to do. +rcu/rcutorture: + Displays rcutorture test progress. +rcu/rcuboost: + Displays RCU boosting statistics. Only present if + CONFIG_RCU_BOOST=y. The output of "cat rcu/rcudata" looks as follows: rcu_sched: - 0 c=17829 g=17829 pq=1 pqc=17829 qp=0 dt=10951/1 dn=0 df=1101 of=0 ri=36 ql=0 b=10 - 1 c=17829 g=17829 pq=1 pqc=17829 qp=0 dt=16117/1 dn=0 df=1015 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 - 2 c=17829 g=17829 pq=1 pqc=17829 qp=0 dt=1445/1 dn=0 df=1839 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 - 3 c=17829 g=17829 pq=1 pqc=17829 qp=0 dt=6681/1 dn=0 df=1545 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 - 4 c=17829 g=17829 pq=1 pqc=17829 qp=0 dt=1003/1 dn=0 df=1992 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 - 5 c=17829 g=17830 pq=1 pqc=17829 qp=1 dt=3887/1 dn=0 df=3331 of=0 ri=4 ql=2 b=10 - 6 c=17829 g=17829 pq=1 pqc=17829 qp=0 dt=859/1 dn=0 df=3224 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 - 7 c=17829 g=17830 pq=0 pqc=17829 qp=1 dt=3761/1 dn=0 df=1818 of=0 ri=0 ql=2 b=10 + 0 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pqc=20972 qp=0 dt=545/1/0 df=50 of=0 ri=0 ql=163 qs=NRW. kt=0/W/0 ktl=ebc3 b=10 ci=153737 co=0 ca=0 + 1 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pqc=20972 qp=0 dt=967/1/0 df=58 of=0 ri=0 ql=634 qs=NRW. kt=0/W/1 ktl=58c b=10 ci=191037 co=0 ca=0 + 2 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pqc=20972 qp=0 dt=1081/1/0 df=175 of=0 ri=0 ql=74 qs=N.W. kt=0/W/2 ktl=da94 b=10 ci=75991 co=0 ca=0 + 3 c=20942 g=20943 pq=1 pqc=20942 qp=1 dt=1846/0/0 df=404 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/3 ktl=d1cd b=10 ci=72261 co=0 ca=0 + 4 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pqc=20972 qp=0 dt=369/1/0 df=83 of=0 ri=0 ql=48 qs=N.W. kt=0/W/4 ktl=e0e7 b=10 ci=128365 co=0 ca=0 + 5 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pqc=20972 qp=0 dt=381/1/0 df=64 of=0 ri=0 ql=169 qs=NRW. kt=0/W/5 ktl=fb2f b=10 ci=164360 co=0 ca=0 + 6 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pqc=20972 qp=0 dt=1037/1/0 df=183 of=0 ri=0 ql=62 qs=N.W. kt=0/W/6 ktl=d2ad b=10 ci=65663 co=0 ca=0 + 7 c=20897 g=20897 pq=1 pqc=20896 qp=0 dt=1572/0/0 df=382 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/7 ktl=cf15 b=10 ci=75006 co=0 ca=0 rcu_bh: - 0 c=-275 g=-275 pq=1 pqc=-275 qp=0 dt=10951/1 dn=0 df=0 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 - 1 c=-275 g=-275 pq=1 pqc=-275 qp=0 dt=16117/1 dn=0 df=13 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 - 2 c=-275 g=-275 pq=1 pqc=-275 qp=0 dt=1445/1 dn=0 df=15 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 - 3 c=-275 g=-275 pq=1 pqc=-275 qp=0 dt=6681/1 dn=0 df=9 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 - 4 c=-275 g=-275 pq=1 pqc=-275 qp=0 dt=1003/1 dn=0 df=15 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 - 5 c=-275 g=-275 pq=1 pqc=-275 qp=0 dt=3887/1 dn=0 df=15 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 - 6 c=-275 g=-275 pq=1 pqc=-275 qp=0 dt=859/1 dn=0 df=15 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 - 7 c=-275 g=-275 pq=1 pqc=-275 qp=0 dt=3761/1 dn=0 df=15 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 + 0 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=545/1/0 df=6 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/0 ktl=ebc3 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 + 1 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=967/1/0 df=3 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/1 ktl=58c b=10 ci=151 co=0 ca=0 + 2 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=1081/1/0 df=6 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/2 ktl=da94 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 + 3 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=1846/0/0 df=8 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/3 ktl=d1cd b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 + 4 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=369/1/0 df=6 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/4 ktl=e0e7 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 + 5 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=381/1/0 df=4 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/5 ktl=fb2f b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 + 6 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=1037/1/0 df=6 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/6 ktl=d2ad b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 + 7 c=1474 g=1474 pq=1 pqc=1473 qp=0 dt=1572/0/0 df=8 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/7 ktl=cf15 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 The first section lists the rcu_data structures for rcu_sched, the second for rcu_bh. Note that CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU kernels will have an @@ -52,17 +64,18 @@ o The number at the beginning of each line is the CPU number. substantially larger than the number of actual CPUs. o "c" is the count of grace periods that this CPU believes have - completed. CPUs in dynticks idle mode may lag quite a ways - behind, for example, CPU 4 under "rcu_sched" above, which has - slept through the past 25 RCU grace periods. It is not unusual - to see CPUs lagging by thousands of grace periods. + completed. Offlined CPUs and CPUs in dynticks idle mode may + lag quite a ways behind, for example, CPU 6 under "rcu_sched" + above, which has been offline through not quite 40,000 RCU grace + periods. It is not unusual to see CPUs lagging by thousands of + grace periods. o "g" is the count of grace periods that this CPU believes have - started. Again, CPUs in dynticks idle mode may lag behind. - If the "c" and "g" values are equal, this CPU has already - reported a quiescent state for the last RCU grace period that - it is aware of, otherwise, the CPU believes that it owes RCU a - quiescent state. + started. Again, offlined CPUs and CPUs in dynticks idle mode + may lag behind. If the "c" and "g" values are equal, this CPU + has already reported a quiescent state for the last RCU grace + period that it is aware of, otherwise, the CPU believes that it + owes RCU a quiescent state. o "pq" indicates that this CPU has passed through a quiescent state for the current grace period. It is possible for "pq" to be @@ -81,22 +94,16 @@ o "pqc" indicates which grace period the last-observed quiescent the next grace period! o "qp" indicates that RCU still expects a quiescent state from - this CPU. + this CPU. Offlined CPUs and CPUs in dyntick idle mode might + well have qp=1, which is OK: RCU is still ignoring them. o "dt" is the current value of the dyntick counter that is incremented when entering or leaving dynticks idle state, either by the - scheduler or by irq. The number after the "/" is the interrupt - nesting depth when in dyntick-idle state, or one greater than - the interrupt-nesting depth otherwise. - - This field is displayed only for CONFIG_NO_HZ kernels. - -o "dn" is the current value of the dyntick counter that is incremented - when entering or leaving dynticks idle state via NMI. If both - the "dt" and "dn" values are even, then this CPU is in dynticks - idle mode and may be ignored by RCU. If either of these two - counters is odd, then RCU must be alert to the possibility of - an RCU read-side critical section running on this CPU. + scheduler or by irq. This number is even if the CPU is in + dyntick idle mode and odd otherwise. The number after the first + "/" is the interrupt nesting depth when in dyntick-idle state, + or one greater than the interrupt-nesting depth otherwise. + The number after the second "/" is the NMI nesting depth. This field is displayed only for CONFIG_NO_HZ kernels. @@ -108,7 +115,7 @@ o "df" is the number of times that some other CPU has forced a o "of" is the number of times that some other CPU has forced a quiescent state on behalf of this CPU due to this CPU being - offline. In a perfect world, this might neve happen, but it + offline. In a perfect world, this might never happen, but it turns out that offlining and onlining a CPU can take several grace periods, and so there is likely to be an extended period of time when RCU believes that the CPU is online when it really is not. @@ -125,6 +132,62 @@ o "ql" is the number of RCU callbacks currently residing on of what state they are in (new, waiting for grace period to start, waiting for grace period to end, ready to invoke). +o "qs" gives an indication of the state of the callback queue + with four characters: + + "N" Indicates that there are callbacks queued that are not + ready to be handled by the next grace period, and thus + will be handled by the grace period following the next + one. + + "R" Indicates that there are callbacks queued that are + ready to be handled by the next grace period. + + "W" Indicates that there are callbacks queued that are + waiting on the current grace period. + + "D" Indicates that there are callbacks queued that have + already been handled by a prior grace period, and are + thus waiting to be invoked. Note that callbacks in + the process of being invoked are not counted here. + Callbacks in the process of being invoked are those + that have been removed from the rcu_data structures + queues by rcu_do_batch(), but which have not yet been + invoked. + + If there are no callbacks in a given one of the above states, + the corresponding character is replaced by ".". + +o "kt" is the per-CPU kernel-thread state. The digit preceding + the first slash is zero if there is no work pending and 1 + otherwise. The character between the first pair of slashes is + as follows: + + "S" The kernel thread is stopped, in other words, all + CPUs corresponding to this rcu_node structure are + offline. + + "R" The kernel thread is running. + + "W" The kernel thread is waiting because there is no work + for it to do. + + "O" The kernel thread is waiting because it has been + forced off of its designated CPU or because its + ->cpus_allowed mask permits it to run on other than + its designated CPU. + + "Y" The kernel thread is yielding to avoid hogging CPU. + + "?" Unknown value, indicates a bug. + + The number after the final slash is the CPU that the kthread + is actually running on. + +o "ktl" is the low-order 16 bits (in hexadecimal) of the count of + the number of times that this CPU's per-CPU kthread has gone + through its loop servicing invoke_rcu_cpu_kthread() requests. + o "b" is the batch limit for this CPU. If more than this number of RCU callbacks is ready to invoke, then the remainder will be deferred. @@ -174,14 +237,14 @@ o "gpnum" is the number of grace periods that have started. It is The output of "cat rcu/rcuhier" looks as follows, with very long lines: c=6902 g=6903 s=2 jfq=3 j=72c7 nfqs=13142/nfqsng=0(13142) fqlh=6 -1/1 .>. 0:127 ^0 -3/3 .>. 0:35 ^0 0/0 .>. 36:71 ^1 0/0 .>. 72:107 ^2 0/0 .>. 108:127 ^3 -3/3f .>. 0:5 ^0 2/3 .>. 6:11 ^1 0/0 .>. 12:17 ^2 0/0 .>. 18:23 ^3 0/0 .>. 24:29 ^4 0/0 .>. 30:35 ^5 0/0 .>. 36:41 ^0 0/0 .>. 42:47 ^1 0/0 .>. 48:53 ^2 0/0 .>. 54:59 ^3 0/0 .>. 60:65 ^4 0/0 .>. 66:71 ^5 0/0 .>. 72:77 ^0 0/0 .>. 78:83 ^1 0/0 .>. 84:89 ^2 0/0 .>. 90:95 ^3 0/0 .>. 96:101 ^4 0/0 .>. 102:107 ^5 0/0 .>. 108:113 ^0 0/0 .>. 114:119 ^1 0/0 .>. 120:125 ^2 0/0 .>. 126:127 ^3 +1/1 ..>. 0:127 ^0 +3/3 ..>. 0:35 ^0 0/0 ..>. 36:71 ^1 0/0 ..>. 72:107 ^2 0/0 ..>. 108:127 ^3 +3/3f ..>. 0:5 ^0 2/3 ..>. 6:11 ^1 0/0 ..>. 12:17 ^2 0/0 ..>. 18:23 ^3 0/0 ..>. 24:29 ^4 0/0 ..>. 30:35 ^5 0/0 ..>. 36:41 ^0 0/0 ..>. 42:47 ^1 0/0 ..>. 48:53 ^2 0/0 ..>. 54:59 ^3 0/0 ..>. 60:65 ^4 0/0 ..>. 66:71 ^5 0/0 ..>. 72:77 ^0 0/0 ..>. 78:83 ^1 0/0 ..>. 84:89 ^2 0/0 ..>. 90:95 ^3 0/0 ..>. 96:101 ^4 0/0 ..>. 102:107 ^5 0/0 ..>. 108:113 ^0 0/0 ..>. 114:119 ^1 0/0 ..>. 120:125 ^2 0/0 ..>. 126:127 ^3 rcu_bh: c=-226 g=-226 s=1 jfq=-5701 j=72c7 nfqs=88/nfqsng=0(88) fqlh=0 -0/1 .>. 0:127 ^0 -0/3 .>. 0:35 ^0 0/0 .>. 36:71 ^1 0/0 .>. 72:107 ^2 0/0 .>. 108:127 ^3 -0/3f .>. 0:5 ^0 0/3 .>. 6:11 ^1 0/0 .>. 12:17 ^2 0/0 .>. 18:23 ^3 0/0 .>. 24:29 ^4 0/0 .>. 30:35 ^5 0/0 .>. 36:41 ^0 0/0 .>. 42:47 ^1 0/0 .>. 48:53 ^2 0/0 .>. 54:59 ^3 0/0 .>. 60:65 ^4 0/0 .>. 66:71 ^5 0/0 .>. 72:77 ^0 0/0 .>. 78:83 ^1 0/0 .>. 84:89 ^2 0/0 .>. 90:95 ^3 0/0 .>. 96:101 ^4 0/0 .>. 102:107 ^5 0/0 .>. 108:113 ^0 0/0 .>. 114:119 ^1 0/0 .>. 120:125 ^2 0/0 .>. 126:127 ^3 +0/1 ..>. 0:127 ^0 +0/3 ..>. 0:35 ^0 0/0 ..>. 36:71 ^1 0/0 ..>. 72:107 ^2 0/0 ..>. 108:127 ^3 +0/3f ..>. 0:5 ^0 0/3 ..>. 6:11 ^1 0/0 ..>. 12:17 ^2 0/0 ..>. 18:23 ^3 0/0 ..>. 24:29 ^4 0/0 ..>. 30:35 ^5 0/0 ..>. 36:41 ^0 0/0 ..>. 42:47 ^1 0/0 ..>. 48:53 ^2 0/0 ..>. 54:59 ^3 0/0 ..>. 60:65 ^4 0/0 ..>. 66:71 ^5 0/0 ..>. 72:77 ^0 0/0 ..>. 78:83 ^1 0/0 ..>. 84:89 ^2 0/0 ..>. 90:95 ^3 0/0 ..>. 96:101 ^4 0/0 ..>. 102:107 ^5 0/0 ..>. 108:113 ^0 0/0 ..>. 114:119 ^1 0/0 ..>. 120:125 ^2 0/0 ..>. 126:127 ^3 This is once again split into "rcu_sched" and "rcu_bh" portions, and CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU kernels will again have an additional @@ -240,13 +303,20 @@ o Each element of the form "1/1 0:127 ^0" represents one struct current grace period. o The characters separated by the ">" indicate the state - of the blocked-tasks lists. A "T" preceding the ">" + of the blocked-tasks lists. A "G" preceding the ">" indicates that at least one task blocked in an RCU read-side critical section blocks the current grace - period, while a "." preceding the ">" indicates otherwise. - The character following the ">" indicates similarly for - the next grace period. A "T" should appear in this - field only for rcu-preempt. + period, while a "E" preceding the ">" indicates that + at least one task blocked in an RCU read-side critical + section blocks the current expedited grace period. + A "T" character following the ">" indicates that at + least one task is blocked within an RCU read-side + critical section, regardless of whether any current + grace period (expedited or normal) is inconvenienced. + A "." character appears if the corresponding condition + does not hold, so that "..>." indicates that no tasks + are blocked. In contrast, "GE>T" indicates maximal + inconvenience from blocked tasks. o The numbers separated by the ":" are the range of CPUs served by this struct rcu_node. This can be helpful @@ -328,6 +398,113 @@ o "nn" is the number of times that this CPU needed nothing. Alert is due to short-circuit evaluation in rcu_pending(). +The output of "cat rcu/rcutorture" looks as follows: + +rcutorture test sequence: 0 (test in progress) +rcutorture update version number: 615 + +The first line shows the number of rcutorture tests that have completed +since boot. If a test is currently running, the "(test in progress)" +string will appear as shown above. The second line shows the number of +update cycles that the current test has started, or zero if there is +no test in progress. + + +The output of "cat rcu/rcuboost" looks as follows: + +0:5 tasks=.... kt=W ntb=0 neb=0 nnb=0 j=2f95 bt=300f + balk: nt=0 egt=989 bt=0 nb=0 ny=0 nos=16 +6:7 tasks=.... kt=W ntb=0 neb=0 nnb=0 j=2f95 bt=300f + balk: nt=0 egt=225 bt=0 nb=0 ny=0 nos=6 + +This information is output only for rcu_preempt. Each two-line entry +corresponds to a leaf rcu_node strcuture. The fields are as follows: + +o "n:m" is the CPU-number range for the corresponding two-line + entry. In the sample output above, the first entry covers + CPUs zero through five and the second entry covers CPUs 6 + and 7. + +o "tasks=TNEB" gives the state of the various segments of the + rnp->blocked_tasks list: + + "T" This indicates that there are some tasks that blocked + while running on one of the corresponding CPUs while + in an RCU read-side critical section. + + "N" This indicates that some of the blocked tasks are preventing + the current normal (non-expedited) grace period from + completing. + + "E" This indicates that some of the blocked tasks are preventing + the current expedited grace period from completing. + + "B" This indicates that some of the blocked tasks are in + need of RCU priority boosting. + + Each character is replaced with "." if the corresponding + condition does not hold. + +o "kt" is the state of the RCU priority-boosting kernel + thread associated with the corresponding rcu_node structure. + The state can be one of the following: + + "S" The kernel thread is stopped, in other words, all + CPUs corresponding to this rcu_node structure are + offline. + + "R" The kernel thread is running. + + "W" The kernel thread is waiting because there is no work + for it to do. + + "Y" The kernel thread is yielding to avoid hogging CPU. + + "?" Unknown value, indicates a bug. + +o "ntb" is the number of tasks boosted. + +o "neb" is the number of tasks boosted in order to complete an + expedited grace period. + +o "nnb" is the number of tasks boosted in order to complete a + normal (non-expedited) grace period. When boosting a task + that was blocking both an expedited and a normal grace period, + it is counted against the expedited total above. + +o "j" is the low-order 16 bits of the jiffies counter in + hexadecimal. + +o "bt" is the low-order 16 bits of the value that the jiffies + counter will have when we next start boosting, assuming that + the current grace period does not end beforehand. This is + also in hexadecimal. + +o "balk: nt" counts the number of times we didn't boost (in + other words, we balked) even though it was time to boost because + there were no blocked tasks to boost. This situation occurs + when there is one blocked task on one rcu_node structure and + none on some other rcu_node structure. + +o "egt" counts the number of times we balked because although + there were blocked tasks, none of them were blocking the + current grace period, whether expedited or otherwise. + +o "bt" counts the number of times we balked because boosting + had already been initiated for the current grace period. + +o "nb" counts the number of times we balked because there + was at least one task blocking the current non-expedited grace + period that never had blocked. If it is already running, it + just won't help to boost its priority! + +o "ny" counts the number of times we balked because it was + not yet time to start boosting. + +o "nos" counts the number of times we balked for other + reasons, e.g., the grace period ended first. + + CONFIG_TINY_RCU and CONFIG_TINY_PREEMPT_RCU debugfs Files and Formats These implementations of RCU provides a single debugfs file under the @@ -394,9 +571,9 @@ o "neb" is the number of expedited grace periods that have had o "nnb" is the number of normal grace periods that have had to resort to RCU priority boosting since boot. -o "j" is the low-order 12 bits of the jiffies counter in hexadecimal. +o "j" is the low-order 16 bits of the jiffies counter in hexadecimal. -o "bt" is the low-order 12 bits of the value that the jiffies counter +o "bt" is the low-order 16 bits of the value that the jiffies counter will have at the next time that boosting is scheduled to begin. o In the line beginning with "normal balk", the fields are as follows: diff --git a/Documentation/SecurityBugs b/Documentation/SecurityBugs index 26c3b3635d9..a660d494c8e 100644 --- a/Documentation/SecurityBugs +++ b/Documentation/SecurityBugs @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ expect these delays to be short, measurable in days, not weeks or months. A disclosure date is negotiated by the security team working with the bug submitter as well as vendors. However, the kernel security team holds the final say when setting a disclosure date. The timeframe for -disclosure is from immediate (esp. if it's already publically known) +disclosure is from immediate (esp. if it's already publicly known) to a few weeks. As a basic default policy, we expect report date to disclosure date to be on the order of 7 days. diff --git a/Documentation/SubmittingDrivers b/Documentation/SubmittingDrivers index 38d2aab59ca..319baa8b60d 100644 --- a/Documentation/SubmittingDrivers +++ b/Documentation/SubmittingDrivers @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ PM support: Since Linux is used on many portable and desktop systems, your complete overview of the power management issues related to drivers see Documentation/power/devices.txt . -Control: In general if there is active maintainance of a driver by +Control: In general if there is active maintenance of a driver by the author then patches will be redirected to them unless they are totally obvious and without need of checking. If you want to be the contact and update point for the diff --git a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches index 689e2371095..569f3532e13 100644 --- a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches +++ b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches @@ -714,10 +714,11 @@ Jeff Garzik, "Linux kernel patch submission format". <http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html> Greg Kroah-Hartman, "How to piss off a kernel subsystem maintainer". - <http://www.kroah.com/log/2005/03/31/> - <http://www.kroah.com/log/2005/07/08/> - <http://www.kroah.com/log/2005/10/19/> - <http://www.kroah.com/log/2006/01/11/> + <http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer.html> + <http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-02.html> + <http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-03.html> + <http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-04.html> + <http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-05.html> NO!!!! No more huge patch bombs to linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org people! <http://marc.theaimsgroup.com/?l=linux-kernel&m=112112749912944&w=2> @@ -729,7 +730,7 @@ Linus Torvalds's mail on the canonical patch format: <http://lkml.org/lkml/2005/4/7/183> Andi Kleen, "On submitting kernel patches" - Some strategies to get difficult or controversal changes in. + Some strategies to get difficult or controversial changes in. http://halobates.de/on-submitting-patches.pdf -- diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c b/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c index e9c77788a39..f6318f6d7ba 100644 --- a/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c +++ b/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c @@ -177,6 +177,8 @@ static int get_family_id(int sd) rc = send_cmd(sd, GENL_ID_CTRL, getpid(), CTRL_CMD_GETFAMILY, CTRL_ATTR_FAMILY_NAME, (void *)name, strlen(TASKSTATS_GENL_NAME)+1); + if (rc < 0) + return 0; /* sendto() failure? */ rep_len = recv(sd, &ans, sizeof(ans), 0); if (ans.n.nlmsg_type == NLMSG_ERROR || @@ -191,30 +193,37 @@ static int get_family_id(int sd) return id; } +#define average_ms(t, c) (t / 1000000ULL / (c ? c : 1)) + static void print_delayacct(struct taskstats *t) { - printf("\n\nCPU %15s%15s%15s%15s\n" - " %15llu%15llu%15llu%15llu\n" - "IO %15s%15s\n" - " %15llu%15llu\n" - "SWAP %15s%15s\n" - " %15llu%15llu\n" - "RECLAIM %12s%15s\n" - " %15llu%15llu\n", - "count", "real total", "virtual total", "delay total", + printf("\n\nCPU %15s%15s%15s%15s%15s\n" + " %15llu%15llu%15llu%15llu%15.3fms\n" + "IO %15s%15s%15s\n" + " %15llu%15llu%15llums\n" + "SWAP %15s%15s%15s\n" + " %15llu%15llu%15llums\n" + "RECLAIM %12s%15s%15s\n" + " %15llu%15llu%15llums\n", + "count", "real total", "virtual total", + "delay total", "delay average", (unsigned long long)t->cpu_count, (unsigned long long)t->cpu_run_real_total, (unsigned long long)t->cpu_run_virtual_total, (unsigned long long)t->cpu_delay_total, - "count", "delay total", + average_ms((double)t->cpu_delay_total, t->cpu_count), + "count", "delay total", "delay average", (unsigned long long)t->blkio_count, (unsigned long long)t->blkio_delay_total, - "count", "delay total", + average_ms(t->blkio_delay_total, t->blkio_count), + "count", "delay total", "delay average", (unsigned long long)t->swapin_count, (unsigned long long)t->swapin_delay_total, - "count", "delay total", + average_ms(t->swapin_delay_total, t->swapin_count), + "count", "delay total", "delay average", (unsigned long long)t->freepages_count, - (unsigned long long)t->freepages_delay_total); + (unsigned long long)t->freepages_delay_total, + average_ms(t->freepages_delay_total, t->freepages_count)); } static void task_context_switch_counts(struct taskstats *t) @@ -433,8 +442,6 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) } do { - int i; - rep_len = recv(nl_sd, &msg, sizeof(msg), 0); PRINTF("received %d bytes\n", rep_len); @@ -459,7 +466,6 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) na = (struct nlattr *) GENLMSG_DATA(&msg); len = 0; - i = 0; while (len < rep_len) { len += NLA_ALIGN(na->nla_len); switch (na->nla_type) { diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/method-customizing.txt b/Documentation/acpi/method-customizing.txt index 3e1d25aee3f..5f55373dd53 100644 --- a/Documentation/acpi/method-customizing.txt +++ b/Documentation/acpi/method-customizing.txt @@ -66,3 +66,8 @@ Note: We can use a kernel with multiple custom ACPI method running, But each individual write to debugfs can implement a SINGLE method override. i.e. if we want to insert/override multiple ACPI methods, we need to redo step c) ~ g) for multiple times. + +Note: Be aware that root can mis-use this driver to modify arbitrary + memory and gain additional rights, if root's privileges got + restricted (for example if root is not allowed to load additional + modules after boot). diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Booting b/Documentation/arm/Booting index 76850295af8..4e686a2ed91 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/Booting +++ b/Documentation/arm/Booting @@ -65,13 +65,19 @@ looks at the connected hardware is beyond the scope of this document. The boot loader must ultimately be able to provide a MACH_TYPE_xxx value to the kernel. (see linux/arch/arm/tools/mach-types). - -4. Setup the kernel tagged list -------------------------------- +4. Setup boot data +------------------ Existing boot loaders: OPTIONAL, HIGHLY RECOMMENDED New boot loaders: MANDATORY +The boot loader must provide either a tagged list or a dtb image for +passing configuration data to the kernel. The physical address of the +boot data is passed to the kernel in register r2. + +4a. Setup the kernel tagged list +-------------------------------- + The boot loader must create and initialise the kernel tagged list. A valid tagged list starts with ATAG_CORE and ends with ATAG_NONE. The ATAG_CORE tag may or may not be empty. An empty ATAG_CORE tag @@ -101,6 +107,24 @@ The tagged list must be placed in a region of memory where neither the kernel decompressor nor initrd 'bootp' program will overwrite it. The recommended placement is in the first 16KiB of RAM. +4b. Setup the device tree +------------------------- + +The boot loader must load a device tree image (dtb) into system ram +at a 64bit aligned address and initialize it with the boot data. The +dtb format is documented in Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt. +The kernel will look for the dtb magic value of 0xd00dfeed at the dtb +physical address to determine if a dtb has been passed instead of a +tagged list. + +The boot loader must pass at a minimum the size and location of the +system memory, and the root filesystem location. The dtb must be +placed in a region of memory where the kernel decompressor will not +overwrite it. The recommended placement is in the first 16KiB of RAM +with the caveat that it may not be located at physical address 0 since +the kernel interprets a value of 0 in r2 to mean neither a tagged list +nor a dtb were passed. + 5. Calling the kernel image --------------------------- @@ -125,7 +149,8 @@ In either case, the following conditions must be met: - CPU register settings r0 = 0, r1 = machine type number discovered in (3) above. - r2 = physical address of tagged list in system RAM. + r2 = physical address of tagged list in system RAM, or + physical address of device tree block (dtb) in system RAM - CPU mode All forms of interrupts must be disabled (IRQs and FIQs) diff --git a/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx b/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx index 133c5fa6c7a..7b9351f2f55 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx +++ b/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ Linux currently supports the following features on the IXP4xx chips: - Timers (watchdog, OS) The following components of the chips are not supported by Linux and -require the use of Intel's propietary CSR softare: +require the use of Intel's proprietary CSR softare: - USB device interface - Network interfaces (HSS, Utopia, NPEs, etc) @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ software from: http://developer.intel.com/design/network/products/npfamily/ixp425.htm -DO NOT POST QUESTIONS TO THE LINUX MAILING LISTS REGARDING THE PROPIETARY +DO NOT POST QUESTIONS TO THE LINUX MAILING LISTS REGARDING THE PROPRIETARY SOFTWARE. There are several websites that provide directions/pointers on using diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Suspend.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Suspend.txt index 7edd0e2e6c5..1ca63b3e563 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Suspend.txt +++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Suspend.txt @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Configuration Allows the entire memory to be checksummed before and after the suspend to see if there has been any corruption of the contents. - Note, the time to calculate the CRC is dependant on the CPU speed + Note, the time to calculate the CRC is dependent on the CPU speed and the size of memory. For an 64Mbyte RAM area on an 200MHz S3C2410, this can take approximately 4 seconds to complete. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung/GPIO.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung/GPIO.txt index 05850c62abe..513f2562c1a 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung/GPIO.txt +++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung/GPIO.txt @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ Introduction ------------ This outlines the Samsung GPIO implementation and the architecture -specfic calls provided alongisde the drivers/gpio core. +specific calls provided alongisde the drivers/gpio core. S3C24XX (Legacy) diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung/Overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung/Overview.txt index c3094ea51aa..658abb258ce 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung/Overview.txt +++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung/Overview.txt @@ -14,7 +14,6 @@ Introduction - S3C24XX: See Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt for full list - S3C64XX: S3C6400 and S3C6410 - S5P6440 - - S5P6442 - S5PC100 - S5PC110 / S5PV210 @@ -36,7 +35,6 @@ Configuration unifying all the SoCs into one kernel. s5p6440_defconfig - S5P6440 specific default configuration - s5p6442_defconfig - S5P6442 specific default configuration s5pc100_defconfig - S5PC100 specific default configuration s5pc110_defconfig - S5PC110 specific default configuration s5pv210_defconfig - S5PV210 specific default configuration diff --git a/Documentation/atomic_ops.txt b/Documentation/atomic_ops.txt index ac4d4718712..3bd585b4492 100644 --- a/Documentation/atomic_ops.txt +++ b/Documentation/atomic_ops.txt @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ Also, it should be made opaque such that any kind of cast to a normal C integer type will fail. Something like the following should suffice: - typedef struct { volatile int counter; } atomic_t; + typedef struct { int counter; } atomic_t; Historically, counter has been declared volatile. This is now discouraged. See Documentation/volatile-considered-harmful.txt for the complete rationale. diff --git a/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt b/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt index 2a7b38c832c..c6d84cfd2f5 100644 --- a/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt +++ b/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt @@ -497,7 +497,7 @@ The scatter gather list is in the form of an array of <page, offset, len> entries with their corresponding dma address mappings filled in at the appropriate time. As an optimization, contiguous physical pages can be covered by a single entry where <page> refers to the first page and <len> -covers the range of pages (upto 16 contiguous pages could be covered this +covers the range of pages (up to 16 contiguous pages could be covered this way). There is a helper routine (blk_rq_map_sg) which drivers can use to build the sg list. @@ -565,7 +565,7 @@ struct request { . int tag; /* command tag associated with request */ void *special; /* same as before */ - char *buffer; /* valid only for low memory buffers upto + char *buffer; /* valid only for low memory buffers up to current_nr_sectors */ . . diff --git a/Documentation/blockdev/cciss.txt b/Documentation/blockdev/cciss.txt index 89698e8df7d..c00c6a5ab21 100644 --- a/Documentation/blockdev/cciss.txt +++ b/Documentation/blockdev/cciss.txt @@ -169,3 +169,18 @@ is issued which positions the tape to a known position. Typically you must rewind the tape (by issuing "mt -f /dev/st0 rewind" for example) before i/o can proceed again to a tape drive which was reset. +There is a cciss_tape_cmds module parameter which can be used to make cciss +allocate more commands for use by tape drives. Ordinarily only a few commands +(6) are allocated for tape drives because tape drives are slow and +infrequently used and the primary purpose of Smart Array controllers is to +act as a RAID controller for disk drives, so the vast majority of commands +are allocated for disk devices. However, if you have more than a few tape +drives attached to a smart array, the default number of commands may not be +enought (for example, if you have 8 tape drives, you could only rewind 6 +at one time with the default number of commands.) The cciss_tape_cmds module +parameter allows more commands (up to 16 more) to be allocated for use by +tape drives. For example: + + insmod cciss.ko cciss_tape_cmds=16 + +Or, as a kernel boot parameter passed in via grub: cciss.cciss_tape_cmds=8 diff --git a/Documentation/cachetlb.txt b/Documentation/cachetlb.txt index 9164ae3b83b..9b728dc1753 100644 --- a/Documentation/cachetlb.txt +++ b/Documentation/cachetlb.txt @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ on all processors in the system. Don't let this scare you into thinking SMP cache/tlb flushing must be so inefficient, this is in fact an area where many optimizations are possible. For example, if it can be proven that a user address space has never executed -on a cpu (see vma->cpu_vm_mask), one need not perform a flush +on a cpu (see mm_cpumask()), one need not perform a flush for this address space on that cpu. First, the TLB flushing interfaces, since they are the simplest. The diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt index cbdfb7d9455..0ed99f08f1f 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt @@ -110,22 +110,22 @@ university server with various users - students, professors, system tasks etc. The resource planning for this server could be along the following lines: - CPU : Top cpuset + CPU : "Top cpuset" / \ CPUSet1 CPUSet2 - | | - (Profs) (Students) + | | + (Professors) (Students) In addition (system tasks) are attached to topcpuset (so that they can run anywhere) with a limit of 20% - Memory : Professors (50%), students (30%), system (20%) + Memory : Professors (50%), Students (30%), system (20%) - Disk : Prof (50%), students (30%), system (20%) + Disk : Professors (50%), Students (30%), system (20%) Network : WWW browsing (20%), Network File System (60%), others (20%) / \ - Prof (15%) students (5%) + Professors (15%) students (5%) Browsers like Firefox/Lynx go into the WWW network class, while (k)nfsd go into NFS network class. @@ -236,7 +236,8 @@ containing the following files describing that cgroup: - cgroup.procs: list of tgids in the cgroup. This list is not guaranteed to be sorted or free of duplicate tgids, and userspace should sort/uniquify the list if this property is required. - This is a read-only file, for now. + Writing a thread group id into this file moves all threads in that + group into this cgroup. - notify_on_release flag: run the release agent on exit? - release_agent: the path to use for release notifications (this file exists in the top cgroup only) @@ -430,6 +431,12 @@ You can attach the current shell task by echoing 0: # echo 0 > tasks +You can use the cgroup.procs file instead of the tasks file to move all +threads in a threadgroup at once. Echoing the pid of any task in a +threadgroup to cgroup.procs causes all tasks in that threadgroup to be +be attached to the cgroup. Writing 0 to cgroup.procs moves all tasks +in the writing task's threadgroup. + Note: Since every task is always a member of exactly one cgroup in each mounted hierarchy, to remove a task from its current cgroup you must move it into a new cgroup (possibly the root cgroup) by writing to the @@ -575,7 +582,7 @@ rmdir() will fail with it. From this behavior, pre_destroy() can be called multiple times against a cgroup. int can_attach(struct cgroup_subsys *ss, struct cgroup *cgrp, - struct task_struct *task, bool threadgroup) + struct task_struct *task) (cgroup_mutex held by caller) Called prior to moving a task into a cgroup; if the subsystem @@ -584,9 +591,14 @@ task is passed, then a successful result indicates that *any* unspecified task can be moved into the cgroup. Note that this isn't called on a fork. If this method returns 0 (success) then this should remain valid while the caller holds cgroup_mutex and it is ensured that either -attach() or cancel_attach() will be called in future. If threadgroup is -true, then a successful result indicates that all threads in the given -thread's threadgroup can be moved together. +attach() or cancel_attach() will be called in future. + +int can_attach_task(struct cgroup *cgrp, struct task_struct *tsk); +(cgroup_mutex held by caller) + +As can_attach, but for operations that must be run once per task to be +attached (possibly many when using cgroup_attach_proc). Called after +can_attach. void cancel_attach(struct cgroup_subsys *ss, struct cgroup *cgrp, struct task_struct *task, bool threadgroup) @@ -598,15 +610,24 @@ function, so that the subsystem can implement a rollback. If not, not necessary. This will be called only about subsystems whose can_attach() operation have succeeded. +void pre_attach(struct cgroup *cgrp); +(cgroup_mutex held by caller) + +For any non-per-thread attachment work that needs to happen before +attach_task. Needed by cpuset. + void attach(struct cgroup_subsys *ss, struct cgroup *cgrp, - struct cgroup *old_cgrp, struct task_struct *task, - bool threadgroup) + struct cgroup *old_cgrp, struct task_struct *task) (cgroup_mutex held by caller) Called after the task has been attached to the cgroup, to allow any post-attachment activity that requires memory allocations or blocking. -If threadgroup is true, the subsystem should take care of all threads -in the specified thread's threadgroup. Currently does not support any + +void attach_task(struct cgroup *cgrp, struct task_struct *tsk); +(cgroup_mutex held by caller) + +As attach, but for operations that must be run once per task to be attached, +like can_attach_task. Called before attach. Currently does not support any subsystem that might need the old_cgrp for every thread in the group. void fork(struct cgroup_subsy *ss, struct task_struct *task) @@ -630,7 +651,7 @@ always handled well. void post_clone(struct cgroup_subsys *ss, struct cgroup *cgrp) (cgroup_mutex held by caller) -Called at the end of cgroup_clone() to do any parameter +Called during cgroup_create() to do any parameter initialization which might be required before a task could attach. For example in cpusets, no task may attach before 'cpus' and 'mems' are set up. diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt index b6ed61c9585..7c163477fcd 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt @@ -52,8 +52,10 @@ Brief summary of control files. tasks # attach a task(thread) and show list of threads cgroup.procs # show list of processes cgroup.event_control # an interface for event_fd() - memory.usage_in_bytes # show current memory(RSS+Cache) usage. - memory.memsw.usage_in_bytes # show current memory+Swap usage + memory.usage_in_bytes # show current res_counter usage for memory + (See 5.5 for details) + memory.memsw.usage_in_bytes # show current res_counter usage for memory+Swap + (See 5.5 for details) memory.limit_in_bytes # set/show limit of memory usage memory.memsw.limit_in_bytes # set/show limit of memory+Swap usage memory.failcnt # show the number of memory usage hits limits @@ -453,6 +455,15 @@ memory under it will be reclaimed. You can reset failcnt by writing 0 to failcnt file. # echo 0 > .../memory.failcnt +5.5 usage_in_bytes + +For efficiency, as other kernel components, memory cgroup uses some optimization +to avoid unnecessary cacheline false sharing. usage_in_bytes is affected by the +method and doesn't show 'exact' value of memory(and swap) usage, it's an fuzz +value for efficient access. (Of course, when necessary, it's synchronized.) +If you want to know more exact memory usage, you should use RSS+CACHE(+SWAP) +value in memory.stat(see 5.2). + 6. Hierarchy support The memory controller supports a deep hierarchy and hierarchical accounting. diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt b/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt index 45d5a217484..a20bfd415e4 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ the state as 0 when a cpu if offline and 1 when its online. #To display the current cpu state. #cat /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/online -Q: Why cant i remove CPU0 on some systems? +Q: Why can't i remove CPU0 on some systems? A: Some architectures may have some special dependency on a certain CPU. For e.g in IA64 platforms we have ability to sent platform interrupts to the diff --git a/Documentation/dell_rbu.txt b/Documentation/dell_rbu.txt index 15174985ad0..d262e22bdde 100644 --- a/Documentation/dell_rbu.txt +++ b/Documentation/dell_rbu.txt @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ image file and then arrange all these packets back to back in to one single file. This file is then copied to /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/data. Once this file gets to the driver, the driver extracts packet_size data from -the file and spreads it accross the physical memory in contiguous packet_sized +the file and spreads it across the physical memory in contiguous packet_sized space. This method makes sure that all the packets get to the driver in a single operation. diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-service-time.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-service-time.txt index 7d00668e97b..fb1d4a0cf12 100644 --- a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-service-time.txt +++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-service-time.txt @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Algorithm ========= dm-service-time adds the I/O size to 'in-flight-size' when the I/O is -dispatched and substracts when completed. +dispatched and subtracts when completed. Basically, dm-service-time selects a path having minimum service time which is calculated by: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec4.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec4.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bf57ecd5d73 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec4.txt @@ -0,0 +1,397 @@ +===================================================================== +SEC 4 Device Tree Binding +Copyright (C) 2008-2011 Freescale Semiconductor Inc. + + CONTENTS + -Overview + -SEC 4 Node + -Job Ring Node + -Run Time Integrity Check (RTIC) Node + -Run Time Integrity Check (RTIC) Memory Node + -Secure Non-Volatile Storage (SNVS) Node + -Full Example + +NOTE: the SEC 4 is also known as Freescale's Cryptographic Accelerator +Accelerator and Assurance Module (CAAM). + +===================================================================== +Overview + +DESCRIPTION + +SEC 4 h/w can process requests from 2 types of sources. +1. DPAA Queue Interface (HW interface between Queue Manager & SEC 4). +2. Job Rings (HW interface between cores & SEC 4 registers). + +High Speed Data Path Configuration: + +HW interface between QM & SEC 4 and also BM & SEC 4, on DPAA-enabled parts +such as the P4080. The number of simultaneous dequeues the QI can make is +equal to the number of Descriptor Controller (DECO) engines in a particular +SEC version. E.g., the SEC 4.0 in the P4080 has 5 DECOs and can thus +dequeue from 5 subportals simultaneously. + +Job Ring Data Path Configuration: + +Each JR is located on a separate 4k page, they may (or may not) be made visible +in the memory partition devoted to a particular core. The P4080 has 4 JRs, so +up to 4 JRs can be configured; and all 4 JRs process requests in parallel. + +===================================================================== +SEC 4 Node + +Description + + Node defines the base address of the SEC 4 block. + This block specifies the address range of all global + configuration registers for the SEC 4 block. It + also receives interrupts from the Run Time Integrity Check + (RTIC) function within the SEC 4 block. + +PROPERTIES + + - compatible + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: Must include "fsl,sec-v4.0" + + - #address-cells + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: A standard property. Defines the number of cells + for representing physical addresses in child nodes. + + - #size-cells + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: A standard property. Defines the number of cells + for representing the size of physical addresses in + child nodes. + + - reg + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: A standard property. Specifies the physical + address and length of the SEC4 configuration registers. + registers + + - ranges + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: A standard property. Specifies the physical address + range of the SEC 4.0 register space (-SNVS not included). A + triplet that includes the child address, parent address, & + length. + + - interrupts + Usage: required + Value type: <prop_encoded-array> + Definition: Specifies the interrupts generated by this + device. The value of the interrupts property + consists of one interrupt specifier. The format + of the specifier is defined by the binding document + describing the node's interrupt parent. + + - interrupt-parent + Usage: (required if interrupt property is defined) + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: A single <phandle> value that points + to the interrupt parent to which the child domain + is being mapped. + + Note: All other standard properties (see the ePAPR) are allowed + but are optional. + + +EXAMPLE + crypto@300000 { + compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + reg = <0x300000 0x10000>; + ranges = <0 0x300000 0x10000>; + interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; + interrupts = <92 2>; + }; + +===================================================================== +Job Ring (JR) Node + + Child of the crypto node defines data processing interface to SEC 4 + across the peripheral bus for purposes of processing + cryptographic descriptors. The specified address + range can be made visible to one (or more) cores. + The interrupt defined for this node is controlled within + the address range of this node. + + - compatible + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: Must include "fsl,sec-v4.0-job-ring" + + - reg + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: Specifies a two JR parameters: an offset from + the parent physical address and the length the JR registers. + + - fsl,liodn + Usage: optional-but-recommended + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: + Specifies the LIODN to be used in conjunction with + the ppid-to-liodn table that specifies the PPID to LIODN mapping. + Needed if the PAMU is used. Value is a 12 bit value + where value is a LIODN ID for this JR. This property is + normally set by boot firmware. + + - interrupts + Usage: required + Value type: <prop_encoded-array> + Definition: Specifies the interrupts generated by this + device. The value of the interrupts property + consists of one interrupt specifier. The format + of the specifier is defined by the binding document + describing the node's interrupt parent. + + - interrupt-parent + Usage: (required if interrupt property is defined) + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: A single <phandle> value that points + to the interrupt parent to which the child domain + is being mapped. + +EXAMPLE + jr@1000 { + compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0-job-ring"; + reg = <0x1000 0x1000>; + fsl,liodn = <0x081>; + interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; + interrupts = <88 2>; + }; + + +===================================================================== +Run Time Integrity Check (RTIC) Node + + Child node of the crypto node. Defines a register space that + contains up to 5 sets of addresses and their lengths (sizes) that + will be checked at run time. After an initial hash result is + calculated, these addresses are checked by HW to monitor any + change. If any memory is modified, a Security Violation is + triggered (see SNVS definition). + + + - compatible + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: Must include "fsl,sec-v4.0-rtic". + + - #address-cells + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: A standard property. Defines the number of cells + for representing physical addresses in child nodes. Must + have a value of 1. + + - #size-cells + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: A standard property. Defines the number of cells + for representing the size of physical addresses in + child nodes. Must have a value of 1. + + - reg + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: A standard property. Specifies a two parameters: + an offset from the parent physical address and the length + the SEC4 registers. + + - ranges + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: A standard property. Specifies the physical address + range of the SEC 4 register space (-SNVS not included). A + triplet that includes the child address, parent address, & + length. + +EXAMPLE + rtic@6000 { + compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0-rtic"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + reg = <0x6000 0x100>; + ranges = <0x0 0x6100 0xe00>; + }; + +===================================================================== +Run Time Integrity Check (RTIC) Memory Node + A child node that defines individual RTIC memory regions that are used to + perform run-time integrity check of memory areas that should not modified. + The node defines a register that contains the memory address & + length (combined) and a second register that contains the hash result + in big endian format. + + - compatible + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: Must include "fsl,sec-v4.0-rtic-memory". + + - reg + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: A standard property. Specifies two parameters: + an offset from the parent physical address and the length: + + 1. The location of the RTIC memory address & length registers. + 2. The location RTIC hash result. + + - fsl,rtic-region + Usage: optional-but-recommended + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: + Specifies the HW address (36 bit address) for this region + followed by the length of the HW partition to be checked; + the address is represented as a 64 bit quantity followed + by a 32 bit length. + + - fsl,liodn + Usage: optional-but-recommended + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: + Specifies the LIODN to be used in conjunction with + the ppid-to-liodn table that specifies the PPID to LIODN + mapping. Needed if the PAMU is used. Value is a 12 bit value + where value is a LIODN ID for this RTIC memory region. This + property is normally set by boot firmware. + +EXAMPLE + rtic-a@0 { + compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0-rtic-memory"; + reg = <0x00 0x20 0x100 0x80>; + fsl,liodn = <0x03c>; + fsl,rtic-region = <0x12345678 0x12345678 0x12345678>; + }; + +===================================================================== +Secure Non-Volatile Storage (SNVS) Node + + Node defines address range and the associated + interrupt for the SNVS function. This function + monitors security state information & reports + security violations. + + - compatible + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: Must include "fsl,sec-v4.0-mon". + + - reg + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: A standard property. Specifies the physical + address and length of the SEC4 configuration + registers. + + - interrupts + Usage: required + Value type: <prop_encoded-array> + Definition: Specifies the interrupts generated by this + device. The value of the interrupts property + consists of one interrupt specifier. The format + of the specifier is defined by the binding document + describing the node's interrupt parent. + + - interrupt-parent + Usage: (required if interrupt property is defined) + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: A single <phandle> value that points + to the interrupt parent to which the child domain + is being mapped. + +EXAMPLE + sec_mon@314000 { + compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0-mon"; + reg = <0x314000 0x1000>; + interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; + interrupts = <93 2>; + }; + +===================================================================== +FULL EXAMPLE + + crypto: crypto@300000 { + compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + reg = <0x300000 0x10000>; + ranges = <0 0x300000 0x10000>; + interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; + interrupts = <92 2>; + + sec_jr0: jr@1000 { + compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0-job-ring"; + reg = <0x1000 0x1000>; + interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; + interrupts = <88 2>; + }; + + sec_jr1: jr@2000 { + compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0-job-ring"; + reg = <0x2000 0x1000>; + interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; + interrupts = <89 2>; + }; + + sec_jr2: jr@3000 { + compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0-job-ring"; + reg = <0x3000 0x1000>; + interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; + interrupts = <90 2>; + }; + + sec_jr3: jr@4000 { + compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0-job-ring"; + reg = <0x4000 0x1000>; + interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; + interrupts = <91 2>; + }; + + rtic@6000 { + compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0-rtic"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + reg = <0x6000 0x100>; + ranges = <0x0 0x6100 0xe00>; + + rtic_a: rtic-a@0 { + compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0-rtic-memory"; + reg = <0x00 0x20 0x100 0x80>; + }; + + rtic_b: rtic-b@20 { + compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0-rtic-memory"; + reg = <0x20 0x20 0x200 0x80>; + }; + + rtic_c: rtic-c@40 { + compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0-rtic-memory"; + reg = <0x40 0x20 0x300 0x80>; + }; + + rtic_d: rtic-d@60 { + compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0-rtic-memory"; + reg = <0x60 0x20 0x500 0x80>; + }; + }; + }; + + sec_mon: sec_mon@314000 { + compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0-mon"; + reg = <0x314000 0x1000>; + interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; + interrupts = <93 2>; + }; + +===================================================================== diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fb/sm501fb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fb/sm501fb.txt index 7d319fba9b5..9d9f0098092 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fb/sm501fb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fb/sm501fb.txt @@ -18,9 +18,9 @@ Optional properties: - edid : verbatim EDID data block describing attached display. Data from the detailed timing descriptor will be used to program the display controller. -- little-endian: availiable on big endian systems, to +- little-endian: available on big endian systems, to set different foreign endian. -- big-endian: availiable on little endian systems, to +- big-endian: available on little endian systems, to set different foreign endian. Example for MPC5200: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsl-upm-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsl-upm-nand.txt index a48b2cadc7f..00f1f546b32 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsl-upm-nand.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsl-upm-nand.txt @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Optional properties: - gpios : may specify optional GPIOs connected to the Ready-Not-Busy pins (R/B#). For multi-chip devices, "n" GPIO definitions are required according to the number of chips. -- chip-delay : chip dependent delay for transfering data from array to +- chip-delay : chip dependent delay for transferring data from array to read registers (tR). Required if property "gpios" is not used (R/B# pins not connected). diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/fsl-flexcan.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/fsl-flexcan.txt new file mode 100755 index 00000000000..1a729f08986 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/fsl-flexcan.txt @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ +CAN Device Tree Bindings +------------------------ +2011 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc. + +fsl,flexcan-v1.0 nodes +----------------------- +In addition to the required compatible-, reg- and interrupt-properties, you can +also specify which clock source shall be used for the controller. + +CPI Clock- Can Protocol Interface Clock + This CLK_SRC bit of CTRL(control register) selects the clock source to + the CAN Protocol Interface(CPI) to be either the peripheral clock + (driven by the PLL) or the crystal oscillator clock. The selected clock + is the one fed to the prescaler to generate the Serial Clock (Sclock). + The PRESDIV field of CTRL(control register) controls a prescaler that + generates the Serial Clock (Sclock), whose period defines the + time quantum used to compose the CAN waveform. + +Can Engine Clock Source + There are two sources for CAN clock + - Platform Clock It represents the bus clock + - Oscillator Clock + + Peripheral Clock (PLL) + -------------- + | + --------- ------------- + | |CPI Clock | Prescaler | Sclock + | |---------------->| (1.. 256) |------------> + --------- ------------- + | | + -------------- ---------------------CLK_SRC + Oscillator Clock + +- fsl,flexcan-clock-source : CAN Engine Clock Source.This property selects + the peripheral clock. PLL clock is fed to the + prescaler to generate the Serial Clock (Sclock). + Valid values are "oscillator" and "platform" + "oscillator": CAN engine clock source is oscillator clock. + "platform" The CAN engine clock source is the bus clock + (platform clock). + +- fsl,flexcan-clock-divider : for the reference and system clock, an additional + clock divider can be specified. +- clock-frequency: frequency required to calculate the bitrate for FlexCAN. + +Note: + - v1.0 of flexcan-v1.0 represent the IP block version for P1010 SOC. + - P1010 does not have oscillator as the Clock Source.So the default + Clock Source is platform clock. +Examples: + + can0@1c000 { + compatible = "fsl,flexcan-v1.0"; + reg = <0x1c000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <48 0x2>; + interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; + fsl,flexcan-clock-source = "platform"; + fsl,flexcan-clock-divider = <2>; + clock-frequency = <fixed by u-boot>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/sja1000.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/sja1000.txt index d6d209ded93..c2dbcec0ee3 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/sja1000.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/sja1000.txt @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ Optional properties: - nxp,no-comparator-bypass : Allows to disable the CAN input comperator. -For futher information, please have a look to the SJA1000 data sheet. +For further information, please have a look to the SJA1000 data sheet. Examples: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-tsec-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-tsec-phy.txt index edb7ae19e86..2c6be0377f5 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-tsec-phy.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-tsec-phy.txt @@ -74,3 +74,57 @@ Example: interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; phy-handle = <&phy0> }; + +* Gianfar PTP clock nodes + +General Properties: + + - compatible Should be "fsl,etsec-ptp" + - reg Offset and length of the register set for the device + - interrupts There should be at least two interrupts. Some devices + have as many as four PTP related interrupts. + +Clock Properties: + + - fsl,tclk-period Timer reference clock period in nanoseconds. + - fsl,tmr-prsc Prescaler, divides the output clock. + - fsl,tmr-add Frequency compensation value. + - fsl,tmr-fiper1 Fixed interval period pulse generator. + - fsl,tmr-fiper2 Fixed interval period pulse generator. + - fsl,max-adj Maximum frequency adjustment in parts per billion. + + These properties set the operational parameters for the PTP + clock. You must choose these carefully for the clock to work right. + Here is how to figure good values: + + TimerOsc = system clock MHz + tclk_period = desired clock period nanoseconds + NominalFreq = 1000 / tclk_period MHz + FreqDivRatio = TimerOsc / NominalFreq (must be greater that 1.0) + tmr_add = ceil(2^32 / FreqDivRatio) + OutputClock = NominalFreq / tmr_prsc MHz + PulseWidth = 1 / OutputClock microseconds + FiperFreq1 = desired frequency in Hz + FiperDiv1 = 1000000 * OutputClock / FiperFreq1 + tmr_fiper1 = tmr_prsc * tclk_period * FiperDiv1 - tclk_period + max_adj = 1000000000 * (FreqDivRatio - 1.0) - 1 + + The calculation for tmr_fiper2 is the same as for tmr_fiper1. The + driver expects that tmr_fiper1 will be correctly set to produce a 1 + Pulse Per Second (PPS) signal, since this will be offered to the PPS + subsystem to synchronize the Linux clock. + +Example: + + ptp_clock@24E00 { + compatible = "fsl,etsec-ptp"; + reg = <0x24E00 0xB0>; + interrupts = <12 0x8 13 0x8>; + interrupt-parent = < &ipic >; + fsl,tclk-period = <10>; + fsl,tmr-prsc = <100>; + fsl,tmr-add = <0x999999A4>; + fsl,tmr-fiper1 = <0x3B9AC9F6>; + fsl,tmr-fiper2 = <0x00018696>; + fsl,max-adj = <659999998>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ifc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ifc.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..939a26d541f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ifc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +Integrated Flash Controller + +Properties: +- name : Should be ifc +- compatible : should contain "fsl,ifc". The version of the integrated + flash controller can be found in the IFC_REV register at + offset zero. + +- #address-cells : Should be either two or three. The first cell is the + chipselect number, and the remaining cells are the + offset into the chipselect. +- #size-cells : Either one or two, depending on how large each chipselect + can be. +- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device +- interrupts : IFC has two interrupts. The first one is the "common" + interrupt(CM_EVTER_STAT), and second is the NAND interrupt + (NAND_EVTER_STAT). + +- ranges : Each range corresponds to a single chipselect, and covers + the entire access window as configured. + +Child device nodes describe the devices connected to IFC such as NOR (e.g. +cfi-flash) and NAND (fsl,ifc-nand). There might be board specific devices +like FPGAs, CPLDs, etc. + +Example: + + ifc@ffe1e000 { + compatible = "fsl,ifc", "simple-bus"; + #address-cells = <2>; + #size-cells = <1>; + reg = <0x0 0xffe1e000 0 0x2000>; + interrupts = <16 2 19 2>; + + /* NOR, NAND Flashes and CPLD on board */ + ranges = <0x0 0x0 0x0 0xee000000 0x02000000 + 0x1 0x0 0x0 0xffa00000 0x00010000 + 0x3 0x0 0x0 0xffb00000 0x00020000>; + + flash@0,0 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + compatible = "cfi-flash"; + reg = <0x0 0x0 0x2000000>; + bank-width = <2>; + device-width = <1>; + + partition@0 { + /* 32MB for user data */ + reg = <0x0 0x02000000>; + label = "NOR Data"; + }; + }; + + flash@1,0 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + compatible = "fsl,ifc-nand"; + reg = <0x1 0x0 0x10000>; + + partition@0 { + /* This location must not be altered */ + /* 1MB for u-boot Bootloader Image */ + reg = <0x0 0x00100000>; + label = "NAND U-Boot Image"; + read-only; + }; + }; + + cpld@3,0 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + compatible = "fsl,p1010rdb-cpld"; + reg = <0x3 0x0 0x000001f>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpic-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpic-timer.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..df41958140e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpic-timer.txt @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +* Freescale MPIC timers + +Required properties: +- compatible: "fsl,mpic-global-timer" + +- reg : Contains two regions. The first is the main timer register bank + (GTCCRxx, GTBCRxx, GTVPRxx, GTDRxx). The second is the timer control + register (TCRx) for the group. + +- fsl,available-ranges: use <start count> style section to define which + timer interrupts can be used. This property is optional; without this, + all timers within the group can be used. + +- interrupts: one interrupt per timer in the group, in order, starting + with timer zero. If timer-available-ranges is present, only the + interrupts that correspond to available timers shall be present. + +Example: + /* Note that this requires #interrupt-cells to be 4 */ + timer0: timer@41100 { + compatible = "fsl,mpic-global-timer"; + reg = <0x41100 0x100 0x41300 4>; + + /* Another AMP partition is using timers 0 and 1 */ + fsl,available-ranges = <2 2>; + + interrupts = <2 0 3 0 + 3 0 3 0>; + }; + + timer1: timer@42100 { + compatible = "fsl,mpic-global-timer"; + reg = <0x42100 0x100 0x42300 4>; + interrupts = <4 0 3 0 + 5 0 3 0 + 6 0 3 0 + 7 0 3 0>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpic.txt index 8aa10f45ebe..2cf38bd841f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpic.txt @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ EXAMPLE 4 */ timer0: timer@41100 { compatible = "fsl,mpic-global-timer"; - reg = <0x41100 0x100>; + reg = <0x41100 0x100 0x41300 4>; interrupts = <0 0 3 0 1 0 3 0 2 0 3 0 @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ EXAMPLE 4 EXAMPLE 5 /* - * Definition of an error interrupt (interupt type 1). + * Definition of an error interrupt (interrupt type 1). * SoC interrupt number is 16 and the specific error * interrupt bit in the error interrupt summary register * is 23. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/nintendo/wii.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/nintendo/wii.txt index a7e155a023b..36afa322b04 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/nintendo/wii.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/nintendo/wii.txt @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Nintendo Wii device tree - reg : should contain the SDHCI registers location and length - interrupts : should contain the SDHCI interrupt -1.j) The Inter-Processsor Communication (IPC) node +1.j) The Inter-Processor Communication (IPC) node Represent the Inter-Processor Communication interface. This interface enables communications between the Broadway and the Starlet processors. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt index 55fd2623445..7c1329de059 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt @@ -12,8 +12,9 @@ Table of Contents ================= I - Introduction - 1) Entry point for arch/powerpc - 2) Entry point for arch/x86 + 1) Entry point for arch/arm + 2) Entry point for arch/powerpc + 3) Entry point for arch/x86 II - The DT block format 1) Header @@ -138,7 +139,7 @@ and properties to be present. This will be described in detail in section III, but, for example, the kernel does not require you to create a node for every PCI device in the system. It is a requirement to have a node for PCI host bridges in order to provide interrupt -routing informations and memory/IO ranges, among others. It is also +routing information and memory/IO ranges, among others. It is also recommended to define nodes for on chip devices and other buses that don't specifically fit in an existing OF specification. This creates a great flexibility in the way the kernel can then probe those and match @@ -148,7 +149,46 @@ upgrades without significantly impacting the kernel code or cluttering it with special cases. -1) Entry point for arch/powerpc +1) Entry point for arch/arm +--------------------------- + + There is one single entry point to the kernel, at the start + of the kernel image. That entry point supports two calling + conventions. A summary of the interface is described here. A full + description of the boot requirements is documented in + Documentation/arm/Booting + + a) ATAGS interface. Minimal information is passed from firmware + to the kernel with a tagged list of predefined parameters. + + r0 : 0 + + r1 : Machine type number + + r2 : Physical address of tagged list in system RAM + + b) Entry with a flattened device-tree block. Firmware loads the + physical address of the flattened device tree block (dtb) into r2, + r1 is not used, but it is considered good practise to use a valid + machine number as described in Documentation/arm/Booting. + + r0 : 0 + + r1 : Valid machine type number. When using a device tree, + a single machine type number will often be assigned to + represent a class or family of SoCs. + + r2 : physical pointer to the device-tree block + (defined in chapter II) in RAM. Device tree can be located + anywhere in system RAM, but it should be aligned on a 64 bit + boundary. + + The kernel will differentiate between ATAGS and device tree booting by + reading the memory pointed to by r2 and looking for either the flattened + device tree block magic value (0xd00dfeed) or the ATAG_CORE value at + offset 0x4 from r2 (0x54410001). + +2) Entry point for arch/powerpc ------------------------------- There is one single entry point to the kernel, at the start @@ -226,7 +266,7 @@ it with special cases. cannot support both configurations with Book E and configurations with classic Powerpc architectures. -2) Entry point for arch/x86 +3) Entry point for arch/x86 ------------------------------- There is one single 32bit entry point to the kernel at code32_start, @@ -385,7 +425,7 @@ struct boot_param_header { among others, by kexec. If you are on an SMP system, this value should match the content of the "reg" property of the CPU node in the device-tree corresponding to the CPU calling the kernel entry - point (see further chapters for more informations on the required + point (see further chapters for more information on the required device-tree contents) - size_dt_strings @@ -553,7 +593,7 @@ looks like in practice. This tree is almost a minimal tree. It pretty much contains the minimal set of required nodes and properties to boot a linux kernel; -that is, some basic model informations at the root, the CPUs, and the +that is, some basic model information at the root, the CPUs, and the physical memory layout. It also includes misc information passed through /chosen, like in this example, the platform type (mandatory) and the kernel command line arguments (optional). diff --git a/Documentation/dmaengine.txt b/Documentation/dmaengine.txt index 0c1c2f63c0a..5a0cb1ef616 100644 --- a/Documentation/dmaengine.txt +++ b/Documentation/dmaengine.txt @@ -1 +1,96 @@ -See Documentation/crypto/async-tx-api.txt + DMA Engine API Guide + ==================== + + Vinod Koul <vinod dot koul at intel.com> + +NOTE: For DMA Engine usage in async_tx please see: + Documentation/crypto/async-tx-api.txt + + +Below is a guide to device driver writers on how to use the Slave-DMA API of the +DMA Engine. This is applicable only for slave DMA usage only. + +The slave DMA usage consists of following steps +1. Allocate a DMA slave channel +2. Set slave and controller specific parameters +3. Get a descriptor for transaction +4. Submit the transaction and wait for callback notification + +1. Allocate a DMA slave channel +Channel allocation is slightly different in the slave DMA context, client +drivers typically need a channel from a particular DMA controller only and even +in some cases a specific channel is desired. To request a channel +dma_request_channel() API is used. + +Interface: +struct dma_chan *dma_request_channel(dma_cap_mask_t mask, + dma_filter_fn filter_fn, + void *filter_param); +where dma_filter_fn is defined as: +typedef bool (*dma_filter_fn)(struct dma_chan *chan, void *filter_param); + +When the optional 'filter_fn' parameter is set to NULL dma_request_channel +simply returns the first channel that satisfies the capability mask. Otherwise, +when the mask parameter is insufficient for specifying the necessary channel, +the filter_fn routine can be used to disposition the available channels in the +system. The filter_fn routine is called once for each free channel in the +system. Upon seeing a suitable channel filter_fn returns DMA_ACK which flags +that channel to be the return value from dma_request_channel. A channel +allocated via this interface is exclusive to the caller, until +dma_release_channel() is called. + +2. Set slave and controller specific parameters +Next step is always to pass some specific information to the DMA driver. Most of +the generic information which a slave DMA can use is in struct dma_slave_config. +It allows the clients to specify DMA direction, DMA addresses, bus widths, DMA +burst lengths etc. If some DMA controllers have more parameters to be sent then +they should try to embed struct dma_slave_config in their controller specific +structure. That gives flexibility to client to pass more parameters, if +required. + +Interface: +int dmaengine_slave_config(struct dma_chan *chan, + struct dma_slave_config *config) + +3. Get a descriptor for transaction +For slave usage the various modes of slave transfers supported by the +DMA-engine are: +slave_sg - DMA a list of scatter gather buffers from/to a peripheral +dma_cyclic - Perform a cyclic DMA operation from/to a peripheral till the + operation is explicitly stopped. +The non NULL return of this transfer API represents a "descriptor" for the given +transaction. + +Interface: +struct dma_async_tx_descriptor *(*chan->device->device_prep_dma_sg)( + struct dma_chan *chan, + struct scatterlist *dst_sg, unsigned int dst_nents, + struct scatterlist *src_sg, unsigned int src_nents, + unsigned long flags); +struct dma_async_tx_descriptor *(*chan->device->device_prep_dma_cyclic)( + struct dma_chan *chan, dma_addr_t buf_addr, size_t buf_len, + size_t period_len, enum dma_data_direction direction); + +4. Submit the transaction and wait for callback notification +To schedule the transaction to be scheduled by dma device, the "descriptor" +returned in above (3) needs to be submitted. +To tell the dma driver that a transaction is ready to be serviced, the +descriptor->submit() callback needs to be invoked. This chains the descriptor to +the pending queue. +The transactions in the pending queue can be activated by calling the +issue_pending API. If channel is idle then the first transaction in queue is +started and subsequent ones queued up. +On completion of the DMA operation the next in queue is submitted and a tasklet +triggered. The tasklet would then call the client driver completion callback +routine for notification, if set. +Interface: +void dma_async_issue_pending(struct dma_chan *chan); + +============================================================================== + +Additional usage notes for dma driver writers +1/ Although DMA engine specifies that completion callback routines cannot submit +any new operations, but typically for slave DMA subsequent transaction may not +be available for submit prior to callback routine being called. This requirement +is not a requirement for DMA-slave devices. But they should take care to drop +the spin-lock they might be holding before calling the callback routine diff --git a/Documentation/dontdiff b/Documentation/dontdiff index 470d3dba1a6..dfa6fc6e4b2 100644 --- a/Documentation/dontdiff +++ b/Documentation/dontdiff @@ -1,6 +1,8 @@ *.a *.aux *.bin +*.bz2 +*.cis *.cpio *.csp *.dsp @@ -8,6 +10,8 @@ *.elf *.eps *.fw +*.gcno +*.gcov *.gen.S *.gif *.grep @@ -19,14 +23,20 @@ *.ko *.log *.lst +*.lzma +*.lzo +*.mo *.moc *.mod.c *.o *.o.* +*.order *.orig *.out +*.patch *.pdf *.png +*.pot *.ps *.rej *.s @@ -39,16 +49,22 @@ *.tex *.ver *.xml +*.xz *_MODULES *_vga16.c *~ +\#*# *.9 -*.9.gz .* +.*.d .mm 53c700_d.h CVS ChangeSet +GPATH +GRTAGS +GSYMS +GTAGS Image Kerntypes Module.markers @@ -57,15 +73,14 @@ PENDING SCCS System.map* TAGS +aconf +af_names.h aic7*reg.h* aic7*reg_print.c* aic7*seq.h* aicasm aicdb.h* -altivec1.c -altivec2.c -altivec4.c -altivec8.c +altivec*.c asm-offsets.h asm_offsets.h autoconf.h* @@ -80,6 +95,7 @@ btfixupprep build bvmlinux bzImage* +capability_names.h capflags.c classlist.h* comp*.log @@ -88,7 +104,8 @@ conf config config-* config_data.h* -config_data.gz* +config.mak +config.mak.autogen conmakehash consolemap_deftbl.c* cpustr.h @@ -96,7 +113,9 @@ crc32table.h* cscope.* defkeymap.c devlist.h* +dnotify_test docproc +dslm elf2ecoff elfconfig.h* evergreen_reg_safe.h @@ -105,6 +124,7 @@ flask.h fore200e_mkfirm fore200e_pca_fw.c* gconf +gconf.glade.h gen-devlist gen_crc32table gen_init_cpio @@ -112,11 +132,12 @@ generated genheaders genksyms *_gray256.c +hpet_example +hugepage-mmap +hugepage-shm ihex2fw ikconfig.h* inat-tables.c -initramfs_data.cpio -initramfs_data.cpio.gz initramfs_list int16.c int1.c @@ -133,15 +154,19 @@ kxgettext lkc_defs.h lex.c lex.*.c +linux logo_*.c logo_*_clut224.c logo_*_mono.c lxdialog +mach mach-types mach-types.h machtypes.h map +map_hugetlb maui_boot.h +media mconf miboot* mk_elfconfig @@ -150,23 +175,29 @@ mkbugboot mkcpustr mkdep mkprep +mkregtable mktables mktree modpost modules.builtin modules.order modversions.h* +nconf ncscope.* offset.h offsets.h oui.c* +page-types parse.c parse.h patches* pca200e.bin pca200e_ecd.bin2 -piggy.gz +perf.data +perf.data.old +perf-archive piggyback +piggy.gzip piggy.S pnmtologo ppc_defs.h* @@ -177,10 +208,9 @@ r200_reg_safe.h r300_reg_safe.h r420_reg_safe.h r600_reg_safe.h -raid6altivec*.c -raid6int*.c -raid6tables.c +recordmcount relocs +rlim_names.h rn50_reg_safe.h rs600_reg_safe.h rv515_reg_safe.h @@ -194,6 +224,7 @@ split-include syscalltab.h tables.c tags +test_get_len tftpboot.img timeconst.h times.h* @@ -210,10 +241,13 @@ vdso32.so.dbg vdso64.lds vdso64.so.dbg version.h* +vmImage vmlinux vmlinux-* vmlinux.aout +vmlinux.bin.all vmlinux.lds +vmlinuz voffset.h vsyscall.lds vsyscall_32.lds diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/bus.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/bus.txt index 5001b751162..6754b2df8aa 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-model/bus.txt +++ b/Documentation/driver-model/bus.txt @@ -3,24 +3,7 @@ Bus Types Definition ~~~~~~~~~~ - -struct bus_type { - char * name; - - struct subsystem subsys; - struct kset drivers; - struct kset devices; - - struct bus_attribute * bus_attrs; - struct device_attribute * dev_attrs; - struct driver_attribute * drv_attrs; - - int (*match)(struct device * dev, struct device_driver * drv); - int (*hotplug) (struct device *dev, char **envp, - int num_envp, char *buffer, int buffer_size); - int (*suspend)(struct device * dev, pm_message_t state); - int (*resume)(struct device * dev); -}; +See the kerneldoc for the struct bus_type. int bus_register(struct bus_type * bus); diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/class.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/class.txt index 548505f14aa..1fefc480a80 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-model/class.txt +++ b/Documentation/driver-model/class.txt @@ -27,22 +27,7 @@ The device class structure looks like: typedef int (*devclass_add)(struct device *); typedef void (*devclass_remove)(struct device *); -struct device_class { - char * name; - rwlock_t lock; - u32 devnum; - struct list_head node; - - struct list_head drivers; - struct list_head intf_list; - - struct driver_dir_entry dir; - struct driver_dir_entry device_dir; - struct driver_dir_entry driver_dir; - - devclass_add add_device; - devclass_remove remove_device; -}; +See the kerneldoc for the struct class. A typical device class definition would look like: diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt index a124f3126b0..b2ff42685bc 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt +++ b/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt @@ -2,96 +2,7 @@ The Basic Device Structure ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ -struct device { - struct list_head g_list; - struct list_head node; - struct list_head bus_list; - struct list_head driver_list; - struct list_head intf_list; - struct list_head children; - struct device * parent; - - char name[DEVICE_NAME_SIZE]; - char bus_id[BUS_ID_SIZE]; - - spinlock_t lock; - atomic_t refcount; - - struct bus_type * bus; - struct driver_dir_entry dir; - - u32 class_num; - - struct device_driver *driver; - void *driver_data; - void *platform_data; - - u32 current_state; - unsigned char *saved_state; - - void (*release)(struct device * dev); -}; - -Fields -~~~~~~ -g_list: Node in the global device list. - -node: Node in device's parent's children list. - -bus_list: Node in device's bus's devices list. - -driver_list: Node in device's driver's devices list. - -intf_list: List of intf_data. There is one structure allocated for - each interface that the device supports. - -children: List of child devices. - -parent: *** FIXME *** - -name: ASCII description of device. - Example: " 3Com Corporation 3c905 100BaseTX [Boomerang]" - -bus_id: ASCII representation of device's bus position. This - field should be a name unique across all devices on the - bus type the device belongs to. - - Example: PCI bus_ids are in the form of - <bus number>:<slot number>.<function number> - This name is unique across all PCI devices in the system. - -lock: Spinlock for the device. - -refcount: Reference count on the device. - -bus: Pointer to struct bus_type that device belongs to. - -dir: Device's sysfs directory. - -class_num: Class-enumerated value of the device. - -driver: Pointer to struct device_driver that controls the device. - -driver_data: Driver-specific data. - -platform_data: Platform data specific to the device. - - Example: for devices on custom boards, as typical of embedded - and SOC based hardware, Linux often uses platform_data to point - to board-specific structures describing devices and how they - are wired. That can include what ports are available, chip - variants, which GPIO pins act in what additional roles, and so - on. This shrinks the "Board Support Packages" (BSPs) and - minimizes board-specific #ifdefs in drivers. - -current_state: Current power state of the device. - -saved_state: Pointer to saved state of the device. This is usable by - the device driver controlling the device. - -release: Callback to free the device after all references have - gone away. This should be set by the allocator of the - device (i.e. the bus driver that discovered the device). +See the kerneldoc for the struct device. Programming Interface diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt index d2cd6fb8ba9..4421135826a 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt +++ b/Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt @@ -1,23 +1,7 @@ Device Drivers -struct device_driver { - char * name; - struct bus_type * bus; - - struct completion unloaded; - struct kobject kobj; - list_t devices; - - struct module *owner; - - int (*probe) (struct device * dev); - int (*remove) (struct device * dev); - - int (*suspend) (struct device * dev, pm_message_t state); - int (*resume) (struct device * dev); -}; - +See the kerneldoc for the struct device_driver. Allocation diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/README.dvb-usb b/Documentation/dvb/README.dvb-usb index c8238e44ed6..c4d963a67d6 100644 --- a/Documentation/dvb/README.dvb-usb +++ b/Documentation/dvb/README.dvb-usb @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Hotplug is able to load the driver, when it is needed (because you plugged in the device). If you want to enable debug output, you have to load the driver manually and -from withing the dvb-kernel cvs repository. +from within the dvb-kernel cvs repository. first have a look, which debug level are available: diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/ci.txt b/Documentation/dvb/ci.txt index 4a0c2b56e69..6c3bda50f7d 100644 --- a/Documentation/dvb/ci.txt +++ b/Documentation/dvb/ci.txt @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ so on. * CI modules that are supported ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ -The CI module support is largely dependant upon the firmware on the cards +The CI module support is largely dependent upon the firmware on the cards Some cards do support almost all of the available CI modules. There is nothing much that can be done in order to make additional CI modules working with these cards. diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/faq.txt b/Documentation/dvb/faq.txt index 121832e5d89..97b1373f242 100644 --- a/Documentation/dvb/faq.txt +++ b/Documentation/dvb/faq.txt @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Some very frequently asked questions about linuxtv-dvb 5. The dvb_net device doesn't give me any packets at all Run tcpdump on the dvb0_0 interface. This sets the interface - into promiscous mode so it accepts any packets from the PID + into promiscuous mode so it accepts any packets from the PID you have configured with the dvbnet utility. Check if there are any packets with the IP addr and MAC addr you have configured with ifconfig. diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/udev.txt b/Documentation/dvb/udev.txt index 68ee224b6aa..412305b7c55 100644 --- a/Documentation/dvb/udev.txt +++ b/Documentation/dvb/udev.txt @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ The DVB subsystem currently registers to the sysfs subsystem using the "class_simple" interface. -This means that only the basic informations like module loading parameters +This means that only the basic information like module loading parameters are presented through sysfs. Other things that might be interesting are currently *not* available. diff --git a/Documentation/edac.txt b/Documentation/edac.txt index 9ee774de57c..249822cde82 100644 --- a/Documentation/edac.txt +++ b/Documentation/edac.txt @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ Total Correctable Errors count attribute file: 'ce_noinfo_count' This attribute file displays the number of CEs that - have occurred wherewith no informations as to which DIMM slot + have occurred wherewith no information as to which DIMM slot is having errors. Memory is handicapped, but operational, yet no information is available to indicate which slot the failing memory is in. This count field should be also @@ -741,7 +741,7 @@ were done at i7core_edac driver. This chapter will cover those differences As EDAC API maps the minimum unity is csrows, the driver sequencially maps channel/dimm into different csrows. - For example, suposing the following layout: + For example, supposing the following layout: Ch0 phy rd0, wr0 (0x063f4031): 2 ranks, UDIMMs dimm 0 1024 Mb offset: 0, bank: 8, rank: 1, row: 0x4000, col: 0x400 dimm 1 1024 Mb offset: 4, bank: 8, rank: 1, row: 0x4000, col: 0x400 diff --git a/Documentation/eisa.txt b/Documentation/eisa.txt index f297fc1202a..38cf0c7b559 100644 --- a/Documentation/eisa.txt +++ b/Documentation/eisa.txt @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ struct eisa_driver { id_table : an array of NULL terminated EISA id strings, followed by an empty string. Each string can - optionally be paired with a driver-dependant value + optionally be paired with a driver-dependent value (driver_data). driver : a generic driver, such as described in diff --git a/Documentation/fb/viafb.txt b/Documentation/fb/viafb.txt index 1a2e8aa3fbb..444e34b52ae 100644 --- a/Documentation/fb/viafb.txt +++ b/Documentation/fb/viafb.txt @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ Notes: supported_output_devices - This read-only file contains a full ',' seperated list containing all + This read-only file contains a full ',' separated list containing all output devices that could be available on your platform. It is likely that not all of those have a connector on your hardware but it should provide a good starting point to figure out which of those names match @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ Notes: This can happen for example if only one (the other) iga is used. Writing to these files allows adjusting the output devices during runtime. One can add new devices, remove existing ones or switch - between igas. Essentially you can write a ',' seperated list of device + between igas. Essentially you can write a ',' separated list of device names (or a single one) in the same format as the output to those files. You can add a '+' or '-' as a prefix allowing simple addition and removal of devices. So a prefix '+' adds the devices from your list diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index 274b32d1253..1a9446b5915 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -6,6 +6,42 @@ be removed from this file. --------------------------- +What: x86 floppy disable_hlt +When: 2012 +Why: ancient workaround of dubious utility clutters the + code used by everybody else. +Who: Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com> + +--------------------------- + +What: CONFIG_APM_CPU_IDLE, and its ability to call APM BIOS in idle +When: 2012 +Why: This optional sub-feature of APM is of dubious reliability, + and ancient APM laptops are likely better served by calling HLT. + Deleting CONFIG_APM_CPU_IDLE allows x86 to stop exporting + the pm_idle function pointer to modules. +Who: Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com> + +---------------------------- + +What: x86_32 "no-hlt" cmdline param +When: 2012 +Why: remove a branch from idle path, simplify code used by everybody. + This option disabled the use of HLT in idle and machine_halt() + for hardware that was flakey 15-years ago. Today we have + "idle=poll" that removed HLT from idle, and so if such a machine + is still running the upstream kernel, "idle=poll" is likely sufficient. +Who: Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com> + +---------------------------- + +What: x86 "idle=mwait" cmdline param +When: 2012 +Why: simplify x86 idle code +Who: Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com> + +---------------------------- + What: PRISM54 When: 2.6.34 @@ -35,17 +71,6 @@ Who: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> --------------------------- -What: AR9170USB -When: 2.6.40 - -Why: This driver is deprecated and the firmware is no longer - maintained. The replacement driver "carl9170" has been - around for a while, so the devices are still supported. - -Who: Christian Lamparter <chunkeey@googlemail.com> - ---------------------------- - What: IRQF_SAMPLE_RANDOM Check: IRQF_SAMPLE_RANDOM When: July 2009 @@ -226,7 +251,7 @@ Who: Zhang Rui <rui.zhang@intel.com> What: CONFIG_ACPI_PROCFS_POWER When: 2.6.39 Why: sysfs I/F for ACPI power devices, including AC and Battery, - has been working in upstream kenrel since 2.6.24, Sep 2007. + has been working in upstream kernel since 2.6.24, Sep 2007. In 2.6.37, we make the sysfs I/F always built in and this option disabled by default. Remove this option and the ACPI power procfs interface in 2.6.39. @@ -273,16 +298,6 @@ Who: Michael Buesch <mb@bu3sch.de> --------------------------- -What: /sys/o2cb symlink -When: January 2010 -Why: /sys/fs/o2cb is the proper location for this information - /sys/o2cb - exists as a symlink for backwards compatibility for old versions of - ocfs2-tools. 2 years should be sufficient time to phase in new versions - which know to look in /sys/fs/o2cb. -Who: ocfs2-devel@oss.oracle.com - ---------------------------- - What: Ability for non root users to shm_get hugetlb pages based on mlock resource limits When: 2.6.31 @@ -387,26 +402,6 @@ Who: Tejun Heo <tj@kernel.org> ---------------------------- -What: Support for lcd_switch and display_get in asus-laptop driver -When: March 2010 -Why: These two features use non-standard interfaces. There are the - only features that really need multiple path to guess what's - the right method name on a specific laptop. - - Removing them will allow to remove a lot of code an significantly - clean the drivers. - - This will affect the backlight code which won't be able to know - if the backlight is on or off. The platform display file will also be - write only (like the one in eeepc-laptop). - - This should'nt affect a lot of user because they usually know - when their display is on or off. - -Who: Corentin Chary <corentin.chary@gmail.com> - ----------------------------- - What: sysfs-class-rfkill state file When: Feb 2014 Files: net/rfkill/core.c @@ -425,16 +420,6 @@ Who: anybody or Florian Mickler <florian@mickler.org> ---------------------------- -What: capifs -When: February 2011 -Files: drivers/isdn/capi/capifs.* -Why: udev fully replaces this special file system that only contains CAPI - NCCI TTY device nodes. User space (pppdcapiplugin) works without - noticing the difference. -Who: Jan Kiszka <jan.kiszka@web.de> - ----------------------------- - What: KVM paravirt mmu host support When: January 2011 Why: The paravirt mmu host support is slower than non-paravirt mmu, both @@ -480,14 +465,6 @@ Who: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> ---------------------------- -What: The acpi_sleep=s4_nonvs command line option -When: 2.6.37 -Files: arch/x86/kernel/acpi/sleep.c -Why: superseded by acpi_sleep=nonvs -Who: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> - ----------------------------- - What: PCI DMA unmap state API When: August 2012 Why: PCI DMA unmap state API (include/linux/pci-dma.h) was replaced @@ -600,3 +577,26 @@ Why: These legacy callbacks should no longer be used as i2c-core offers Who: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> ---------------------------- + +What: Support for UVCIOC_CTRL_ADD in the uvcvideo driver +When: 2.6.42 +Why: The information passed to the driver by this ioctl is now queried + dynamically from the device. +Who: Laurent Pinchart <laurent.pinchart@ideasonboard.com> + +---------------------------- + +What: Support for UVCIOC_CTRL_MAP_OLD in the uvcvideo driver +When: 2.6.42 +Why: Used only by applications compiled against older driver versions. + Superseded by UVCIOC_CTRL_MAP which supports V4L2 menu controls. +Who: Laurent Pinchart <laurent.pinchart@ideasonboard.com> + +---------------------------- + +What: Support for UVCIOC_CTRL_GET and UVCIOC_CTRL_SET in the uvcvideo driver +When: 2.6.42 +Why: Superseded by the UVCIOC_CTRL_QUERY ioctl. +Who: Laurent Pinchart <laurent.pinchart@ideasonboard.com> + +---------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt index b22abba78fe..13de64c7f0a 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt @@ -25,6 +25,8 @@ Other applications are described in the following papers: http://xcpu.org/papers/cellfs-talk.pdf * PROSE I/O: Using 9p to enable Application Partitions http://plan9.escet.urjc.es/iwp9/cready/PROSE_iwp9_2006.pdf + * VirtFS: A Virtualization Aware File System pass-through + http://goo.gl/3WPDg USAGE ===== @@ -130,31 +132,20 @@ OPTIONS RESOURCES ========= -Our current recommendation is to use Inferno (http://www.vitanuova.com/nferno/index.html) -as the 9p server. You can start a 9p server under Inferno by issuing the -following command: - ; styxlisten -A tcp!*!564 export '#U*' +Protocol specifications are maintained on github: +http://ericvh.github.com/9p-rfc/ -The -A specifies an unauthenticated export. The 564 is the port # (you may -have to choose a higher port number if running as a normal user). The '#U*' -specifies exporting the root of the Linux name space. You may specify a -subset of the namespace by extending the path: '#U*'/tmp would just export -/tmp. For more information, see the Inferno manual pages covering styxlisten -and export. +9p client and server implementations are listed on +http://9p.cat-v.org/implementations -A Linux version of the 9p server is now maintained under the npfs project -on sourceforge (http://sourceforge.net/projects/npfs). The currently -maintained version is the single-threaded version of the server (named spfs) -available from the same SVN repository. +A 9p2000.L server is being developed by LLNL and can be found +at http://code.google.com/p/diod/ There are user and developer mailing lists available through the v9fs project on sourceforge (http://sourceforge.net/projects/v9fs). -A stand-alone version of the module (which should build for any 2.6 kernel) -is available via (http://github.com/ericvh/9p-sac/tree/master) - -News and other information is maintained on SWiK (http://swik.net/v9fs) -and the Wiki (http://sf.net/apps/mediawiki/v9fs/index.php). +News and other information is maintained on a Wiki. +(http://sf.net/apps/mediawiki/v9fs/index.php). Bug reports may be issued through the kernel.org bugzilla (http://bugzilla.kernel.org) diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking index 61b31acb917..57d827d6071 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ of the locking scheme for directory operations. prototypes: struct inode *(*alloc_inode)(struct super_block *sb); void (*destroy_inode)(struct inode *); - void (*dirty_inode) (struct inode *); + void (*dirty_inode) (struct inode *, int flags); int (*write_inode) (struct inode *, struct writeback_control *wbc); int (*drop_inode) (struct inode *); void (*evict_inode) (struct inode *); @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ locking rules: s_umount alloc_inode: destroy_inode: -dirty_inode: (must not sleep) +dirty_inode: write_inode: drop_inode: !!!inode->i_lock!!! evict_inode: diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/autofs4-mount-control.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/autofs4-mount-control.txt index 51986bf08a4..4c95935cbcf 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/autofs4-mount-control.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/autofs4-mount-control.txt @@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call. AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_TIMEOUT_CMD ---------------------------- -Set the expire timeout for mounts withing an autofs mount point. +Set the expire timeout for mounts within an autofs mount point. The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/caching/netfs-api.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/netfs-api.txt index 1902c57b72e..a167ab876c3 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/caching/netfs-api.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/netfs-api.txt @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ restraints as possible on how an index is structured and where it is placed in the tree. The netfs can even mix indices and data files at the same level, but it's not recommended. -Each index entry consists of a key of indeterminate length plus some auxilliary +Each index entry consists of a key of indeterminate length plus some auxiliary data, also of indeterminate length. There are some limits on indices: @@ -203,23 +203,23 @@ This has the following fields: If the function is absent, a file size of 0 is assumed. - (6) A function to retrieve auxilliary data from the netfs [optional]. + (6) A function to retrieve auxiliary data from the netfs [optional]. This function will be called with the netfs data that was passed to the - cookie acquisition function and the maximum length of auxilliary data that - it may provide. It should write the auxilliary data into the given buffer + cookie acquisition function and the maximum length of auxiliary data that + it may provide. It should write the auxiliary data into the given buffer and return the quantity it wrote. - If this function is absent, the auxilliary data length will be set to 0. + If this function is absent, the auxiliary data length will be set to 0. - The length of the auxilliary data buffer may be dependent on the key + The length of the auxiliary data buffer may be dependent on the key length. A netfs mustn't rely on being able to provide more than 400 bytes for both. - (7) A function to check the auxilliary data [optional]. + (7) A function to check the auxiliary data [optional]. This function will be called to check that a match found in the cache for - this object is valid. For instance with AFS it could check the auxilliary + this object is valid. For instance with AFS it could check the auxiliary data against the data version number returned by the server to determine whether the index entry in a cache is still valid. @@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ This has the following fields: (*) FSCACHE_CHECKAUX_NEEDS_UPDATE - the entry requires update (*) FSCACHE_CHECKAUX_OBSOLETE - the entry should be deleted - This function can also be used to extract data from the auxilliary data in + This function can also be used to extract data from the auxiliary data in the cache and copy it into the netfs's structures. (8) A pair of functions to manage contexts for the completion callback diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt index fabcb0e00f2..dd57bb6bb39 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt @@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ As a consequence of this, default_groups cannot be removed directly via rmdir(2). They also are not considered when rmdir(2) on the parent group is checking for children. -[Dependant Subsystems] +[Dependent Subsystems] Sometimes other drivers depend on particular configfs items. For example, ocfs2 mounts depend on a heartbeat region item. If that diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_explicit.c b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_explicit.c index fd53869f563..1420233dfa5 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_explicit.c +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_explicit.c @@ -464,9 +464,8 @@ static int __init configfs_example_init(void) return 0; out_unregister: - for (; i >= 0; i--) { + for (i--; i >= 0; i--) configfs_unregister_subsystem(example_subsys[i]); - } return ret; } @@ -475,9 +474,8 @@ static void __exit configfs_example_exit(void) { int i; - for (i = 0; example_subsys[i]; i++) { + for (i = 0; example_subsys[i]; i++) configfs_unregister_subsystem(example_subsys[i]); - } } module_init(configfs_example_init); diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_macros.c b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_macros.c index d8e30a0378a..327dfbc640a 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_macros.c +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_macros.c @@ -427,9 +427,8 @@ static int __init configfs_example_init(void) return 0; out_unregister: - for (; i >= 0; i--) { + for (i--; i >= 0; i--) configfs_unregister_subsystem(example_subsys[i]); - } return ret; } @@ -438,9 +437,8 @@ static void __exit configfs_example_exit(void) { int i; - for (i = 0; example_subsys[i]; i++) { + for (i = 0; example_subsys[i]; i++) configfs_unregister_subsystem(example_subsys[i]); - } } module_init(configfs_example_init); diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt index 6b050464a90..3ae9bc94352 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Note: More extensive information for getting started with ext4 can be * Inode allocation using large virtual block groups via flex_bg * delayed allocation * large block (up to pagesize) support -* efficent new ordered mode in JBD2 and ext4(avoid using buffer head to force +* efficient new ordered mode in JBD2 and ext4(avoid using buffer head to force the ordering) [1] Filesystems with a block size of 1k may see a limit imposed by the @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ directory hash tree having a maximum depth of two. 2.2 Candidate features for future inclusion * Online defrag (patches available but not well tested) -* reduced mke2fs time via lazy itable initialization in conjuction with +* reduced mke2fs time via lazy itable initialization in conjunction with the uninit_bg feature (capability to do this is available in e2fsprogs but a kernel thread to do lazy zeroing of unused inode table blocks after filesystem is first mounted is required for safety) @@ -226,10 +226,6 @@ acl Enables POSIX Access Control Lists support. noacl This option disables POSIX Access Control List support. -reservation - -noreservation - bsddf (*) Make 'df' act like BSD. minixdf Make 'df' act like Minix. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2-uevents.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2-uevents.txt index fd966dc9979..d8188966929 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2-uevents.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2-uevents.txt @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ be fixed. The REMOVE uevent is generated at the end of an unsuccessful mount or at the end of a umount of the filesystem. All REMOVE uevents will -have been preceeded by at least an ADD uevent for the same fileystem, +have been preceded by at least an ADD uevent for the same fileystem, and unlike the other uevents is generated automatically by the kernel's kobject subsystem. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2.txt index 0b59c020091..4cda926628a 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2.txt @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ their I/O so file system consistency is maintained. One of the nifty features of GFS is perfect consistency -- changes made to the file system on one machine show up immediately on all other machines in the cluster. -GFS uses interchangable inter-node locking mechanisms, the currently +GFS uses interchangeable inter-node locking mechanisms, the currently supported mechanisms are: lock_nolock -- allows gfs to be used as a local file system diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/idmapper.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/idmapper.txt index b9b4192ea8b..9c8fd614865 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/idmapper.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/idmapper.txt @@ -47,8 +47,8 @@ request-key will find the first matching line and corresponding program. In this case, /some/other/program will handle all uid lookups and /usr/sbin/nfs.idmap will handle gid, user, and group lookups. -See <file:Documentation/keys-request-keys.txt> for more information about the -request-key function. +See <file:Documentation/security/keys-request-keys.txt> for more information +about the request-key function. ========= diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt index 933bc66ccff..791af8dac06 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt @@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ Note the "Should sync?" parameter "nosync" means that the two mirrors are already in sync which will be the case on a clean shutdown of Windows. If the mirrors are not clean, you can specify the "sync" option instead of "nosync" and the Device-Mapper driver will then copy the entirety of the "Source Device" -to the "Target Device" or if you specified multipled target devices to all of +to the "Target Device" or if you specified multiple target devices to all of them. Once you have your table, save it in a file somewhere (e.g. /etc/ntfsvolume1), diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt index 5393e661169..7618a287aa4 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt @@ -46,9 +46,15 @@ errors=panic Panic and halt the machine if an error occurs. intr (*) Allow signals to interrupt cluster operations. nointr Do not allow signals to interrupt cluster operations. +noatime Do not update access time. +relatime(*) Update atime if the previous atime is older than + mtime or ctime +strictatime Always update atime, but the minimum update interval + is specified by atime_quantum. atime_quantum=60(*) OCFS2 will not update atime unless this number of seconds has passed since the last update. - Set to zero to always update atime. + Set to zero to always update atime. This option need + work with strictatime. data=ordered (*) All data are forced directly out to the main file system prior to its metadata being committed to the journal. @@ -80,7 +86,7 @@ user_xattr (*) Enables Extended User Attributes. nouser_xattr Disables Extended User Attributes. acl Enables POSIX Access Control Lists support. noacl (*) Disables POSIX Access Control Lists support. -resv_level=2 (*) Set how agressive allocation reservations will be. +resv_level=2 (*) Set how aggressive allocation reservations will be. Valid values are between 0 (reservations off) to 8 (maximum space for reservations). dir_resv_level= (*) By default, directory reservations will scale with file diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt index eb59c8b44be..3571667c710 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ Path walking overview A name string specifies a start (root directory, cwd, fd-relative) and a sequence of elements (directory entry names), which together refer to a path in the namespace. A path is represented as a (dentry, vfsmount) tuple. The name -elements are sub-strings, seperated by '/'. +elements are sub-strings, separated by '/'. Name lookups will want to find a particular path that a name string refers to (usually the final element, or parent of final element). This is done by taking @@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ vfstest 24185492 4945 708725(2.9%) 1076136(4.4%) 0 2651 What this shows is that failed rcu-walk lookups, ie. ones that are restarted entirely with ref-walk, are quite rare. Even the "vfstest" case which -specifically has concurrent renames/mkdir/rmdir/ creat/unlink/etc to excercise +specifically has concurrent renames/mkdir/rmdir/ creat/unlink/etc to exercise such races is not showing a huge amount of restarts. Dropping from rcu-walk to ref-walk mean that we have encountered a dentry where diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/pohmelfs/network_protocol.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/pohmelfs/network_protocol.txt index 40ea6c295af..65e03dd4482 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/pohmelfs/network_protocol.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/pohmelfs/network_protocol.txt @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ Commands can be embedded into transaction command (which in turn has own command so one can extend protocol as needed without breaking backward compatibility as long as old commands are supported. All string lengths include tail 0 byte. -All commans are transfered over the network in big-endian. CPU endianess is used at the end peers. +All commands are transferred over the network in big-endian. CPU endianess is used at the end peers. @cmd - command number, which specifies command to be processed. Following commands are used currently: diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index 23cae6548d3..f4817802406 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ just those considered 'most important'. The new vectors are: their statistics are used by kernel developers and interested users to determine the occurrence of interrupts of the given type. -The above IRQ vectors are displayed only when relevent. For example, +The above IRQ vectors are displayed only when relevant. For example, the threshold vector does not exist on x86_64 platforms. Others are suppressed when the system is a uniprocessor. As of this writing, only i386 and x86_64 platforms support the new IRQ vector displays. @@ -574,6 +574,12 @@ The contents of each smp_affinity file is the same by default: > cat /proc/irq/0/smp_affinity ffffffff +There is an alternate interface, smp_affinity_list which allows specifying +a cpu range instead of a bitmask: + + > cat /proc/irq/0/smp_affinity_list + 1024-1031 + The default_smp_affinity mask applies to all non-active IRQs, which are the IRQs which have not yet been allocated/activated, and hence which lack a /proc/irq/[0-9]* directory. @@ -583,12 +589,13 @@ reports itself as being attached. This hardware locality information does not include information about any possible driver locality preference. prof_cpu_mask specifies which CPUs are to be profiled by the system wide -profiler. Default value is ffffffff (all cpus). +profiler. Default value is ffffffff (all cpus if there are only 32 of them). The way IRQs are routed is handled by the IO-APIC, and it's Round Robin between all the CPUs which are allowed to handle it. As usual the kernel has more info than you and does a better job than you, so the defaults are the -best choice for almost everyone. +best choice for almost everyone. [Note this applies only to those IO-APIC's +that support "Round Robin" interrupt distribution.] There are three more important subdirectories in /proc: net, scsi, and sys. The general rule is that the contents, or even the existence of these @@ -836,7 +843,6 @@ Provides counts of softirq handlers serviced since boot time, for each cpu. TASKLET: 0 0 0 290 SCHED: 27035 26983 26971 26746 HRTIMER: 0 0 0 0 - RCU: 1678 1769 2178 2250 1.3 IDE devices in /proc/ide @@ -1202,7 +1208,7 @@ The columns are: W = can do write operations U = can do unblank flags E = it is enabled - C = it is prefered console + C = it is preferred console B = it is primary boot console p = it is used for printk buffer b = it is not a TTY but a Braille device @@ -1331,7 +1337,7 @@ NOTICE: /proc/<pid>/oom_adj is deprecated and will be removed, please see Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt. Caveat: when a parent task is selected, the oom killer will sacrifice any first -generation children with seperate address spaces instead, if possible. This +generation children with separate address spaces instead, if possible. This avoids servers and important system daemons from being killed and loses the minimal amount of work. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/squashfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/squashfs.txt index 2d78f191184..d4d41465a0b 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/squashfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/squashfs.txt @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ or if it is stored out of line (in which case the value field stores a reference to where the actual value is stored). This allows large values to be stored out of line improving scanning and lookup performance and it also allows values to be de-duplicated, the value being stored once, and -all other occurences holding an out of line reference to that value. +all other occurrences holding an out of line reference to that value. The xattr lists are packed into compressed 8K metadata blocks. To reduce overhead in inodes, rather than storing the on-disk diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt index f806e50aaa6..597f728e7b4 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ values of the same type. Mixing types, expressing multiple lines of data, and doing fancy formatting of data is heavily frowned upon. Doing these things may get -you publically humiliated and your code rewritten without notice. +you publicly humiliated and your code rewritten without notice. An attribute definition is simply: diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt index d7b13b01e98..8e4fab639d9 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt @@ -115,28 +115,8 @@ ubi.mtd=0 root=ubi0:rootfs rootfstype=ubifs Module Parameters for Debugging =============================== -When UBIFS has been compiled with debugging enabled, there are 3 module +When UBIFS has been compiled with debugging enabled, there are 2 module parameters that are available to control aspects of testing and debugging. -The parameters are unsigned integers where each bit controls an option. -The parameters are: - -debug_msgs Selects which debug messages to display, as follows: - - Message Type Flag value - - General messages 1 - Journal messages 2 - Mount messages 4 - Commit messages 8 - LEB search messages 16 - Budgeting messages 32 - Garbage collection messages 64 - Tree Node Cache (TNC) messages 128 - LEB properties (lprops) messages 256 - Input/output messages 512 - Log messages 1024 - Scan messages 2048 - Recovery messages 4096 debug_chks Selects extra checks that UBIFS can do while running: @@ -154,11 +134,9 @@ debug_tsts Selects a mode of testing, as follows: Test mode Flag value - Force in-the-gaps method 2 Failure mode for recovery testing 4 -For example, set debug_msgs to 5 to display General messages and Mount -messages. +For example, set debug_chks to 3 to enable general and TNC checks. References diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt index 80815ed654c..88b9f5519af 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ functions: The passed struct file_system_type describes your filesystem. When a request is made to mount a filesystem onto a directory in your namespace, the VFS will call the appropriate mount() method for the specific -filesystem. New vfsmount refering to the tree returned by ->mount() +filesystem. New vfsmount referring to the tree returned by ->mount() will be attached to the mountpoint, so that when pathname resolution reaches the mountpoint it will jump into the root of that vfsmount. @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ struct super_operations { struct inode *(*alloc_inode)(struct super_block *sb); void (*destroy_inode)(struct inode *); - void (*dirty_inode) (struct inode *); + void (*dirty_inode) (struct inode *, int flags); int (*write_inode) (struct inode *, int); void (*drop_inode) (struct inode *); void (*delete_inode) (struct inode *); diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.txt index 5282e3e5141..2ce36439c09 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.txt @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ the aggregation of all the previous changes currently held only in the log. This relogging technique also allows objects to be moved forward in the log so that an object being relogged does not prevent the tail of the log from ever moving forward. This can be seen in the table above by the changing -(increasing) LSN of each subsquent transaction - the LSN is effectively a +(increasing) LSN of each subsequent transaction - the LSN is effectively a direct encoding of the location in the log of the transaction. This relogging is also used to implement long-running, multiple-commit @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ the same time another transaction modifies the item and inserts the log item into the new CIL, then checkpoint transaction commit code cannot use log items to store the list of log vectors that need to be written into the transaction. Hence log vectors need to be able to be chained together to allow them to be -detatched from the log items. That is, when the CIL is flushed the memory +detached from the log items. That is, when the CIL is flushed the memory buffer and log vector attached to each log item needs to be attached to the checkpoint context so that the log item can be released. In diagrammatic form, the CIL would look like this before the flush: @@ -577,7 +577,7 @@ only becomes unpinned when all the transactions complete and there are no pending transactions. Thus the pinning and unpinning of a log item is symmetric as there is a 1:1 relationship with transaction commit and log item completion. -For delayed logging, however, we have an assymetric transaction commit to +For delayed logging, however, we have an asymmetric transaction commit to completion relationship. Every time an object is relogged in the CIL it goes through the commit process without a corresponding completion being registered. That is, we now have a many-to-one relationship between transaction commit and @@ -780,7 +780,7 @@ With delayed logging, there are new steps inserted into the life cycle: From this, it can be seen that the only life cycle differences between the two logging methods are in the middle of the life cycle - they still have the same beginning and end and execution constraints. The only differences are in the -commiting of the log items to the log itself and the completion processing. +committing of the log items to the log itself and the completion processing. Hence delayed logging should not introduce any constraints on log item behaviour, allocation or freeing that don't already exist. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt index 7bff3e4f35d..3fc0c31a6f5 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt @@ -39,6 +39,12 @@ When mounting an XFS filesystem, the following options are accepted. drive level write caching to be enabled, for devices that support write barriers. + discard + Issue command to let the block device reclaim space freed by the + filesystem. This is useful for SSD devices, thinly provisioned + LUNs and virtual machine images, but may have a performance + impact. This option is incompatible with the nodelaylog option. + dmapi Enable the DMAPI (Data Management API) event callouts. Use with the "mtpt" option. diff --git a/Documentation/flexible-arrays.txt b/Documentation/flexible-arrays.txt index cb8a3a00cc9..df904aec990 100644 --- a/Documentation/flexible-arrays.txt +++ b/Documentation/flexible-arrays.txt @@ -66,10 +66,10 @@ trick is to ensure that any needed memory allocations are done before entering atomic context, using: int flex_array_prealloc(struct flex_array *array, unsigned int start, - unsigned int end, gfp_t flags); + unsigned int nr_elements, gfp_t flags); This function will ensure that memory for the elements indexed in the range -defined by start and end has been allocated. Thereafter, a +defined by start and nr_elements has been allocated. Thereafter, a flex_array_put() call on an element in that range is guaranteed not to block. diff --git a/Documentation/usb/hiddev.txt b/Documentation/hid/hiddev.txt index 6e8c9f1d2f2..6e8c9f1d2f2 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/hiddev.txt +++ b/Documentation/hid/hiddev.txt diff --git a/Documentation/hid/hidraw.txt b/Documentation/hid/hidraw.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..029e6cb9a7e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hid/hidraw.txt @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ + HIDRAW - Raw Access to USB and Bluetooth Human Interface Devices + ================================================================== + +The hidraw driver provides a raw interface to USB and Bluetooth Human +Interface Devices (HIDs). It differs from hiddev in that reports sent and +received are not parsed by the HID parser, but are sent to and received from +the device unmodified. + +Hidraw should be used if the userspace application knows exactly how to +communicate with the hardware device, and is able to construct the HID +reports manually. This is often the case when making userspace drivers for +custom HID devices. + +Hidraw is also useful for communicating with non-conformant HID devices +which send and receive data in a way that is inconsistent with their report +descriptors. Because hiddev parses reports which are sent and received +through it, checking them against the device's report descriptor, such +communication with these non-conformant devices is impossible using hiddev. +Hidraw is the only alternative, short of writing a custom kernel driver, for +these non-conformant devices. + +A benefit of hidraw is that its use by userspace applications is independent +of the underlying hardware type. Currently, Hidraw is implemented for USB +and Bluetooth. In the future, as new hardware bus types are developed which +use the HID specification, hidraw will be expanded to add support for these +new bus types. + +Hidraw uses a dynamic major number, meaning that udev should be relied on to +create hidraw device nodes. Udev will typically create the device nodes +directly under /dev (eg: /dev/hidraw0). As this location is distribution- +and udev rule-dependent, applications should use libudev to locate hidraw +devices attached to the system. There is a tutorial on libudev with a +working example at: + http://www.signal11.us/oss/udev/ + +The HIDRAW API +--------------- + +read() +------- +read() will read a queued report received from the HID device. On USB +devices, the reports read using read() are the reports sent from the device +on the INTERRUPT IN endpoint. By default, read() will block until there is +a report available to be read. read() can be made non-blocking, by passing +the O_NONBLOCK flag to open(), or by setting the O_NONBLOCK flag using +fcntl(). + +On a device which uses numbered reports, the first byte of the returned data +will be the report number; the report data follows, beginning in the second +byte. For devices which do not use numbered reports, the report data +will begin at the first byte. + +write() +-------- +The write() function will write a report to the device. For USB devices, if +the device has an INTERRUPT OUT endpoint, the report will be sent on that +endpoint. If it does not, the report will be sent over the control endpoint, +using a SET_REPORT transfer. + +The first byte of the buffer passed to write() should be set to the report +number. If the device does not use numbered reports, the first byte should +be set to 0. The report data itself should begin at the second byte. + +ioctl() +-------- +Hidraw supports the following ioctls: + +HIDIOCGRDESCSIZE: Get Report Descriptor Size +This ioctl will get the size of the device's report descriptor. + +HIDIOCGRDESC: Get Report Descriptor +This ioctl returns the device's report descriptor using a +hidraw_report_descriptor struct. Make sure to set the size field of the +hidraw_report_descriptor struct to the size returned from HIDIOCGRDESCSIZE. + +HIDIOCGRAWINFO: Get Raw Info +This ioctl will return a hidraw_devinfo struct containing the bus type, the +vendor ID (VID), and product ID (PID) of the device. The bus type can be one +of: + BUS_USB + BUS_HIL + BUS_BLUETOOTH + BUS_VIRTUAL +which are defined in linux/input.h. + +HIDIOCGRAWNAME(len): Get Raw Name +This ioctl returns a string containing the vendor and product strings of +the device. The returned string is Unicode, UTF-8 encoded. + +HIDIOCGRAWPHYS(len): Get Physical Address +This ioctl returns a string representing the physical address of the device. +For USB devices, the string contains the physical path to the device (the +USB controller, hubs, ports, etc). For Bluetooth devices, the string +contains the hardware (MAC) address of the device. + +HIDIOCSFEATURE(len): Send a Feature Report +This ioctl will send a feature report to the device. Per the HID +specification, feature reports are always sent using the control endpoint. +Set the first byte of the supplied buffer to the report number. For devices +which do not use numbered reports, set the first byte to 0. The report data +begins in the second byte. Make sure to set len accordingly, to one more +than the length of the report (to account for the report number). + +HIDIOCGFEATURE(len): Get a Feature Report +This ioctl will request a feature report from the device using the control +endpoint. The first byte of the supplied buffer should be set to the report +number of the requested report. For devices which do not use numbered +reports, set the first byte to 0. The report will be returned starting at +the first byte of the buffer (ie: the report number is not returned). + +Example +--------- +In samples/, find hid-example.c, which shows examples of read(), write(), +and all the ioctls for hidraw. The code may be used by anyone for any +purpose, and can serve as a starting point for developing applications using +hidraw. + +Document by: + Alan Ott <alan@signal11.us>, Signal 11 Software diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru index 5eb3b9d5f0d..915f32063a2 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ motherboards (most modern Abit motherboards). The first and second revision of the uGuru chip in reality is a Winbond W83L950D in disguise (despite Abit claiming it is "a new microprocessor -designed by the ABIT Engineers"). Unfortunatly this doesn't help since the +designed by the ABIT Engineers"). Unfortunately this doesn't help since the W83L950D is a generic microcontroller with a custom Abit application running on it. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet index d9251efdcec..8d2be8a0b1e 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet @@ -5,9 +5,9 @@ First of all, what I know about uGuru is no fact based on any help, hints or datasheet from Abit. The data I have got on uGuru have I assembled through my weak knowledge in "backwards engineering". And just for the record, you may have noticed uGuru isn't a chip developed by -Abit, as they claim it to be. It's realy just an microprocessor (uC) created by +Abit, as they claim it to be. It's really just an microprocessor (uC) created by Winbond (W83L950D). And no, reading the manual for this specific uC or -mailing Windbond for help won't give any usefull data about uGuru, as it is +mailing Windbond for help won't give any useful data about uGuru, as it is the program inside the uC that is responding to calls. Olle Sandberg <ollebull@gmail.com>, 2005-05-25 @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ later on attached again data-port will hold 0x08, more about this later. After wider testing of the Linux kernel driver some variants of the uGuru have turned up which will hold 0x00 instead of 0xAC at the CMD port, thus we also -have to test CMD for two different values. On these uGuru's DATA will initally +have to test CMD for two different values. On these uGuru's DATA will initially hold 0x09 and will only hold 0x08 after reading CMD first, so CMD must be read first! @@ -308,5 +308,5 @@ the voltage / clock programming out, I tried reading and only reading banks resulted in a _permanent_ reprogramming of the voltages, luckily I had the sensors part configured so that it would shutdown my system on any out of spec voltages which proprably safed my computer (after a reboot I managed to -immediatly enter the bios and reload the defaults). This probably means that +immediately enter the bios and reload the defaults). This probably means that the read/write cycle for the non sensor part is different from the sensor part. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru3 b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru3 index fa598aac22f..a6ccfe4bb6a 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru3 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru3 @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This driver supports the hardware monitoring features of the third revision of the Abit uGuru chip, found on recent Abit uGuru featuring motherboards. The 3rd revision of the uGuru chip in reality is a Winbond W83L951G. -Unfortunatly this doesn't help since the W83L951G is a generic microcontroller +Unfortunately this doesn't help since the W83L951G is a generic microcontroller with a custom Abit application running on it. Despite Abit not releasing any information regarding the uGuru revision 3, diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adm1021 b/Documentation/hwmon/adm1021 index 03d02bfb3df..02ad96cf9b2 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/adm1021 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adm1021 @@ -14,10 +14,6 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'gl523sm' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e Datasheet: - * Intel Xeon Processor - Prefix: - any other - may require 'force_adm1021' parameter - Addresses scanned: none - Datasheet: Publicly available at Intel website * Maxim MAX1617 Prefix: 'max1617' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e @@ -91,21 +87,27 @@ will do no harm, but will return 'old' values. It is possible to make ADM1021-clones do faster measurements, but there is really no good reason for that. -Xeon support ------------- -Some Xeon processors have real max1617, adm1021, or compatible chips -within them, with two temperature sensors. +Netburst-based Xeon support +--------------------------- -Other Xeons have chips with only one sensor. +Some Xeon processors based on the Netburst (early Pentium 4, from 2001 to +2003) microarchitecture had real MAX1617, ADM1021, or compatible chips +within them, with two temperature sensors. Other Xeon processors of this +era (with 400 MHz FSB) had chips with only one temperature sensor. -If you have a Xeon, and the adm1021 module loads, and both temperatures -appear valid, then things are good. +If you have such an old Xeon, and you get two valid temperatures when +loading the adm1021 module, then things are good. -If the adm1021 module doesn't load, you should try this: - modprobe adm1021 force_adm1021=BUS,ADDRESS - ADDRESS can only be 0x18, 0x1a, 0x29, 0x2b, 0x4c, or 0x4e. +If nothing happens when loading the adm1021 module, and you are certain +that your specific Xeon processor model includes compatible sensors, you +will have to explicitly instantiate the sensor chips from user-space. See +method 4 in Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices. Possible slave +addresses are 0x18, 0x1a, 0x29, 0x2b, 0x4c, or 0x4e. It is likely that +only temp2 will be correct and temp1 will have to be ignored. -If you have dual Xeons you may have appear to have two separate -adm1021-compatible chips, or two single-temperature sensors, at distinct -addresses. +Previous generations of the Xeon processor (based on Pentium II/III) +didn't have these sensors. Next generations of Xeon processors (533 MHz +FSB and faster) lost them, until the Core-based generation which +introduced integrated digital thermal sensors. These are supported by +the coretemp driver. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adm1275 b/Documentation/hwmon/adm1275 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6a3a6476cf2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adm1275 @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +Kernel driver adm1275 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Analog Devices ADM1275 + Prefix: 'adm1275' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: www.analog.com/static/imported-files/data_sheets/ADM1275.pdf + +Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com> + + +Description +----------- + +This driver supports hardware montoring for Analog Devices ADM1275 Hot-Swap +Controller and Digital Power Monitor. + +The ADM1275 is a hot-swap controller that allows a circuit board to be removed +from or inserted into a live backplane. It also features current and voltage +readback via an integrated 12-bit analog-to-digital converter (ADC), accessed +using a PMBus. interface. + +The driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver. Please see +Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details on PMBus client drivers. + + +Usage Notes +----------- + +This driver does not auto-detect devices. You will have to instantiate the +devices explicitly. Please see Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices for +details. + + +Platform data support +--------------------- + +The driver supports standard PMBus driver platform data. Please see +Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details. + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +The following attributes are supported. Limits are read-write; all other +attributes are read-only. + +in1_label "vin1" or "vout1" depending on chip variant and + configuration. +in1_input Measured voltage. From READ_VOUT register. +in1_min Minumum Voltage. From VOUT_UV_WARN_LIMIT register. +in1_max Maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_WARN_LIMIT register. +in1_min_alarm Voltage low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_WARNING status. +in1_max_alarm Voltage high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_WARNING status. + +curr1_label "iout1" +curr1_input Measured current. From READ_IOUT register. +curr1_max Maximum current. From IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register. +curr1_max_alarm Current high alarm. From IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/coretemp b/Documentation/hwmon/coretemp index 25568f84480..f85e913a340 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/coretemp +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/coretemp @@ -15,8 +15,13 @@ Author: Rudolf Marek Description ----------- +This driver permits reading the DTS (Digital Temperature Sensor) embedded +inside Intel CPUs. This driver can read both the per-core and per-package +temperature using the appropriate sensors. The per-package sensor is new; +as of now, it is present only in the SandyBridge platform. The driver will +show the temperature of all cores inside a package under a single device +directory inside hwmon. -This driver permits reading temperature sensor embedded inside Intel Core CPU. Temperature is measured in degrees Celsius and measurement resolution is 1 degree C. Valid temperatures are from 0 to TjMax degrees C, because the actual value of temperature register is in fact a delta from TjMax. @@ -27,13 +32,15 @@ mechanism will perform actions to forcibly cool down the processor. Alarm may be raised, if the temperature grows enough (more than TjMax) to trigger the Out-Of-Spec bit. Following table summarizes the exported sysfs files: -temp1_input - Core temperature (in millidegrees Celsius). -temp1_max - All cooling devices should be turned on (on Core2). -temp1_crit - Maximum junction temperature (in millidegrees Celsius). -temp1_crit_alarm - Set when Out-of-spec bit is set, never clears. +All Sysfs entries are named with their core_id (represented here by 'X'). +tempX_input - Core temperature (in millidegrees Celsius). +tempX_max - All cooling devices should be turned on (on Core2). +tempX_crit - Maximum junction temperature (in millidegrees Celsius). +tempX_crit_alarm - Set when Out-of-spec bit is set, never clears. Correct CPU operation is no longer guaranteed. -temp1_label - Contains string "Core X", where X is processor - number. +tempX_label - Contains string "Core X", where X is processor + number. For Package temp, this will be "Physical id Y", + where Y is the package number. The TjMax temperature is set to 85 degrees C if undocumented model specific register (UMSR) 0xee has bit 30 set. If not the TjMax is 100 degrees C as diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/emc6w201 b/Documentation/hwmon/emc6w201 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..32f355aaf56 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/emc6w201 @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +Kernel driver emc6w201 +====================== + +Supported chips: + * SMSC EMC6W201 + Prefix: 'emc6w201' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e + Datasheet: Not public + +Author: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> + + +Description +----------- + +From the datasheet: + +"The EMC6W201 is an environmental monitoring device with automatic fan +control capability and enhanced system acoustics for noise suppression. +This ACPI compliant device provides hardware monitoring for up to six +voltages (including its own VCC) and five external thermal sensors, +measures the speed of up to five fans, and controls the speed of +multiple DC fans using three Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) outputs. Note +that it is possible to control more than three fans by connecting two +fans to one PWM output. The EMC6W201 will be available in a 36-pin +QFN package." + +The device is functionally close to the EMC6D100 series, but is +register-incompatible. + +The driver currently only supports the monitoring of the voltages, +temperatures and fan speeds. Limits can be changed. Alarms are not +supported, and neither is fan speed control. + + +Known Systems With EMC6W201 +--------------------------- + +The EMC6W201 is a rare device, only found on a few systems, made in +2005 and 2006. Known systems with this device: +* Dell Precision 670 workstation +* Gigabyte 2CEWH mainboard diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg b/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg index df02245d141..84d2623810f 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg @@ -6,6 +6,10 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'f71808e' Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space Datasheet: Not public + * Fintek F71808A + Prefix: 'f71808a' + Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space + Datasheet: Not public * Fintek F71858FG Prefix: 'f71858fg' Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/fam15h_power b/Documentation/hwmon/fam15h_power new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a92918e0bd6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/fam15h_power @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +Kernel driver fam15h_power +========================== + +Supported chips: +* AMD Family 15h Processors + + Prefix: 'fam15h_power' + Addresses scanned: PCI space + Datasheets: + BIOS and Kernel Developer's Guide (BKDG) For AMD Family 15h Processors + (not yet published) + +Author: Andreas Herrmann <andreas.herrmann3@amd.com> + +Description +----------- + +This driver permits reading of registers providing power information +of AMD Family 15h processors. + +For AMD Family 15h processors the following power values can be +calculated using different processor northbridge function registers: + +* BasePwrWatts: Specifies in watts the maximum amount of power + consumed by the processor for NB and logic external to the core. +* ProcessorPwrWatts: Specifies in watts the maximum amount of power + the processor can support. +* CurrPwrWatts: Specifies in watts the current amount of power being + consumed by the processor. + +This driver provides ProcessorPwrWatts and CurrPwrWatts: +* power1_crit (ProcessorPwrWatts) +* power1_input (CurrPwrWatts) + +On multi-node processors the calculated value is for the entire +package and not for a single node. Thus the driver creates sysfs +attributes only for internal node0 of a multi-node processor. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/k10temp b/Documentation/hwmon/k10temp index d2b56a4fd1f..0393c89277c 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/k10temp +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/k10temp @@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ Supported chips: Socket S1G2: Athlon (X2), Sempron (X2), Turion X2 (Ultra) * AMD Family 12h processors: "Llano" * AMD Family 14h processors: "Brazos" (C/E/G-Series) +* AMD Family 15h processors: "Bulldozer" Prefix: 'k10temp' Addresses scanned: PCI space @@ -40,7 +41,7 @@ Description ----------- This driver permits reading of the internal temperature sensor of AMD -Family 10h/11h/12h/14h processors. +Family 10h/11h/12h/14h/15h processors. All these processors have a sensor, but on those for Socket F or AM2+, the sensor may return inconsistent values (erratum 319). The driver diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 index fa475c0a48a..f3efd18e87f 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 @@ -32,6 +32,16 @@ Supported chips: Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d Datasheet: Publicly available at the ON Semiconductor website http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=ADT7461 + * Analog Devices ADT7461A + Prefix: 'adt7461a' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d + Datasheet: Publicly available at the ON Semiconductor website + http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=ADT7461A + * ON Semiconductor NCT1008 + Prefix: 'nct1008' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d + Datasheet: Publicly available at the ON Semiconductor website + http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=NCT1008 * Maxim MAX6646 Prefix: 'max6646' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4d @@ -149,7 +159,7 @@ ADM1032: * ALERT is triggered by open remote sensor. * SMBus PEC support for Write Byte and Receive Byte transactions. -ADT7461: +ADT7461, ADT7461A, NCT1008: * Extended temperature range (breaks compatibility) * Lower resolution for remote temperature @@ -195,9 +205,9 @@ are exported, one for each channel, but these values are of course linked. Only the local hysteresis can be set from user-space, and the same delta applies to the remote hysteresis. -The lm90 driver will not update its values more frequently than every -other second; reading them more often will do no harm, but will return -'old' values. +The lm90 driver will not update its values more frequently than configured with +the update_interval attribute; reading them more often will do no harm, but will +return 'old' values. SMBus Alert Support ------------------- @@ -205,11 +215,12 @@ SMBus Alert Support This driver has basic support for SMBus alert. When an alert is received, the status register is read and the faulty temperature channel is logged. -The Analog Devices chips (ADM1032 and ADT7461) do not implement the SMBus -alert protocol properly so additional care is needed: the ALERT output is -disabled when an alert is received, and is re-enabled only when the alarm -is gone. Otherwise the chip would block alerts from other chips in the bus -as long as the alarm is active. +The Analog Devices chips (ADM1032, ADT7461 and ADT7461A) and ON +Semiconductor chips (NCT1008) do not implement the SMBus alert protocol +properly so additional care is needed: the ALERT output is disabled when +an alert is received, and is re-enabled only when the alarm is gone. +Otherwise the chip would block alerts from other chips in the bus as long +as the alarm is active. PEC Support ----------- diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max16064 b/Documentation/hwmon/max16064 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..41728999e14 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max16064 @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +Kernel driver max16064 +====================== + +Supported chips: + * Maxim MAX16064 + Prefix: 'max16064' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX16064.pdf + +Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com> + + +Description +----------- + +This driver supports hardware montoring for Maxim MAX16064 Quad Power-Supply +Controller with Active-Voltage Output Control and PMBus Interface. + +The driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver. +Please see Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details on PMBus client drivers. + + +Usage Notes +----------- + +This driver does not auto-detect devices. You will have to instantiate the +devices explicitly. Please see Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices for +details. + + +Platform data support +--------------------- + +The driver supports standard PMBus driver platform data. + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +The following attributes are supported. Limits are read-write; all other +attributes are read-only. + +in[1-4]_label "vout[1-4]" +in[1-4]_input Measured voltage. From READ_VOUT register. +in[1-4]_min Minumum Voltage. From VOUT_UV_WARN_LIMIT register. +in[1-4]_max Maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_WARN_LIMIT register. +in[1-4]_lcrit Critical minumum Voltage. VOUT_UV_FAULT_LIMIT register. +in[1-4]_crit Critical maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_FAULT_LIMIT register. +in[1-4]_min_alarm Voltage low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_WARNING status. +in[1-4]_max_alarm Voltage high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_WARNING status. +in[1-4]_lcrit_alarm Voltage critical low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_FAULT status. +in[1-4]_crit_alarm Voltage critical high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_FAULT status. + +temp1_input Measured temperature. From READ_TEMPERATURE_1 register. +temp1_max Maximum temperature. From OT_WARN_LIMIT register. +temp1_crit Critical high temperature. From OT_FAULT_LIMIT register. +temp1_max_alarm Chip temperature high alarm. Set by comparing + READ_TEMPERATURE_1 with OT_WARN_LIMIT if TEMP_OT_WARNING + status is set. +temp1_crit_alarm Chip temperature critical high alarm. Set by comparing + READ_TEMPERATURE_1 with OT_FAULT_LIMIT if TEMP_OT_FAULT + status is set. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max16065 b/Documentation/hwmon/max16065 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..44b4f61e04f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max16065 @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +Kernel driver max16065 +====================== + +Supported chips: + * Maxim MAX16065, MAX16066 + Prefixes: 'max16065', 'max16066' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: + http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX16065-MAX16066.pdf + * Maxim MAX16067 + Prefix: 'max16067' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: + http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX16067.pdf + * Maxim MAX16068 + Prefix: 'max16068' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: + http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX16068.pdf + * Maxim MAX16070/MAX16071 + Prefixes: 'max16070', 'max16071' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: + http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX16070-MAX16071.pdf + + +Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com> + + +Description +----------- + +[From datasheets] The MAX16065/MAX16066 flash-configurable system managers +monitor and sequence multiple system voltages. The MAX16065/MAX16066 can also +accurately monitor (+/-2.5%) one current channel using a dedicated high-side +current-sense amplifier. The MAX16065 manages up to twelve system voltages +simultaneously, and the MAX16066 manages up to eight supply voltages. + +The MAX16067 flash-configurable system manager monitors and sequences multiple +system voltages. The MAX16067 manages up to six system voltages simultaneously. + +The MAX16068 flash-configurable system manager monitors and manages up to six +system voltages simultaneously. + +The MAX16070/MAX16071 flash-configurable system monitors supervise multiple +system voltages. The MAX16070/MAX16071 can also accurately monitor (+/-2.5%) +one current channel using a dedicated high-side current-sense amplifier. The +MAX16070 monitors up to twelve system voltages simultaneously, and the MAX16071 +monitors up to eight supply voltages. + +Each monitored channel has its own low and high critical limits. MAX16065, +MAX16066, MAX16070, and MAX16071 support an additional limit which is +configurable as either low or high secondary limit. MAX16065, MAX16066, +MAX16070, and MAX16071 also support supply current monitoring. + + +Usage Notes +----------- + +This driver does not probe for devices, since there is no register which +can be safely used to identify the chip. You will have to instantiate +the devices explicitly. Please see Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices for +details. + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +in[0-11]_input Input voltage measurements. + +in12_input Voltage on CSP (Current Sense Positive) pin. + Only if the chip supports current sensing and if + current sensing is enabled. + +in[0-11]_min Low warning limit. + Supported on MAX16065, MAX16066, MAX16070, and MAX16071 + only. + +in[0-11]_max High warning limit. + Supported on MAX16065, MAX16066, MAX16070, and MAX16071 + only. + + Either low or high warning limits are supported + (depending on chip configuration), but not both. + +in[0-11]_lcrit Low critical limit. + +in[0-11]_crit High critical limit. + +in[0-11]_alarm Input voltage alarm. + +curr1_input Current sense input; only if the chip supports current + sensing and if current sensing is enabled. + Displayed current assumes 0.001 Ohm current sense + resistor. + +curr1_alarm Overcurrent alarm; only if the chip supports current + sensing and if current sensing is enabled. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max34440 b/Documentation/hwmon/max34440 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6c525dd07d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max34440 @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +Kernel driver max34440 +====================== + +Supported chips: + * Maxim MAX34440 + Prefixes: 'max34440' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX34440.pdf + * Maxim MAX34441 + PMBus 5-Channel Power-Supply Manager and Intelligent Fan Controller + Prefixes: 'max34441' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX34441.pdf + +Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com> + + +Description +----------- + +This driver supports hardware montoring for Maxim MAX34440 PMBus 6-Channel +Power-Supply Manager and MAX34441 PMBus 5-Channel Power-Supply Manager +and Intelligent Fan Controller. + +The driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver. Please see +Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details on PMBus client drivers. + + +Usage Notes +----------- + +This driver does not auto-detect devices. You will have to instantiate the +devices explicitly. Please see Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices for +details. + + +Platform data support +--------------------- + +The driver supports standard PMBus driver platform data. + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +The following attributes are supported. Limits are read-write; all other +attributes are read-only. + +in[1-6]_label "vout[1-6]". +in[1-6]_input Measured voltage. From READ_VOUT register. +in[1-6]_min Minumum Voltage. From VOUT_UV_WARN_LIMIT register. +in[1-6]_max Maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_WARN_LIMIT register. +in[1-6]_lcrit Critical minumum Voltage. VOUT_UV_FAULT_LIMIT register. +in[1-6]_crit Critical maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_FAULT_LIMIT register. +in[1-6]_min_alarm Voltage low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_WARNING status. +in[1-6]_max_alarm Voltage high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_WARNING status. +in[1-6]_lcrit_alarm Voltage critical low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_FAULT status. +in[1-6]_crit_alarm Voltage critical high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_FAULT status. + +curr[1-6]_label "iout[1-6]". +curr[1-6]_input Measured current. From READ_IOUT register. +curr[1-6]_max Maximum current. From IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register. +curr[1-6]_crit Critical maximum current. From IOUT_OC_FAULT_LIMIT register. +curr[1-6]_max_alarm Current high alarm. From IOUT_OC_WARNING status. +curr[1-6]_crit_alarm Current critical high alarm. From IOUT_OC_FAULT status. + + in6 and curr6 attributes only exist for MAX34440. + +temp[1-8]_input Measured temperatures. From READ_TEMPERATURE_1 register. + temp1 is the chip's internal temperature. temp2..temp5 + are remote I2C temperature sensors. For MAX34441, temp6 + is a remote thermal-diode sensor. For MAX34440, temp6..8 + are remote I2C temperature sensors. +temp[1-8]_max Maximum temperature. From OT_WARN_LIMIT register. +temp[1-8]_crit Critical high temperature. From OT_FAULT_LIMIT register. +temp[1-8]_max_alarm Temperature high alarm. +temp[1-8]_crit_alarm Temperature critical high alarm. + + temp7 and temp8 attributes only exist for MAX34440. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max6642 b/Documentation/hwmon/max6642 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..afbd3e4942e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max6642 @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +Kernel driver max6642 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Maxim MAX6642 + Prefix: 'max6642' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48-0x4f + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website + http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX6642.pdf + +Authors: + Per Dalen <per.dalen@appeartv.com> + +Description +----------- + +The MAX6642 is a digital temperature sensor. It senses its own temperature as +well as the temperature on one external diode. + +All temperature values are given in degrees Celsius. Resolution +is 0.25 degree for the local temperature and for the remote temperature. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max6650 b/Documentation/hwmon/max6650 index c565650fcfc..58d9644a2bd 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/max6650 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max6650 @@ -2,9 +2,13 @@ Kernel driver max6650 ===================== Supported chips: - * Maxim 6650 / 6651 + * Maxim MAX6650 Prefix: 'max6650' - Addresses scanned: I2C 0x1b, 0x1f, 0x48, 0x4b + Addresses scanned: none + Datasheet: http://pdfserv.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX6650-MAX6651.pdf + * Maxim MAX6651 + Prefix: 'max6651' + Addresses scanned: none Datasheet: http://pdfserv.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX6650-MAX6651.pdf Authors: @@ -15,10 +19,10 @@ Authors: Description ----------- -This driver implements support for the Maxim 6650/6651 +This driver implements support for the Maxim MAX6650 and MAX6651. -The 2 devices are very similar, but the Maxim 6550 has a reduced feature -set, e.g. only one fan-input, instead of 4 for the 6651. +The 2 devices are very similar, but the MAX6550 has a reduced feature +set, e.g. only one fan-input, instead of 4 for the MAX6651. The driver is not able to distinguish between the 2 devices. @@ -36,6 +40,13 @@ fan1_div rw sets the speed range the inputs can handle. Legal values are 1, 2, 4, and 8. Use lower values for faster fans. +Usage notes +----------- + +This driver does not auto-detect devices. You will have to instantiate the +devices explicitly. Please see Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices for +details. + Module parameters ----------------- diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max8688 b/Documentation/hwmon/max8688 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0ddd3a41203 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max8688 @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +Kernel driver max8688 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Maxim MAX8688 + Prefix: 'max8688' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX8688.pdf + +Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com> + + +Description +----------- + +This driver supports hardware montoring for Maxim MAX8688 Digital Power-Supply +Controller/Monitor with PMBus Interface. + +The driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver. Please see +Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details on PMBus client drivers. + + +Usage Notes +----------- + +This driver does not auto-detect devices. You will have to instantiate the +devices explicitly. Please see Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices for +details. + + +Platform data support +--------------------- + +The driver supports standard PMBus driver platform data. + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +The following attributes are supported. Limits are read-write; all other +attributes are read-only. + +in1_label "vout1" +in1_input Measured voltage. From READ_VOUT register. +in1_min Minumum Voltage. From VOUT_UV_WARN_LIMIT register. +in1_max Maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_WARN_LIMIT register. +in1_lcrit Critical minumum Voltage. VOUT_UV_FAULT_LIMIT register. +in1_crit Critical maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_FAULT_LIMIT register. +in1_min_alarm Voltage low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_WARNING status. +in1_max_alarm Voltage high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_WARNING status. +in1_lcrit_alarm Voltage critical low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_FAULT status. +in1_crit_alarm Voltage critical high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_FAULT status. + +curr1_label "iout1" +curr1_input Measured current. From READ_IOUT register. +curr1_max Maximum current. From IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register. +curr1_crit Critical maximum current. From IOUT_OC_FAULT_LIMIT register. +curr1_max_alarm Current high alarm. From IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register. +curr1_crit_alarm Current critical high alarm. From IOUT_OC_FAULT status. + +temp1_input Measured temperature. From READ_TEMPERATURE_1 register. +temp1_max Maximum temperature. From OT_WARN_LIMIT register. +temp1_crit Critical high temperature. From OT_FAULT_LIMIT register. +temp1_max_alarm Chip temperature high alarm. Set by comparing + READ_TEMPERATURE_1 with OT_WARN_LIMIT if TEMP_OT_WARNING + status is set. +temp1_crit_alarm Chip temperature critical high alarm. Set by comparing + READ_TEMPERATURE_1 with OT_FAULT_LIMIT if TEMP_OT_FAULT + status is set. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/pkgtemp b/Documentation/hwmon/pkgtemp deleted file mode 100644 index c8e1fb0fadd..00000000000 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/pkgtemp +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ -Kernel driver pkgtemp -====================== - -Supported chips: - * Intel family - Prefix: 'pkgtemp' - CPUID: - Datasheet: Intel 64 and IA-32 Architectures Software Developer's Manual - Volume 3A: System Programming Guide - -Author: Fenghua Yu - -Description ------------ - -This driver permits reading package level temperature sensor embedded inside -Intel CPU package. The sensors can be in core, uncore, memory controller, or -other components in a package. The feature is first implemented in Intel Sandy -Bridge platform. - -Temperature is measured in degrees Celsius and measurement resolution is -1 degree C. Valid temperatures are from 0 to TjMax degrees C, because the actual -value of temperature register is in fact a delta from TjMax. - -Temperature known as TjMax is the maximum junction temperature of package. -We get this from MSR_IA32_TEMPERATURE_TARGET. If the MSR is not accessible, -we define TjMax as 100 degrees Celsius. At this temperature, protection -mechanism will perform actions to forcibly cool down the package. Alarm -may be raised, if the temperature grows enough (more than TjMax) to trigger -the Out-Of-Spec bit. Following table summarizes the exported sysfs files: - -temp1_input - Package temperature (in millidegrees Celsius). -temp1_max - All cooling devices should be turned on. -temp1_crit - Maximum junction temperature (in millidegrees Celsius). -temp1_crit_alarm - Set when Out-of-spec bit is set, never clears. - Correct CPU operation is no longer guaranteed. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus index f2d42e8bdf4..5e462fc7f99 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus @@ -13,26 +13,6 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'ltc2978' Addresses scanned: - Datasheet: http://cds.linear.com/docs/Datasheet/2978fa.pdf - * Maxim MAX16064 - Quad Power-Supply Controller - Prefix: 'max16064' - Addresses scanned: - - Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX16064.pdf - * Maxim MAX34440 - PMBus 6-Channel Power-Supply Manager - Prefixes: 'max34440' - Addresses scanned: - - Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX34440.pdf - * Maxim MAX34441 - PMBus 5-Channel Power-Supply Manager and Intelligent Fan Controller - Prefixes: 'max34441' - Addresses scanned: - - Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX34441.pdf - * Maxim MAX8688 - Digital Power-Supply Controller/Monitor - Prefix: 'max8688' - Addresses scanned: - - Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX8688.pdf * Generic PMBus devices Prefix: 'pmbus' Addresses scanned: - @@ -150,11 +130,11 @@ The following attributes are supported. Limits are read-write; all other attributes are read-only. inX_input Measured voltage. From READ_VIN or READ_VOUT register. -inX_min Minumum Voltage. +inX_min Minimum Voltage. From VIN_UV_WARN_LIMIT or VOUT_UV_WARN_LIMIT register. inX_max Maximum voltage. From VIN_OV_WARN_LIMIT or VOUT_OV_WARN_LIMIT register. -inX_lcrit Critical minumum Voltage. +inX_lcrit Critical minimum Voltage. From VIN_UV_FAULT_LIMIT or VOUT_UV_FAULT_LIMIT register. inX_crit Critical maximum voltage. From VIN_OV_FAULT_LIMIT or VOUT_OV_FAULT_LIMIT register. @@ -169,17 +149,19 @@ inX_label "vin", "vcap", or "voutY" currX_input Measured current. From READ_IIN or READ_IOUT register. currX_max Maximum current. From IIN_OC_WARN_LIMIT or IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register. -currX_lcrit Critical minumum output current. +currX_lcrit Critical minimum output current. From IOUT_UC_FAULT_LIMIT register. currX_crit Critical maximum current. From IIN_OC_FAULT_LIMIT or IOUT_OC_FAULT_LIMIT register. currX_alarm Current high alarm. From IIN_OC_WARNING or IOUT_OC_WARNING status. +currX_max_alarm Current high alarm. + From IIN_OC_WARN_LIMIT or IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT status. currX_lcrit_alarm Output current critical low alarm. From IOUT_UC_FAULT status. currX_crit_alarm Current critical high alarm. From IIN_OC_FAULT or IOUT_OC_FAULT status. -currX_label "iin" or "vinY" +currX_label "iin" or "ioutY" powerX_input Measured power. From READ_PIN or READ_POUT register. powerX_cap Output power cap. From POUT_MAX register. @@ -193,13 +175,13 @@ powerX_crit_alarm Output power critical high alarm. From POUT_OP_FAULT status. powerX_label "pin" or "poutY" -tempX_input Measured tempererature. +tempX_input Measured temperature. From READ_TEMPERATURE_X register. -tempX_min Mimimum tempererature. From UT_WARN_LIMIT register. -tempX_max Maximum tempererature. From OT_WARN_LIMIT register. -tempX_lcrit Critical low tempererature. +tempX_min Mimimum temperature. From UT_WARN_LIMIT register. +tempX_max Maximum temperature. From OT_WARN_LIMIT register. +tempX_lcrit Critical low temperature. From UT_FAULT_LIMIT register. -tempX_crit Critical high tempererature. +tempX_crit Critical high temperature. From OT_FAULT_LIMIT register. tempX_min_alarm Chip temperature low alarm. Set by comparing READ_TEMPERATURE_X with UT_WARN_LIMIT if diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sht15 b/Documentation/hwmon/sht15 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..02850bdfac1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sht15 @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +Kernel driver sht15 +=================== + +Authors: + * Wouter Horre + * Jonathan Cameron + * Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> + * Jerome Oufella <jerome.oufella@savoirfairelinux.com> + +Supported chips: + * Sensirion SHT10 + Prefix: 'sht10' + + * Sensirion SHT11 + Prefix: 'sht11' + + * Sensirion SHT15 + Prefix: 'sht15' + + * Sensirion SHT71 + Prefix: 'sht71' + + * Sensirion SHT75 + Prefix: 'sht75' + +Datasheet: Publicly available at the Sensirion website +http://www.sensirion.ch/en/pdf/product_information/Datasheet-humidity-sensor-SHT1x.pdf + +Description +----------- + +The SHT10, SHT11, SHT15, SHT71, and SHT75 are humidity and temperature +sensors. + +The devices communicate using two GPIO lines. + +Supported resolutions for the measurements are 14 bits for temperature and 12 +bits for humidity, or 12 bits for temperature and 8 bits for humidity. + +The humidity calibration coefficients are programmed into an OTP memory on the +chip. These coefficients are used to internally calibrate the signals from the +sensors. Disabling the reload of those coefficients allows saving 10ms for each +measurement and decrease power consumption, while loosing on precision. + +Some options may be set directly in the sht15_platform_data structure +or via sysfs attributes. + +Notes: + * The regulator supply name is set to "vcc". + * If a CRC validation fails, a soft reset command is sent, which resets + status register to its hardware default value, but the driver will try to + restore the previous device configuration. + +Platform data +------------- + +* checksum: + set it to true to enable CRC validation of the readings (default to false). +* no_otp_reload: + flag to indicate not to reload from OTP (default to false). +* low_resolution: + flag to indicate the temp/humidity resolution to use (default to false). + +Sysfs interface +--------------- + +* temp1_input: temperature input +* humidity1_input: humidity input +* heater_enable: write 1 in this attribute to enable the on-chip heater, + 0 to disable it. Be careful not to enable the heater + for too long. +* temp1_fault: if 1, this means that the voltage is low (below 2.47V) and + measurement may be invalid. +* humidity1_fault: same as temp1_fault. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/smm665 b/Documentation/hwmon/smm665 index 3820fc9ca52..59e31614054 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/smm665 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/smm665 @@ -150,8 +150,8 @@ in8_crit_alarm Channel F critical alarm in9_crit_alarm AIN1 critical alarm in10_crit_alarm AIN2 critical alarm -temp1_input Chip tempererature -temp1_min Mimimum chip tempererature -temp1_max Maximum chip tempererature -temp1_crit Critical chip tempererature +temp1_input Chip temperature +temp1_min Mimimum chip temperature +temp1_max Maximum chip temperature +temp1_crit Critical chip temperature temp1_crit_alarm Temperature critical alarm diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches b/Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..86f42e8e9e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + How to Get Your Patch Accepted Into the Hwmon Subsystem + ------------------------------------------------------- + +This text is is a collection of suggestions for people writing patches or +drivers for the hwmon subsystem. Following these suggestions will greatly +increase the chances of your change being accepted. + + +1. General +---------- + +* It should be unnecessary to mention, but please read and follow + Documentation/SubmitChecklist + Documentation/SubmittingDrivers + Documentation/SubmittingPatches + Documentation/CodingStyle + +* If your patch generates checkpatch warnings, please refrain from explanations + such as "I don't like that coding style". Keep in mind that each unnecessary + warning helps hiding a real problem. If you don't like the kernel coding + style, don't write kernel drivers. + +* Please test your patch thoroughly. We are not your test group. + Sometimes a patch can not or not completely be tested because of missing + hardware. In such cases, you should test-build the code on at least one + architecture. If run-time testing was not achieved, it should be written + explicitly below the patch header. + +* If your patch (or the driver) is affected by configuration options such as + CONFIG_SMP or CONFIG_HOTPLUG, make sure it compiles for all configuration + variants. + + +2. Adding functionality to existing drivers +------------------------------------------- + +* Make sure the documentation in Documentation/hwmon/<driver_name> is up to + date. + +* Make sure the information in Kconfig is up to date. + +* If the added functionality requires some cleanup or structural changes, split + your patch into a cleanup part and the actual addition. This makes it easier + to review your changes, and to bisect any resulting problems. + +* Never mix bug fixes, cleanup, and functional enhancements in a single patch. + + +3. New drivers +-------------- + +* Running your patch or driver file(s) through checkpatch does not mean its + formatting is clean. If unsure about formatting in your new driver, run it + through Lindent. Lindent is not perfect, and you may have to do some minor + cleanup, but it is a good start. + +* Consider adding yourself to MAINTAINERS. + +* Document the driver in Documentation/hwmon/<driver_name>. + +* Add the driver to Kconfig and Makefile in alphabetical order. + +* Make sure that all dependencies are listed in Kconfig. For new drivers, it + is most likely prudent to add a dependency on EXPERIMENTAL. + +* Avoid forward declarations if you can. Rearrange the code if necessary. + +* Avoid calculations in macros and macro-generated functions. While such macros + may save a line or so in the source, it obfuscates the code and makes code + review more difficult. It may also result in code which is more complicated + than necessary. Use inline functions or just regular functions instead. + +* If the driver has a detect function, make sure it is silent. Debug messages + and messages printed after a successful detection are acceptable, but it + must not print messages such as "Chip XXX not found/supported". + + Keep in mind that the detect function will run for all drivers supporting an + address if a chip is detected on that address. Unnecessary messages will just + pollute the kernel log and not provide any value. + +* Provide a detect function if and only if a chip can be detected reliably. + +* Avoid writing to chip registers in the detect function. If you have to write, + only do it after you have already gathered enough data to be certain that the + detection is going to be successful. + + Keep in mind that the chip might not be what your driver believes it is, and + writing to it might cause a bad misconfiguration. + +* Make sure there are no race conditions in the probe function. Specifically, + completely initialize your chip first, then create sysfs entries and register + with the hwmon subsystem. + +* Do not provide support for deprecated sysfs attributes. + +* Do not create non-standard attributes unless really needed. If you have to use + non-standard attributes, or you believe you do, discuss it on the mailing list + first. Either case, provide a detailed explanation why you need the + non-standard attribute(s). + Standard attributes are specified in Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface. + +* When deciding which sysfs attributes to support, look at the chip's + capabilities. While we do not expect your driver to support everything the + chip may offer, it should at least support all limits and alarms. + +* Last but not least, please check if a driver for your chip already exists + before starting to write a new driver. Especially for temperature sensors, + new chips are often variants of previously released chips. In some cases, + a presumably new chip may simply have been relabeled. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface index 83a698773ad..8f63c244f1a 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface @@ -579,7 +579,7 @@ channel should not be trusted. fan[1-*]_fault temp[1-*]_fault Input fault condition - 0: no fault occured + 0: no fault occurred 1: fault condition RO diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ucd9000 b/Documentation/hwmon/ucd9000 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..40ca6db50c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ucd9000 @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ +Kernel driver ucd9000 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * TI UCD90120, UCD90124, UCD9090, and UCD90910 + Prefixes: 'ucd90120', 'ucd90124', 'ucd9090', 'ucd90910' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheets: + http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd90120.pdf + http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd90124.pdf + http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9090.pdf + http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd90910.pdf + +Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com> + + +Description +----------- + +From datasheets: + +The UCD90120 Power Supply Sequencer and System Health Monitor monitors and +sequences up to 12 independent voltage rails. The device integrates a 12-bit +ADC with a 2.5V internal reference for monitoring up to 13 power supply voltage, +current, or temperature inputs. + +The UCD90124 is a 12-rail PMBus/I2C addressable power-supply sequencer and +system-health monitor. The device integrates a 12-bit ADC for monitoring up to +13 power-supply voltage, current, or temperature inputs. Twenty-six GPIO pins +can be used for power supply enables, power-on reset signals, external +interrupts, cascading, or other system functions. Twelve of these pins offer PWM +functionality. Using these pins, the UCD90124 offers support for fan control, +margining, and general-purpose PWM functions. + +The UCD9090 is a 10-rail PMBus/I2C addressable power-supply sequencer and +monitor. The device integrates a 12-bit ADC for monitoring up to 10 power-supply +voltage inputs. Twenty-three GPIO pins can be used for power supply enables, +power-on reset signals, external interrupts, cascading, or other system +functions. Ten of these pins offer PWM functionality. Using these pins, the +UCD9090 offers support for margining, and general-purpose PWM functions. + +The UCD90910 is a ten-rail I2C / PMBus addressable power-supply sequencer and +system-health monitor. The device integrates a 12-bit ADC for monitoring up to +13 power-supply voltage, current, or temperature inputs. + +This driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver. Please see +Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details on PMBus client drivers. + + +Usage Notes +----------- + +This driver does not auto-detect devices. You will have to instantiate the +devices explicitly. Please see Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices for +details. + + +Platform data support +--------------------- + +The driver supports standard PMBus driver platform data. Please see +Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details. + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +The following attributes are supported. Limits are read-write; all other +attributes are read-only. + +in[1-12]_label "vout[1-12]". +in[1-12]_input Measured voltage. From READ_VOUT register. +in[1-12]_min Minumum Voltage. From VOUT_UV_WARN_LIMIT register. +in[1-12]_max Maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_WARN_LIMIT register. +in[1-12]_lcrit Critical minumum Voltage. VOUT_UV_FAULT_LIMIT register. +in[1-12]_crit Critical maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_FAULT_LIMIT register. +in[1-12]_min_alarm Voltage low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_WARNING status. +in[1-12]_max_alarm Voltage high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_WARNING status. +in[1-12]_lcrit_alarm Voltage critical low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_FAULT status. +in[1-12]_crit_alarm Voltage critical high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_FAULT status. + +curr[1-12]_label "iout[1-12]". +curr[1-12]_input Measured current. From READ_IOUT register. +curr[1-12]_max Maximum current. From IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register. +curr[1-12]_lcrit Critical minumum output current. From IOUT_UC_FAULT_LIMIT + register. +curr[1-12]_crit Critical maximum current. From IOUT_OC_FAULT_LIMIT register. +curr[1-12]_max_alarm Current high alarm. From IOUT_OC_WARNING status. +curr[1-12]_crit_alarm Current critical high alarm. From IOUT_OC_FAULT status. + + For each attribute index, either voltage or current is + reported, but not both. If voltage or current is + reported depends on the chip configuration. + +temp[1-2]_input Measured temperatures. From READ_TEMPERATURE_1 and + READ_TEMPERATURE_2 registers. +temp[1-2]_max Maximum temperature. From OT_WARN_LIMIT register. +temp[1-2]_crit Critical high temperature. From OT_FAULT_LIMIT register. +temp[1-2]_max_alarm Temperature high alarm. +temp[1-2]_crit_alarm Temperature critical high alarm. + +fan[1-4]_input Fan RPM. +fan[1-4]_alarm Fan alarm. +fan[1-4]_fault Fan fault. + + Fan attributes are only available on chips supporting + fan control (UCD90124, UCD90910). Attribute files are + created only for enabled fans. + Note that even though UCD90910 supports up to 10 fans, + only up to four fans are currently supported. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ucd9200 b/Documentation/hwmon/ucd9200 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3c58607f72f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ucd9200 @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ +Kernel driver ucd9200 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * TI UCD9220, UCD9222, UCD9224, UCD9240, UCD9244, UCD9246, and UCD9248 + Prefixes: 'ucd9220', 'ucd9222', 'ucd9224', 'ucd9240', 'ucd9244', 'ucd9246', + 'ucd9248' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheets: + http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9220.pdf + http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9222.pdf + http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9224.pdf + http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9240.pdf + http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9244.pdf + http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9246.pdf + http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9248.pdf + +Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com> + + +Description +----------- + +[From datasheets] UCD9220, UCD9222, UCD9224, UCD9240, UCD9244, UCD9246, and +UCD9248 are multi-rail, multi-phase synchronous buck digital PWM controllers +designed for non-isolated DC/DC power applications. The devices integrate +dedicated circuitry for DC/DC loop management with flash memory and a serial +interface to support configuration, monitoring and management. + +This driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver. Please see +Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details on PMBus client drivers. + + +Usage Notes +----------- + +This driver does not auto-detect devices. You will have to instantiate the +devices explicitly. Please see Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices for +details. + + +Platform data support +--------------------- + +The driver supports standard PMBus driver platform data. Please see +Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details. + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +The following attributes are supported. Limits are read-write; all other +attributes are read-only. + +in1_label "vin". +in1_input Measured voltage. From READ_VIN register. +in1_min Minumum Voltage. From VIN_UV_WARN_LIMIT register. +in1_max Maximum voltage. From VIN_OV_WARN_LIMIT register. +in1_lcrit Critical minumum Voltage. VIN_UV_FAULT_LIMIT register. +in1_crit Critical maximum voltage. From VIN_OV_FAULT_LIMIT register. +in1_min_alarm Voltage low alarm. From VIN_UV_WARNING status. +in1_max_alarm Voltage high alarm. From VIN_OV_WARNING status. +in1_lcrit_alarm Voltage critical low alarm. From VIN_UV_FAULT status. +in1_crit_alarm Voltage critical high alarm. From VIN_OV_FAULT status. + +in[2-5]_label "vout[1-4]". +in[2-5]_input Measured voltage. From READ_VOUT register. +in[2-5]_min Minumum Voltage. From VOUT_UV_WARN_LIMIT register. +in[2-5]_max Maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_WARN_LIMIT register. +in[2-5]_lcrit Critical minumum Voltage. VOUT_UV_FAULT_LIMIT register. +in[2-5]_crit Critical maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_FAULT_LIMIT register. +in[2-5]_min_alarm Voltage low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_WARNING status. +in[2-5]_max_alarm Voltage high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_WARNING status. +in[2-5]_lcrit_alarm Voltage critical low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_FAULT status. +in[2-5]_crit_alarm Voltage critical high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_FAULT status. + +curr1_label "iin". +curr1_input Measured current. From READ_IIN register. + +curr[2-5]_label "iout[1-4]". +curr[2-5]_input Measured current. From READ_IOUT register. +curr[2-5]_max Maximum current. From IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register. +curr[2-5]_lcrit Critical minumum output current. From IOUT_UC_FAULT_LIMIT + register. +curr[2-5]_crit Critical maximum current. From IOUT_OC_FAULT_LIMIT register. +curr[2-5]_max_alarm Current high alarm. From IOUT_OC_WARNING status. +curr[2-5]_crit_alarm Current critical high alarm. From IOUT_OC_FAULT status. + +power1_input Measured input power. From READ_PIN register. +power1_label "pin" + +power[2-5]_input Measured output power. From READ_POUT register. +power[2-5]_label "pout[1-4]" + + The number of output voltage, current, and power + attribute sets is determined by the number of enabled + rails. See chip datasheets for details. + +temp[1-5]_input Measured temperatures. From READ_TEMPERATURE_1 and + READ_TEMPERATURE_2 registers. + temp1 is the chip internal temperature. temp[2-5] are + rail temperatures. temp[2-5] attributes are only + created for enabled rails. See chip datasheets for + details. +temp[1-5]_max Maximum temperature. From OT_WARN_LIMIT register. +temp[1-5]_crit Critical high temperature. From OT_FAULT_LIMIT register. +temp[1-5]_max_alarm Temperature high alarm. +temp[1-5]_crit_alarm Temperature critical high alarm. + +fan1_input Fan RPM. ucd9240 only. +fan1_alarm Fan alarm. ucd9240 only. +fan1_fault Fan fault. ucd9240 only. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83781d b/Documentation/hwmon/w83781d index ecbc1e4574b..129b0a3b555 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83781d +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83781d @@ -403,7 +403,7 @@ found out the following values do work as a form of coarse pwm: 0x80 - seems to turn fans off after some time(1-2 minutes)... might be some form of auto-fan-control based on temp? hmm (Qfan? this mobo is an -old ASUS, it isn't marketed as Qfan. Maybe some beta pre-attemp at Qfan +old ASUS, it isn't marketed as Qfan. Maybe some beta pre-attempt at Qfan that was dropped at the BIOS) 0x81 - off 0x82 - slightly "on-ner" than off, but my fans do not get to move. I can diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d b/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d index 5663e491655..90387c3540f 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ The sysfs interface to the beep bitmask has migrated from the original legacy method of a single sysfs beep_mask file to a newer method using multiple *_beep files as described in .../Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface. -A similar change has occured for the bitmap corresponding to the alarms. The +A similar change has occurred for the bitmap corresponding to the alarms. The original legacy method used a single sysfs alarms file containing a bitmap of triggered alarms. The newer method uses multiple sysfs *_alarm files (again following the pattern described in sysfs-interface). diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 index 6df69765ccb..2871fd50034 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 +++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 @@ -19,6 +19,7 @@ Supported adapters: * Intel 6 Series (PCH) * Intel Patsburg (PCH) * Intel DH89xxCC (PCH) + * Intel Panther Point (PCH) Datasheets: Publicly available at the Intel website On Intel Patsburg and later chipsets, both the normal host SMBus controller diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-parport-light b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-parport-light index bdc9cbb2e0f..c22ee063e1e 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-parport-light +++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-parport-light @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ Author: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> This driver is a light version of i2c-parport. It doesn't depend on the parport driver, and uses direct I/O access instead. This might be -prefered on embedded systems where wasting memory for the clean but heavy +preferred on embedded systems where wasting memory for the clean but heavy parport handling is not an option. The drawback is a reduced portability and the impossibility to daisy-chain other parallel port devices. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-sis96x b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-sis96x index 70e6a0cc1e1..0b979f3252a 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-sis96x +++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-sis96x @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ or perhaps this... (kernel versions later than 2.4.18 may fill in the "Unknown"s) -If you cant see it please look on quirk_sis_96x_smbus +If you can't see it please look on quirk_sis_96x_smbus (drivers/pci/quirks.c) (also if southbridge detection fails) I suspect that this driver could be made to work for the following SiS diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-taos-evm b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-taos-evm index 9146e33be6d..63f62bcbf59 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-taos-evm +++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-taos-evm @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ Currently supported devices are: * TAOS TSL2550 EVM -For addtional information on TAOS products, please see +For additional information on TAOS products, please see http://www.taosinc.com/ diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients b/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients index 5ebf5af1d71..5aa53374ea2 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients +++ b/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ static struct i2c_driver foo_driver = { .name = "foo", }, - .id_table = foo_ids, + .id_table = foo_idtable, .probe = foo_probe, .remove = foo_remove, /* if device autodetection is needed: */ diff --git a/Documentation/i2o/README b/Documentation/i2o/README index 0ebf58c73f5..ee91e2626ff 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2o/README +++ b/Documentation/i2o/README @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Symbios Logic (Now LSI) BoxHill Corporation Loan of initial FibreChannel disk array used for development work. -European Comission +European Commission Funding the work done by the University of Helsinki SysKonnect diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/aliasing-test.c b/Documentation/ia64/aliasing-test.c index 3dfb76ca693..5caa2af3320 100644 --- a/Documentation/ia64/aliasing-test.c +++ b/Documentation/ia64/aliasing-test.c @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ static int scan_rom(char *path, char *file) /* * It's OK if the ROM is unreadable. Maybe there - * is no ROM, or some other error ocurred. The + * is no ROM, or some other error occurred. The * important thing is that no MCA happened. */ if (rc > 0) diff --git a/Documentation/input/elantech.txt b/Documentation/input/elantech.txt index 56941ae1f5d..db798af5ef9 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/elantech.txt +++ b/Documentation/input/elantech.txt @@ -34,7 +34,8 @@ Contents Currently the Linux Elantech touchpad driver is aware of two different hardware versions unimaginatively called version 1 and version 2. Version 1 is found in "older" laptops and uses 4 bytes per packet. Version 2 seems to -be introduced with the EeePC and uses 6 bytes per packet. +be introduced with the EeePC and uses 6 bytes per packet, and provides +additional features such as position of two fingers, and width of the touch. The driver tries to support both hardware versions and should be compatible with the Xorg Synaptics touchpad driver and its graphical configuration @@ -94,18 +95,44 @@ Currently the Linux Elantech touchpad driver provides two extra knobs under can check these bits and reject any packet that appears corrupted. Using this knob you can bypass that check. - It is not known yet whether hardware version 2 provides the same parity - bits. Hence checking is disabled by default. Currently even turning it on - will do nothing. - + Hardware version 2 does not provide the same parity bits. Only some basic + data consistency checking can be done. For now checking is disabled by + default. Currently even turning it on will do nothing. ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +3. Differentiating hardware versions + ================================= + +To detect the hardware version, read the version number as param[0].param[1].param[2] + + 4 bytes version: (after the arrow is the name given in the Dell-provided driver) + 02.00.22 => EF013 + 02.06.00 => EF019 +In the wild, there appear to be more versions, such as 00.01.64, 01.00.21, +02.00.00, 02.00.04, 02.00.06. + + 6 bytes: + 02.00.30 => EF113 + 02.08.00 => EF023 + 02.08.XX => EF123 + 02.0B.00 => EF215 + 04.01.XX => Scroll_EF051 + 04.02.XX => EF051 +In the wild, there appear to be more versions, such as 04.03.01, 04.04.11. There +appears to be almost no difference, except for EF113, which does not report +pressure/width and has different data consistency checks. + +Probably all the versions with param[0] <= 01 can be considered as +4 bytes/firmware 1. The versions < 02.08.00, with the exception of 02.00.30, as +4 bytes/firmware 2. Everything >= 02.08.00 can be considered as 6 bytes. + +///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// -3. Hardware version 1 +4. Hardware version 1 ================== -3.1 Registers +4.1 Registers ~~~~~~~~~ By echoing a hexadecimal value to a register it contents can be altered. @@ -168,7 +195,7 @@ For example: smart edge activation area width? -3.2 Native relative mode 4 byte packet format +4.2 Native relative mode 4 byte packet format ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ byte 0: @@ -226,9 +253,13 @@ byte 3: positive = down -3.3 Native absolute mode 4 byte packet format +4.3 Native absolute mode 4 byte packet format ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +EF013 and EF019 have a special behaviour (due to a bug in the firmware?), and +when 1 finger is touching, the first 2 position reports must be discarded. +This counting is reset whenever a different number of fingers is reported. + byte 0: firmware version 1.x: @@ -279,11 +310,11 @@ byte 3: ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// -4. Hardware version 2 +5. Hardware version 2 ================== -4.1 Registers +5.1 Registers ~~~~~~~~~ By echoing a hexadecimal value to a register it contents can be altered. @@ -316,16 +347,41 @@ For example: 0x7f = never i.e. tap again to release) -4.2 Native absolute mode 6 byte packet format +5.2 Native absolute mode 6 byte packet format ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ - -4.2.1 One finger touch +5.2.1 Parity checking and packet re-synchronization +There is no parity checking, however some consistency checks can be performed. + +For instance for EF113: + SA1= packet[0]; + A1 = packet[1]; + B1 = packet[2]; + SB1= packet[3]; + C1 = packet[4]; + D1 = packet[5]; + if( (((SA1 & 0x3C) != 0x3C) && ((SA1 & 0xC0) != 0x80)) || // check Byte 1 + (((SA1 & 0x0C) != 0x0C) && ((SA1 & 0xC0) == 0x80)) || // check Byte 1 (one finger pressed) + (((SA1 & 0xC0) != 0x80) && (( A1 & 0xF0) != 0x00)) || // check Byte 2 + (((SB1 & 0x3E) != 0x38) && ((SA1 & 0xC0) != 0x80)) || // check Byte 4 + (((SB1 & 0x0E) != 0x08) && ((SA1 & 0xC0) == 0x80)) || // check Byte 4 (one finger pressed) + (((SA1 & 0xC0) != 0x80) && (( C1 & 0xF0) != 0x00)) ) // check Byte 5 + // error detected + +For all the other ones, there are just a few constant bits: + if( ((packet[0] & 0x0C) != 0x04) || + ((packet[3] & 0x0f) != 0x02) ) + // error detected + + +In case an error is detected, all the packets are shifted by one (and packet[0] is discarded). + +5.2.1 One/Three finger touch ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ byte 0: bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - n1 n0 . . . . R L + n1 n0 w3 w2 . . R L L, R = 1 when Left, Right mouse button pressed n1..n0 = numbers of fingers on touchpad @@ -333,24 +389,40 @@ byte 0: byte 1: bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - . . . . . x10 x9 x8 + p7 p6 p5 p4 . x10 x9 x8 byte 2: bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - x7 x6 x5 x4 x4 x2 x1 x0 + x7 x6 x5 x4 x3 x2 x1 x0 x10..x0 = absolute x value (horizontal) byte 3: bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - . . . . . . . . + n4 vf w1 w0 . . . b2 + + n4 = set if more than 3 fingers (only in 3 fingers mode) + vf = a kind of flag ? (only on EF123, 0 when finger is over one + of the buttons, 1 otherwise) + w3..w0 = width of the finger touch (not EF113) + b2 (on EF113 only, 0 otherwise), b2.R.L indicates one button pressed: + 0 = none + 1 = Left + 2 = Right + 3 = Middle (Left and Right) + 4 = Forward + 5 = Back + 6 = Another one + 7 = Another one byte 4: bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - . . . . . . y9 y8 + p3 p1 p2 p0 . . y9 y8 + + p7..p0 = pressure (not EF113) byte 5: @@ -363,6 +435,11 @@ byte 5: 4.2.2 Two finger touch ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Note that the two pairs of coordinates are not exactly the coordinates of the +two fingers, but only the pair of the lower-left and upper-right coordinates. +So the actual fingers might be situated on the other diagonal of the square +defined by these two points. + byte 0: bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 @@ -376,14 +453,14 @@ byte 1: bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ax7 ax6 ax5 ax4 ax3 ax2 ax1 ax0 - ax8..ax0 = first finger absolute x value + ax8..ax0 = lower-left finger absolute x value byte 2: bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ay7 ay6 ay5 ay4 ay3 ay2 ay1 ay0 - ay8..ay0 = first finger absolute y value + ay8..ay0 = lower-left finger absolute y value byte 3: @@ -395,11 +472,11 @@ byte 4: bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 bx7 bx6 bx5 bx4 bx3 bx2 bx1 bx0 - bx8..bx0 = second finger absolute x value + bx8..bx0 = upper-right finger absolute x value byte 5: bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 by7 by8 by5 by4 by3 by2 by1 by0 - by8..by0 = second finger absolute y value + by8..by0 = upper-right finger absolute y value diff --git a/Documentation/input/event-codes.txt b/Documentation/input/event-codes.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..23fcb05175b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/input/event-codes.txt @@ -0,0 +1,262 @@ +The input protocol uses a map of types and codes to express input device values +to userspace. This document describes the types and codes and how and when they +may be used. + +A single hardware event generates multiple input events. Each input event +contains the new value of a single data item. A special event type, EV_SYN, is +used to separate input events into packets of input data changes occurring at +the same moment in time. In the following, the term "event" refers to a single +input event encompassing a type, code, and value. + +The input protocol is a stateful protocol. Events are emitted only when values +of event codes have changed. However, the state is maintained within the Linux +input subsystem; drivers do not need to maintain the state and may attempt to +emit unchanged values without harm. Userspace may obtain the current state of +event code values using the EVIOCG* ioctls defined in linux/input.h. The event +reports supported by a device are also provided by sysfs in +class/input/event*/device/capabilities/, and the properties of a device are +provided in class/input/event*/device/properties. + +Types: +========== +Types are groupings of codes under a logical input construct. Each type has a +set of applicable codes to be used in generating events. See the Codes section +for details on valid codes for each type. + +* EV_SYN: + - Used as markers to separate events. Events may be separated in time or in + space, such as with the multitouch protocol. + +* EV_KEY: + - Used to describe state changes of keyboards, buttons, or other key-like + devices. + +* EV_REL: + - Used to describe relative axis value changes, e.g. moving the mouse 5 units + to the left. + +* EV_ABS: + - Used to describe absolute axis value changes, e.g. describing the + coordinates of a touch on a touchscreen. + +* EV_MSC: + - Used to describe miscellaneous input data that do not fit into other types. + +* EV_SW: + - Used to describe binary state input switches. + +* EV_LED: + - Used to turn LEDs on devices on and off. + +* EV_SND: + - Used to output sound to devices. + +* EV_REP: + - Used for autorepeating devices. + +* EV_FF: + - Used to send force feedback commands to an input device. + +* EV_PWR: + - A special type for power button and switch input. + +* EV_FF_STATUS: + - Used to receive force feedback device status. + +Codes: +========== +Codes define the precise type of event. + +EV_SYN: +---------- +EV_SYN event values are undefined. Their usage is defined only by when they are +sent in the evdev event stream. + +* SYN_REPORT: + - Used to synchronize and separate events into packets of input data changes + occurring at the same moment in time. For example, motion of a mouse may set + the REL_X and REL_Y values for one motion, then emit a SYN_REPORT. The next + motion will emit more REL_X and REL_Y values and send another SYN_REPORT. + +* SYN_CONFIG: + - TBD + +* SYN_MT_REPORT: + - Used to synchronize and separate touch events. See the + multi-touch-protocol.txt document for more information. + +* SYN_DROPPED: + - Used to indicate buffer overrun in the evdev client's event queue. + Client should ignore all events up to and including next SYN_REPORT + event and query the device (using EVIOCG* ioctls) to obtain its + current state. + +EV_KEY: +---------- +EV_KEY events take the form KEY_<name> or BTN_<name>. For example, KEY_A is used +to represent the 'A' key on a keyboard. When a key is depressed, an event with +the key's code is emitted with value 1. When the key is released, an event is +emitted with value 0. Some hardware send events when a key is repeated. These +events have a value of 2. In general, KEY_<name> is used for keyboard keys, and +BTN_<name> is used for other types of momentary switch events. + +A few EV_KEY codes have special meanings: + +* BTN_TOOL_<name>: + - These codes are used in conjunction with input trackpads, tablets, and + touchscreens. These devices may be used with fingers, pens, or other tools. + When an event occurs and a tool is used, the corresponding BTN_TOOL_<name> + code should be set to a value of 1. When the tool is no longer interacting + with the input device, the BTN_TOOL_<name> code should be reset to 0. All + trackpads, tablets, and touchscreens should use at least one BTN_TOOL_<name> + code when events are generated. + +* BTN_TOUCH: + BTN_TOUCH is used for touch contact. While an input tool is determined to be + within meaningful physical contact, the value of this property must be set + to 1. Meaningful physical contact may mean any contact, or it may mean + contact conditioned by an implementation defined property. For example, a + touchpad may set the value to 1 only when the touch pressure rises above a + certain value. BTN_TOUCH may be combined with BTN_TOOL_<name> codes. For + example, a pen tablet may set BTN_TOOL_PEN to 1 and BTN_TOUCH to 0 while the + pen is hovering over but not touching the tablet surface. + +Note: For appropriate function of the legacy mousedev emulation driver, +BTN_TOUCH must be the first evdev code emitted in a synchronization frame. + +Note: Historically a touch device with BTN_TOOL_FINGER and BTN_TOUCH was +interpreted as a touchpad by userspace, while a similar device without +BTN_TOOL_FINGER was interpreted as a touchscreen. For backwards compatibility +with current userspace it is recommended to follow this distinction. In the +future, this distinction will be deprecated and the device properties ioctl +EVIOCGPROP, defined in linux/input.h, will be used to convey the device type. + +* BTN_TOOL_FINGER, BTN_TOOL_DOUBLETAP, BTN_TOOL_TRIPLETAP, BTN_TOOL_QUADTAP: + - These codes denote one, two, three, and four finger interaction on a + trackpad or touchscreen. For example, if the user uses two fingers and moves + them on the touchpad in an effort to scroll content on screen, + BTN_TOOL_DOUBLETAP should be set to value 1 for the duration of the motion. + Note that all BTN_TOOL_<name> codes and the BTN_TOUCH code are orthogonal in + purpose. A trackpad event generated by finger touches should generate events + for one code from each group. At most only one of these BTN_TOOL_<name> + codes should have a value of 1 during any synchronization frame. + +Note: Historically some drivers emitted multiple of the finger count codes with +a value of 1 in the same synchronization frame. This usage is deprecated. + +Note: In multitouch drivers, the input_mt_report_finger_count() function should +be used to emit these codes. Please see multi-touch-protocol.txt for details. + +EV_REL: +---------- +EV_REL events describe relative changes in a property. For example, a mouse may +move to the left by a certain number of units, but its absolute position in +space is unknown. If the absolute position is known, EV_ABS codes should be used +instead of EV_REL codes. + +A few EV_REL codes have special meanings: + +* REL_WHEEL, REL_HWHEEL: + - These codes are used for vertical and horizontal scroll wheels, + respectively. + +EV_ABS: +---------- +EV_ABS events describe absolute changes in a property. For example, a touchpad +may emit coordinates for a touch location. + +A few EV_ABS codes have special meanings: + +* ABS_DISTANCE: + - Used to describe the distance of a tool from an interaction surface. This + event should only be emitted while the tool is hovering, meaning in close + proximity of the device and while the value of the BTN_TOUCH code is 0. If + the input device may be used freely in three dimensions, consider ABS_Z + instead. + +* ABS_MT_<name>: + - Used to describe multitouch input events. Please see + multi-touch-protocol.txt for details. + +EV_SW: +---------- +EV_SW events describe stateful binary switches. For example, the SW_LID code is +used to denote when a laptop lid is closed. + +Upon binding to a device or resuming from suspend, a driver must report +the current switch state. This ensures that the device, kernel, and userspace +state is in sync. + +Upon resume, if the switch state is the same as before suspend, then the input +subsystem will filter out the duplicate switch state reports. The driver does +not need to keep the state of the switch at any time. + +EV_MSC: +---------- +EV_MSC events are used for input and output events that do not fall under other +categories. + +EV_LED: +---------- +EV_LED events are used for input and output to set and query the state of +various LEDs on devices. + +EV_REP: +---------- +EV_REP events are used for specifying autorepeating events. + +EV_SND: +---------- +EV_SND events are used for sending sound commands to simple sound output +devices. + +EV_FF: +---------- +EV_FF events are used to initialize a force feedback capable device and to cause +such device to feedback. + +EV_PWR: +---------- +EV_PWR events are a special type of event used specifically for power +mangement. Its usage is not well defined. To be addressed later. + +Guidelines: +========== +The guidelines below ensure proper single-touch and multi-finger functionality. +For multi-touch functionality, see the multi-touch-protocol.txt document for +more information. + +Mice: +---------- +REL_{X,Y} must be reported when the mouse moves. BTN_LEFT must be used to report +the primary button press. BTN_{MIDDLE,RIGHT,4,5,etc.} should be used to report +further buttons of the device. REL_WHEEL and REL_HWHEEL should be used to report +scroll wheel events where available. + +Touchscreens: +---------- +ABS_{X,Y} must be reported with the location of the touch. BTN_TOUCH must be +used to report when a touch is active on the screen. +BTN_{MOUSE,LEFT,MIDDLE,RIGHT} must not be reported as the result of touch +contact. BTN_TOOL_<name> events should be reported where possible. + +Trackpads: +---------- +Legacy trackpads that only provide relative position information must report +events like mice described above. + +Trackpads that provide absolute touch position must report ABS_{X,Y} for the +location of the touch. BTN_TOUCH should be used to report when a touch is active +on the trackpad. Where multi-finger support is available, BTN_TOOL_<name> should +be used to report the number of touches active on the trackpad. + +Tablets: +---------- +BTN_TOOL_<name> events must be reported when a stylus or other tool is active on +the tablet. ABS_{X,Y} must be reported with the location of the tool. BTN_TOUCH +should be used to report when the tool is in contact with the tablet. +BTN_{STYLUS,STYLUS2} should be used to report buttons on the tool itself. Any +button may be used for buttons on the tablet except BTN_{MOUSE,LEFT}. +BTN_{0,1,2,etc} are good generic codes for unlabeled buttons. Do not use +meaningful buttons, like BTN_FORWARD, unless the button is labeled for that +purpose on the device. diff --git a/Documentation/input/joystick-parport.txt b/Documentation/input/joystick-parport.txt index 1c856f32ff2..56870c70a79 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/joystick-parport.txt +++ b/Documentation/input/joystick-parport.txt @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ if you want to use gamecon.c. Also, the connection is a bit more complex. You'll need a bunch of diodes, and one pullup resistor. First, you connect the Directions and the button -the same as for db9, however with the diodes inbetween. +the same as for db9, however with the diodes between. Diodes (pin 2) -----|<|----> Up diff --git a/Documentation/input/rotary-encoder.txt b/Documentation/input/rotary-encoder.txt index 8b4129de1d2..92e68bce13a 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/rotary-encoder.txt +++ b/Documentation/input/rotary-encoder.txt @@ -9,6 +9,9 @@ peripherals with two wires. The outputs are phase-shifted by 90 degrees and by triggering on falling and rising edges, the turn direction can be determined. +Some encoders have both outputs low in stable states, whereas others also have +a stable state with both outputs high (half-period mode). + The phase diagram of these two outputs look like this: _____ _____ _____ @@ -26,6 +29,8 @@ The phase diagram of these two outputs look like this: |<-------->| one step + |<-->| + one step (half-period mode) For more information, please see http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rotary_encoder @@ -34,6 +39,13 @@ For more information, please see 1. Events / state machine ------------------------- +In half-period mode, state a) and c) above are used to determine the +rotational direction based on the last stable state. Events are reported in +states b) and d) given that the new stable state is different from the last +(i.e. the rotation was not reversed half-way). + +Otherwise, the following apply: + a) Rising edge on channel A, channel B in low state This state is used to recognize a clockwise turn @@ -46,7 +58,7 @@ c) Falling edge on channel A, channel B in high state d) Falling edge on channel B, channel A in low state Parking position. If the encoder enters this state, a full transition - should have happend, unless it flipped back on half the way. The + should have happened, unless it flipped back on half the way. The 'armed' state tells us about that. 2. Platform requirements @@ -96,6 +108,7 @@ static struct rotary_encoder_platform_data my_rotary_encoder_info = { .gpio_b = GPIO_ROTARY_B, .inverted_a = 0, .inverted_b = 0, + .half_period = false, }; static struct platform_device rotary_encoder_device = { diff --git a/Documentation/input/walkera0701.txt b/Documentation/input/walkera0701.txt index 8f4289efc5c..561385d3848 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/walkera0701.txt +++ b/Documentation/input/walkera0701.txt @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ pulse length: 24 bin+oct values + 1 bin value = 24*4+1 bits = 97 bits -(Warning, pulses on ACK ar inverted by transistor, irq is rised up on sync +(Warning, pulses on ACK are inverted by transistor, irq is raised up on sync to bin change or octal value to bin change). Binary data representations: diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt index a0a5d82b6b0..3a46e360496 100644 --- a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt +++ b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt @@ -166,7 +166,6 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments 'T' all arch/x86/include/asm/ioctls.h conflict! 'T' C0-DF linux/if_tun.h conflict! 'U' all sound/asound.h conflict! -'U' 00-0F drivers/media/video/uvc/uvcvideo.h conflict! 'U' 00-CF linux/uinput.h conflict! 'U' 00-EF linux/usbdevice_fs.h 'U' C0-CF drivers/bluetooth/hci_uart.h @@ -259,6 +258,7 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments 't' 80-8F linux/isdn_ppp.h 't' 90 linux/toshiba.h 'u' 00-1F linux/smb_fs.h gone +'u' 20-3F linux/uvcvideo.h USB video class host driver 'v' 00-1F linux/ext2_fs.h conflict! 'v' 00-1F linux/fs.h conflict! 'v' 00-0F linux/sonypi.h conflict! @@ -304,6 +304,7 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments 0xB0 all RATIO devices in development: <mailto:vgo@ratio.de> 0xB1 00-1F PPPoX <mailto:mostrows@styx.uwaterloo.ca> +0xB3 00 linux/mmc/ioctl.h 0xC0 00-0F linux/usb/iowarrior.h 0xCB 00-1F CBM serial IEC bus in development: <mailto:michael.klein@puffin.lb.shuttle.de> diff --git a/Documentation/irqflags-tracing.txt b/Documentation/irqflags-tracing.txt index 6a444877ee0..67aa71e7303 100644 --- a/Documentation/irqflags-tracing.txt +++ b/Documentation/irqflags-tracing.txt @@ -53,5 +53,5 @@ implementation in an architecture: lockdep will detect that and will turn itself off. I.e. the lock validator will still be reliable. There should be no crashes due to irq-tracing bugs. (except if the assembly changes break other code by modifying conditions or registers that -shouldnt be) +shouldn't be) diff --git a/Documentation/isdn/INTERFACE.CAPI b/Documentation/isdn/INTERFACE.CAPI index 309eb5ed942..1688b5a1fd7 100644 --- a/Documentation/isdn/INTERFACE.CAPI +++ b/Documentation/isdn/INTERFACE.CAPI @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Functions capi_cmsg2message() and capi_message2cmsg() are provided to convert messages between their transport encoding described in the CAPI 2.0 standard and their _cmsg structure representation. Note that capi_cmsg2message() does not know or check the size of its destination buffer. The caller must make -sure it is big enough to accomodate the resulting CAPI message. +sure it is big enough to accommodate the resulting CAPI message. 5. Lower Layer Interface Functions diff --git a/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO b/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO index b63301a0381..050d37fe6d4 100644 --- a/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO +++ b/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO @@ -11,14 +11,14 @@ for non English (read: Japanese) speakers and is not intended as a fork. So if you have any comments or updates for this file, please try to update the original English file first. -Last Updated: 2008/10/24 +Last Updated: 2011/03/31 ================================== これは、 -linux-2.6.28/Documentation/HOWTO +linux-2.6.38/Documentation/HOWTO の和訳です。 翻訳団体： JF プロジェクト < http://www.linux.or.jp/JF/ > -翻訳日： 2008/10/24 +翻訳日： 2011/3/28 翻訳者： Tsugikazu Shibata <tshibata at ab dot jp dot nec dot com> 校正者： 松倉さん <nbh--mats at nifty dot com> 小林 雅典さん (Masanori Kobayasi) <zap03216 at nifty dot ne dot jp> @@ -256,8 +256,8 @@ Linux カーネルの開発プロセスは現在幾つかの異なるメイン - メインの 2.6.x カーネルツリー - 2.6.x.y -stable カーネルツリー - 2.6.x -git カーネルパッチ - - 2.6.x -mm カーネルパッチ - サブシステム毎のカーネルツリーとパッチ + - 統合テストのための 2.6.x -next カーネルツリー 2.6.x カーネルツリー ----------------- @@ -268,9 +268,9 @@ Linux カーネルの開発プロセスは現在幾つかの異なるメイン - 新しいカーネルがリリースされた直後に、2週間の特別期間が設けられ、 この期間中に、メンテナ達は Linus に大きな差分を送ることができます。 - このような差分は通常 -mm カーネルに数週間含まれてきたパッチです。 + このような差分は通常 -next カーネルに数週間含まれてきたパッチです。 大きな変更は git(カーネルのソース管理ツール、詳細は - http://git.or.cz/ 参照) を使って送るのが好ましいやり方ですが、パッ + http://git-scm.com/ 参照) を使って送るのが好ましいやり方ですが、パッ チファイルの形式のまま送るのでも十分です。 - 2週間後、-rc1 カーネルがリリースされ、この後にはカーネル全体の安定 @@ -333,86 +333,44 @@ git リポジトリで管理されているLinus のカーネルツリーの毎 れは -rc カーネルと比べて、パッチが大丈夫かどうかも確認しないで自動的 に生成されるので、より実験的です。 -2.6.x -mm カーネルパッチ ------------------------- - -Andrew Morton によってリリースされる実験的なカーネルパッチ群です。 -Andrew は個別のサブシステムカーネルツリーとパッチを全て集めてきて -linux-kernel メーリングリストで収集された多数のパッチと同時に一つにま -とめます。 -このツリーは新機能とパッチが検証される場となります。ある期間の間パッチ -が -mm に入って価値を証明されたら、Andrew やサブシステムメンテナが、 -メインラインへ入れるように Linus にプッシュします。 - -メインカーネルツリーに含めるために Linus に送る前に、すべての新しいパッ -チが -mm ツリーでテストされることが強く推奨されています。マージウィン -ドウが開く前に -mm ツリーに現れなかったパッチはメインラインにマージさ -れることは困難になります。 - -これらのカーネルは安定して動作すべきシステムとして使うのには適切ではあ -りませんし、カーネルブランチの中でももっとも動作にリスクが高いものです。 - -もしあなたが、カーネル開発プロセスの支援をしたいと思っているのであれば、 -どうぞこれらのカーネルリリースをテストに使ってみて、そしてもし問題があ -れば、またもし全てが正しく動作したとしても、linux-kernel メーリングリ -ストにフィードバックを提供してください。 - -すべての他の実験的パッチに加えて、これらのカーネルは通常リリース時点で -メインラインの -git カーネルに含まれる全ての変更も含んでいます。 - --mm カーネルは決まったスケジュールではリリースされません、しかし通常幾 -つかの -mm カーネル (1 から 3 が普通）が各-rc カーネルの間にリリースさ -れます。 - サブシステム毎のカーネルツリーとパッチ ------------------------------------------- -カーネルの様々な領域で何が起きているかを見られるようにするため、多くの -カーネルサブシステム開発者は彼らの開発ツリーを公開しています。これらの -ツリーは説明したように -mm カーネルリリースに入れ込まれます。 - -以下はさまざまなカーネルツリーの中のいくつかのリスト- - - git ツリー- - - Kbuild の開発ツリー、Sam Ravnborg <sam@ravnborg.org> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/sam/kbuild.git - - - ACPI の開発ツリー、 Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/lenb/linux-acpi-2.6.git - - - Block の開発ツリー、Jens Axboe <axboe@suse.de> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/axboe/linux-2.6-block.git - - - DRM の開発ツリー、Dave Airlie <airlied@linux.ie> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/airlied/drm-2.6.git - - - ia64 の開発ツリー、Tony Luck <tony.luck@intel.com> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/aegl/linux-2.6.git - - - infiniband, Roland Dreier <rolandd@cisco.com> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/roland/infiniband.git - - - libata, Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jgarzik/libata-dev.git - - - ネットワークドライバ, Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jgarzik/netdev-2.6.git - - - pcmcia, Dominik Brodowski <linux@dominikbrodowski.net> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/brodo/pcmcia-2.6.git - - - SCSI, James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@hansenpartnership.com> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jejb/scsi-misc-2.6.git - - - x86, Ingo Molnar <mingo@elte.hu> - git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/x86/linux-2.6-x86.git - - quilt ツリー- - - USB, ドライバコアと I2C, Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de> - kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/gregkh/gregkh-2.6/ +それぞれのカーネルサブシステムのメンテナ達は --- そして多くのカーネル +サブシステムの開発者達も --- 各自の最新の開発状況をソースリポジトリに +公開しています。そのため、自分とは異なる領域のカーネルで何が起きている +かを他の人が見られるようになっています。開発が早く進んでいる領域では、 +開発者は自身の投稿がどのサブシステムカーネルツリーを元にしているか質問 +されるので、その投稿とすでに進行中の他の作業との衝突が避けられます。 + +大部分のこれらのリポジトリは git ツリーです。しかしその他の SCM や +quilt シリーズとして公開されているパッチキューも使われています。これら +のサブシステムリポジトリのアドレスは MAINTAINERS ファイルにリストされ +ています。これらの多くは http://git.kernel.org/ で参照することができま +す。 - その他のカーネルツリーは http://git.kernel.org/ と MAINTAINERS ファ - イルに一覧表があります。 +提案されたパッチがこのようなサブシステムツリーにコミットされる前に、メー +リングリストで事前にレビューにかけられます（以下の対応するセクションを +参照）。いくつかのカーネルサブシステムでは、このレビューは patchwork +というツールによって追跡されます。Patchwork は web インターフェイスに +よってパッチ投稿の表示、パッチへのコメント付けや改訂などができ、そして +メンテナはパッチに対して、レビュー中、受付済み、拒否というようなマーク +をつけることができます。大部分のこれらの patchwork のサイトは +http://patchwork.kernel.org/ でリストされています。 + +統合テストのための 2.6.x -next カーネルツリー +--------------------------------------------- + +サブシステムツリーの更新内容がメインラインの 2.6.x ツリーにマージされ +る前に、それらは統合テストされる必要があります。この目的のため、実質的 +に全サブシステムツリーからほぼ毎日プルされてできる特別なテスト用のリ +ポジトリが存在します- + http://git.kernel.org/?p=linux/kernel/git/sfr/linux-next.git + http://linux.f-seidel.de/linux-next/pmwiki/ + +このやり方によって、-next カーネルは次のマージ機会でどんなものがメイン +ラインカーネルにマージされるか、おおまかなの展望を提供します。-next +カーネルの実行テストを行う冒険好きなテスターは大いに歓迎されます バグレポート ------------- @@ -673,10 +631,9 @@ Linux カーネルコミュニティは、一度に大量のコードの塊を じところからスタートしたのですから。 Paolo Ciarrocchi に感謝、彼は彼の書いた "Development Process" -(http://linux.tar.bz/articles/2.6-development_process)セクショ -ンをこのテキストの原型にすることを許可してくれました。 -Rundy Dunlap と Gerrit Huizenga はメーリングリストでやるべきこととやっ -てはいけないことのリストを提供してくれました。 +(http://lwn.net/Articles/94386/) セクションをこのテキストの原型にする +ことを許可してくれました。Rundy Dunlap と Gerrit Huizenga はメーリング +リストでやるべきこととやってはいけないことのリストを提供してくれました。 以下の人々のレビュー、コメント、貢献に感謝。 Pat Mochel, Hanna Linder, Randy Dunlap, Kay Sievers, Vojtech Pavlik, Jan Kara, Josh Boyer, Kees Cook, Andrew Morton, Andi diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt index 646e2c114ff..68e32bb6bd8 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt @@ -26,11 +26,11 @@ Additional options to the assembler (for built-in and modules). AFLAGS_MODULE -------------------------------------------------- -Addtional module specific options to use for $(AS). +Additional module specific options to use for $(AS). AFLAGS_KERNEL -------------------------------------------------- -Addtional options for $(AS) when used for assembler +Additional options for $(AS) when used for assembler code for code that is compiled as built-in. KCFLAGS @@ -39,12 +39,12 @@ Additional options to the C compiler (for built-in and modules). CFLAGS_KERNEL -------------------------------------------------- -Addtional options for $(CC) when used to compile +Additional options for $(CC) when used to compile code that is compiled as built-in. CFLAGS_MODULE -------------------------------------------------- -Addtional module specific options to use for $(CC). +Additional module specific options to use for $(CC). LDFLAGS_MODULE -------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt index b507d61fd41..44e2649fbb2 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt @@ -113,6 +113,13 @@ applicable everywhere (see syntax). That will limit the usefulness but on the other hand avoid the illegal configurations all over. +- limiting menu display: "visible if" <expr> + This attribute is only applicable to menu blocks, if the condition is + false, the menu block is not displayed to the user (the symbols + contained there can still be selected by other symbols, though). It is + similar to a conditional "prompt" attribude for individual menu + entries. Default value of "visible" is true. + - numerical ranges: "range" <symbol> <symbol> ["if" <expr>] This allows to limit the range of possible input values for int and hex symbols. The user can only input a value which is larger than @@ -303,7 +310,8 @@ menu: "endmenu" This defines a menu block, see "Menu structure" above for more -information. The only possible options are dependencies. +information. The only possible options are dependencies and "visible" +attributes. if: @@ -381,3 +389,25 @@ config FOO limits FOO to module (=m) or disabled (=n). +Kconfig symbol existence +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The following two methods produce the same kconfig symbol dependencies +but differ greatly in kconfig symbol existence (production) in the +generated config file. + +case 1: + +config FOO + tristate "about foo" + depends on BAR + +vs. case 2: + +if BAR +config FOO + tristate "about foo" +endif + +In case 1, the symbol FOO will always exist in the config file (given +no other dependencies). In case 2, the symbol FOO will only exist in +the config file if BAR is enabled. diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt index cca46b1a0f6..c313d71324b 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt @@ -48,11 +48,6 @@ KCONFIG_OVERWRITECONFIG If you set KCONFIG_OVERWRITECONFIG in the environment, Kconfig will not break symlinks when .config is a symlink to somewhere else. -KCONFIG_NOTIMESTAMP --------------------------------------------------- -If this environment variable exists and is non-null, the timestamp line -in generated .config files is omitted. - ______________________________________________________________________ Environment variables for '{allyes/allmod/allno/rand}config' diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index c357a31411c..5438a2d7907 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. acpi_sleep= [HW,ACPI] Sleep options Format: { s3_bios, s3_mode, s3_beep, s4_nohwsig, - old_ordering, s4_nonvs, sci_force_enable } + old_ordering, nonvs, sci_force_enable } See Documentation/power/video.txt for information on s3_bios and s3_mode. s3_beep is for debugging; it makes the PC's speaker beep @@ -699,7 +699,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. ekgdboc= [X86,KGDB] Allow early kernel console debugging ekgdboc=kbd - This is desgined to be used in conjunction with + This is designed to be used in conjunction with the boot argument: earlyprintk=vga edd= [EDD] @@ -1664,6 +1664,10 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. noexec=on: enable non-executable mappings (default) noexec=off: disable non-executable mappings + nosmep [X86] + Disable SMEP (Supervisor Mode Execution Protection) + even if it is supported by processor. + noexec32 [X86-64] This affects only 32-bit executables. noexec32=on: enable non-executable mappings (default) @@ -1773,9 +1777,6 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. nosoftlockup [KNL] Disable the soft-lockup detector. - noswapaccount [KNL] Disable accounting of swap in memory resource - controller. (See Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt) - nosync [HW,M68K] Disables sync negotiation for all devices. notsc [BUGS=X86-32] Disable Time Stamp Counter @@ -1832,15 +1833,17 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. perfmon on Intel CPUs instead of the CPU specific event set. - oops=panic Always panic on oopses. Default is to just kill the process, - but there is a small probability of deadlocking the machine. + oops=panic Always panic on oopses. Default is to just kill the + process, but there is a small probability of + deadlocking the machine. This will also cause panics on machine check exceptions. Useful together with panic=30 to trigger a reboot. OSS [HW,OSS] See Documentation/sound/oss/oss-parameters.txt - panic= [KNL] Kernel behaviour on panic + panic= [KNL] Kernel behaviour on panic: delay <timeout> + seconds before rebooting Format: <timeout> parkbd.port= [HW] Parallel port number the keyboard adapter is @@ -2343,6 +2346,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. softlockup_panic= [KNL] Should the soft-lockup detector generate panics. + Format: <integer> sonypi.*= [HW] Sony Programmable I/O Control Device driver See Documentation/sonypi.txt @@ -2475,8 +2479,8 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. topology= [S390] Format: {off | on} Specify if the kernel should make use of the cpu - topology informations if the hardware supports these. - The scheduler will make use of these informations and + topology information if the hardware supports this. + The scheduler will make use of this information and e.g. base its process migration decisions on it. Default is on. @@ -2529,8 +2533,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. reported either. unknown_nmi_panic - [X86] - Set unknown_nmi_panic=1 early on boot. + [X86] Cause panic on unknown NMI. usbcore.autosuspend= [USB] The autosuspend time delay (in seconds) used @@ -2579,6 +2582,10 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. bytes of sense data); c = FIX_CAPACITY (decrease the reported device capacity by one sector); + d = NO_READ_DISC_INFO (don't use + READ_DISC_INFO command); + e = NO_READ_CAPACITY_16 (don't use + READ_CAPACITY_16 command); h = CAPACITY_HEURISTICS (decrease the reported device capacity by one sector if the number is odd); diff --git a/Documentation/kmemleak.txt b/Documentation/kmemleak.txt index 34f6638aa5a..090e6ee0453 100644 --- a/Documentation/kmemleak.txt +++ b/Documentation/kmemleak.txt @@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ with the difference that the orphan objects are not freed but only reported via /sys/kernel/debug/kmemleak. A similar method is used by the Valgrind tool (memcheck --leak-check) to detect the memory leaks in user-space applications. +Kmemleak is supported on x86, arm, powerpc, sparc, sh, microblaze and tile. Usage ----- @@ -178,5 +179,4 @@ block doesn't need to be freed (some cases in the init_call functions), the pointer is calculated by other methods than the usual container_of macro or the pointer is stored in a location not scanned by kmemleak. -Page allocations and ioremap are not tracked. Only the ARM and x86 -architectures are currently supported. +Page allocations and ioremap are not tracked. diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/acer-wmi.txt b/Documentation/laptops/acer-wmi.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 4beafa663dd..00000000000 --- a/Documentation/laptops/acer-wmi.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,184 +0,0 @@ -Acer Laptop WMI Extras Driver -http://code.google.com/p/aceracpi -Version 0.3 -4th April 2009 - -Copyright 2007-2009 Carlos Corbacho <carlos@strangeworlds.co.uk> - -acer-wmi is a driver to allow you to control various parts of your Acer laptop -hardware under Linux which are exposed via ACPI-WMI. - -This driver completely replaces the old out-of-tree acer_acpi, which I am -currently maintaining for bug fixes only on pre-2.6.25 kernels. All development -work is now focused solely on acer-wmi. - -Disclaimer -********** - -Acer and Wistron have provided nothing towards the development acer_acpi or -acer-wmi. All information we have has been through the efforts of the developers -and the users to discover as much as possible about the hardware. - -As such, I do warn that this could break your hardware - this is extremely -unlikely of course, but please bear this in mind. - -Background -********** - -acer-wmi is derived from acer_acpi, originally developed by Mark -Smith in 2005, then taken over by Carlos Corbacho in 2007, in order to activate -the wireless LAN card under a 64-bit version of Linux, as acerhk[1] (the -previous solution to the problem) relied on making 32 bit BIOS calls which are -not possible in kernel space from a 64 bit OS. - -[1] acerhk: http://www.cakey.de/acerhk/ - -Supported Hardware -****************** - -NOTE: The Acer Aspire One is not supported hardware. It cannot work with -acer-wmi until Acer fix their ACPI-WMI implementation on them, so has been -blacklisted until that happens. - -Please see the website for the current list of known working hardware: - -http://code.google.com/p/aceracpi/wiki/SupportedHardware - -If your laptop is not listed, or listed as unknown, and works with acer-wmi, -please contact me with a copy of the DSDT. - -If your Acer laptop doesn't work with acer-wmi, I would also like to see the -DSDT. - -To send me the DSDT, as root/sudo: - -cat /sys/firmware/acpi/tables/DSDT > dsdt - -And send me the resulting 'dsdt' file. - -Usage -***** - -On Acer laptops, acer-wmi should already be autoloaded based on DMI matching. -For non-Acer laptops, until WMI based autoloading support is added, you will -need to manually load acer-wmi. - -acer-wmi creates /sys/devices/platform/acer-wmi, and fills it with various -files whose usage is detailed below, which enables you to control some of the -following (varies between models): - -* the wireless LAN card radio -* inbuilt Bluetooth adapter -* inbuilt 3G card -* mail LED of your laptop -* brightness of the LCD panel - -Wireless -******** - -With regards to wireless, all acer-wmi does is enable the radio on the card. It -is not responsible for the wireless LED - once the radio is enabled, this is -down to the wireless driver for your card. So the behaviour of the wireless LED, -once you enable the radio, will depend on your hardware and driver combination. - -e.g. With the BCM4318 on the Acer Aspire 5020 series: - -ndiswrapper: Light blinks on when transmitting -b43: Solid light, blinks off when transmitting - -Wireless radio control is unconditionally enabled - all Acer laptops that support -acer-wmi come with built-in wireless. However, should you feel so inclined to -ever wish to remove the card, or swap it out at some point, please get in touch -with me, as we may well be able to gain some data on wireless card detection. - -The wireless radio is exposed through rfkill. - -Bluetooth -********* - -For bluetooth, this is an internal USB dongle, so once enabled, you will get -a USB device connection event, and a new USB device appears. When you disable -bluetooth, you get the reverse - a USB device disconnect event, followed by the -device disappearing again. - -Bluetooth is autodetected by acer-wmi, so if you do not have a bluetooth module -installed in your laptop, this file won't exist (please be aware that it is -quite common for Acer not to fit bluetooth to their laptops - so just because -you have a bluetooth button on the laptop, doesn't mean that bluetooth is -installed). - -For the adventurously minded - if you want to buy an internal bluetooth -module off the internet that is compatible with your laptop and fit it, then -it will work just fine with acer-wmi. - -Bluetooth is exposed through rfkill. - -3G -** - -3G is currently not autodetected, so the 'threeg' file is always created under -sysfs. So far, no-one in possession of an Acer laptop with 3G built-in appears to -have tried Linux, or reported back, so we don't have any information on this. - -If you have an Acer laptop that does have a 3G card in, please contact me so we -can properly detect these, and find out a bit more about them. - -To read the status of the 3G card (0=off, 1=on): -cat /sys/devices/platform/acer-wmi/threeg - -To enable the 3G card: -echo 1 > /sys/devices/platform/acer-wmi/threeg - -To disable the 3G card: -echo 0 > /sys/devices/platform/acer-wmi/threeg - -To set the state of the 3G card when loading acer-wmi, pass: -threeg=X (where X is 0 or 1) - -Mail LED -******** - -This can be found in most older Acer laptops supported by acer-wmi, and many -newer ones - it is built into the 'mail' button, and blinks when active. - -On newer (WMID) laptops though, we have no way of detecting the mail LED. If -your laptop identifies itself in dmesg as a WMID model, then please try loading -acer_acpi with: - -force_series=2490 - -This will use a known alternative method of reading/ writing the mail LED. If -it works, please report back to me with the DMI data from your laptop so this -can be added to acer-wmi. - -The LED is exposed through the LED subsystem, and can be found in: - -/sys/devices/platform/acer-wmi/leds/acer-wmi::mail/ - -The mail LED is autodetected, so if you don't have one, the LED device won't -be registered. - -Backlight -********* - -The backlight brightness control is available on all acer-wmi supported -hardware. The maximum brightness level is usually 15, but on some newer laptops -it's 10 (this is again autodetected). - -The backlight is exposed through the backlight subsystem, and can be found in: - -/sys/devices/platform/acer-wmi/backlight/acer-wmi/ - -Credits -******* - -Olaf Tauber, who did the real hard work when he developed acerhk -http://www.cakey.de/acerhk/ -All the authors of laptop ACPI modules in the kernel, whose work -was an inspiration in the early days of acer_acpi -Mathieu Segaud, who solved the problem with having to modprobe the driver -twice in acer_acpi 0.2. -Jim Ramsay, who added support for the WMID interface -Mark Smith, who started the original acer_acpi - -And the many people who have used both acer_acpi and acer-wmi. diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.txt b/Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.txt index c1c5be84e4b..803e51f6768 100644 --- a/Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.txt +++ b/Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.txt @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Usage Hotkeys are also reported as input keys (like keyboards) you can check which key are supported using "xev" under X11. - You can get informations on the version of your DSDT table by reading the + You can get information on the version of your DSDT table by reading the /sys/devices/platform/asus-laptop/infos entry. If you have a question or a bug report to do, please include the output of this entry. @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ LED display ----------- Some models like the W1N have a LED display that can be used to display - several informations. + several items of information. LED display works for the following models: W1000N diff --git a/Documentation/leds/00-INDEX b/Documentation/leds/00-INDEX new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..29f481df32c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/leds/00-INDEX @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +leds-class.txt + - documents LED handling under Linux. +leds-lp3944.txt + - notes on how to use the leds-lp3944 driver. +leds-lp5521.txt + - notes on how to use the leds-lp5521 driver. +leds-lp5523.txt + - notes on how to use the leds-lp5523 driver. diff --git a/Documentation/leds-class.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-class.txt index 58b266bd184..4996586e27e 100644 --- a/Documentation/leds-class.txt +++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-class.txt @@ -95,4 +95,3 @@ There are a number of cases where a trigger might only be mappable to a particular LED (ACPI?). The addition of triggers provided by the LED driver should cover this option and be possible to add without breaking the current interface. - diff --git a/Documentation/leds-lp3944.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp3944.txt index c6eda18b15e..c6eda18b15e 100644 --- a/Documentation/leds-lp3944.txt +++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp3944.txt diff --git a/Documentation/lockstat.txt b/Documentation/lockstat.txt index 65f4c795015..cef00d42ed5 100644 --- a/Documentation/lockstat.txt +++ b/Documentation/lockstat.txt @@ -12,8 +12,9 @@ Because things like lock contention can severely impact performance. - HOW Lockdep already has hooks in the lock functions and maps lock instances to -lock classes. We build on that. The graph below shows the relation between -the lock functions and the various hooks therein. +lock classes. We build on that (see Documentation/lockdep-design.txt). +The graph below shows the relation between the lock functions and the various +hooks therein. __acquire | @@ -128,6 +129,37 @@ points are the points we're contending with. The integer part of the time values is in us. +Dealing with nested locks, subclasses may appear: + +32............................................................................................................................................................................................... +33 +34 &rq->lock: 13128 13128 0.43 190.53 103881.26 97454 3453404 0.00 401.11 13224683.11 +35 --------- +36 &rq->lock 645 [<ffffffff8103bfc4>] task_rq_lock+0x43/0x75 +37 &rq->lock 297 [<ffffffff8104ba65>] try_to_wake_up+0x127/0x25a +38 &rq->lock 360 [<ffffffff8103c4c5>] select_task_rq_fair+0x1f0/0x74a +39 &rq->lock 428 [<ffffffff81045f98>] scheduler_tick+0x46/0x1fb +40 --------- +41 &rq->lock 77 [<ffffffff8103bfc4>] task_rq_lock+0x43/0x75 +42 &rq->lock 174 [<ffffffff8104ba65>] try_to_wake_up+0x127/0x25a +43 &rq->lock 4715 [<ffffffff8103ed4b>] double_rq_lock+0x42/0x54 +44 &rq->lock 893 [<ffffffff81340524>] schedule+0x157/0x7b8 +45 +46............................................................................................................................................................................................... +47 +48 &rq->lock/1: 11526 11488 0.33 388.73 136294.31 21461 38404 0.00 37.93 109388.53 +49 ----------- +50 &rq->lock/1 11526 [<ffffffff8103ed58>] double_rq_lock+0x4f/0x54 +51 ----------- +52 &rq->lock/1 5645 [<ffffffff8103ed4b>] double_rq_lock+0x42/0x54 +53 &rq->lock/1 1224 [<ffffffff81340524>] schedule+0x157/0x7b8 +54 &rq->lock/1 4336 [<ffffffff8103ed58>] double_rq_lock+0x4f/0x54 +55 &rq->lock/1 181 [<ffffffff8104ba65>] try_to_wake_up+0x127/0x25a + +Line 48 shows statistics for the second subclass (/1) of &rq->lock class +(subclass starts from 0), since in this case, as line 50 suggests, +double_rq_lock actually acquires a nested lock of two spinlocks. + View the top contending locks: # grep : /proc/lock_stat | head @@ -136,7 +168,7 @@ View the top contending locks: dcache_lock: 1037 1161 0.38 45.32 774.51 6611 243371 0.15 306.48 77387.24 &inode->i_mutex: 161 286 18446744073709 62882.54 1244614.55 3653 20598 18446744073709 62318.60 1693822.74 &zone->lru_lock: 94 94 0.53 7.33 92.10 4366 32690 0.29 59.81 16350.06 - &inode->i_data.i_mmap_lock: 79 79 0.40 3.77 53.03 11779 87755 0.28 116.93 29898.44 + &inode->i_data.i_mmap_mutex: 79 79 0.40 3.77 53.03 11779 87755 0.28 116.93 29898.44 &q->__queue_lock: 48 50 0.52 31.62 86.31 774 13131 0.17 113.08 12277.52 &rq->rq_lock_key: 43 47 0.74 68.50 170.63 3706 33929 0.22 107.99 17460.62 &rq->rq_lock_key#2: 39 46 0.75 6.68 49.03 2979 32292 0.17 125.17 17137.63 diff --git a/Documentation/md.txt b/Documentation/md.txt index a81c7b4790f..2366b1c8cf1 100644 --- a/Documentation/md.txt +++ b/Documentation/md.txt @@ -552,6 +552,16 @@ also have within the array where IO will be blocked. This is currently only supported for raid4/5/6. + sync_min + sync_max + The two values, given as numbers of sectors, indicate a range + withing the array where 'check'/'repair' will operate. Must be + a multiple of chunk_size. When it reaches "sync_max" it will + pause, rather than complete. + You can use 'select' or 'poll' on "sync_completed" to wait for + that number to reach sync_max. Then you can either increase + "sync_max", or can write 'idle' to "sync_action". + Each active md device may also have attributes specific to the personality module that manages it. diff --git a/Documentation/media-framework.txt b/Documentation/media-framework.txt index fd48add02cb..76a2087db20 100644 --- a/Documentation/media-framework.txt +++ b/Documentation/media-framework.txt @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ each pad. Links are represented by a struct media_link instance, defined in include/media/media-entity.h. Each entity stores all links originating at or -targetting any of its pads in a links array. A given link is thus stored +targeting any of its pads in a links array. A given link is thus stored twice, once in the source entity and once in the target entity. The array is pre-allocated and grows dynamically as needed. @@ -348,6 +348,6 @@ a streaming entity. Links that can be modified while streaming must be marked with the MEDIA_LNK_FL_DYNAMIC flag. If other operations need to be disallowed on streaming entities (such as -changing entities configuration parameters) drivers can explictly check the +changing entities configuration parameters) drivers can explicitly check the media_entity stream_count field to find out if an entity is streaming. This operation must be done with the media_device graph_mutex held. diff --git a/Documentation/mips/AU1xxx_IDE.README b/Documentation/mips/AU1xxx_IDE.README index 8ace35ebdcd..cc887ecfd6e 100644 --- a/Documentation/mips/AU1xxx_IDE.README +++ b/Documentation/mips/AU1xxx_IDE.README @@ -39,13 +39,13 @@ Note: for more information, please refer "AMD Alchemy Au1200/Au1550 IDE Interface and Linux Device Driver" Application Note. -FILES, CONFIGS AND COMPATABILITY +FILES, CONFIGS AND COMPATIBILITY -------------------------------- Two files are introduced: a) 'arch/mips/include/asm/mach-au1x00/au1xxx_ide.h' - containes : struct _auide_hwif + contains : struct _auide_hwif timing parameters for PIO mode 0/1/2/3/4 timing parameters for MWDMA 0/1/2 diff --git a/Documentation/misc-devices/ics932s401 b/Documentation/misc-devices/ics932s401 index 07a739f406d..bdac67ff6e3 100644 --- a/Documentation/misc-devices/ics932s401 +++ b/Documentation/misc-devices/ics932s401 @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ Supported chips: * IDT ICS932S401 Prefix: 'ics932s401' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x69 - Datasheet: Publically available at the IDT website + Datasheet: Publicly available at the IDT website Author: Darrick J. Wong diff --git a/Documentation/mmc/00-INDEX b/Documentation/mmc/00-INDEX index fca586f5b85..93dd7a71407 100644 --- a/Documentation/mmc/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/mmc/00-INDEX @@ -2,3 +2,5 @@ - this file mmc-dev-attrs.txt - info on SD and MMC device attributes +mmc-dev-parts.txt + - info on SD and MMC device partitions diff --git a/Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-attrs.txt b/Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-attrs.txt index ff2bd685bce..8898a95b41e 100644 --- a/Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-attrs.txt +++ b/Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-attrs.txt @@ -1,3 +1,13 @@ +SD and MMC Block Device Attributes +================================== + +These attributes are defined for the block devices associated with the +SD or MMC device. + +The following attributes are read/write. + + force_ro Enforce read-only access even if write protect switch is off. + SD and MMC Device Attributes ============================ diff --git a/Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-parts.txt b/Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-parts.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2db28b8e662 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-parts.txt @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +SD and MMC Device Partitions +============================ + +Device partitions are additional logical block devices present on the +SD/MMC device. + +As of this writing, MMC boot partitions as supported and exposed as +/dev/mmcblkXboot0 and /dev/mmcblkXboot1, where X is the index of the +parent /dev/mmcblkX. + +MMC Boot Partitions +=================== + +Read and write access is provided to the two MMC boot partitions. Due to +the sensitive nature of the boot partition contents, which often store +a bootloader or bootloader configuration tables crucial to booting the +platform, write access is disabled by default to reduce the chance of +accidental bricking. + +To enable write access to /dev/mmcblkXbootY, disable the forced read-only +access with: + +echo 0 > /sys/block/mmcblkXbootY/force_ro + +To re-enable read-only access: + +echo 1 > /sys/block/mmcblkXbootY/force_ro diff --git a/Documentation/networking/3c359.txt b/Documentation/networking/3c359.txt index 4af8071a6d1..dadfe8147ab 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/3c359.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/3c359.txt @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ debugging messages on, that must be done by modified the source code. Variable MTU size: -The driver can handle a MTU size upto either 4500 or 18000 depending upon +The driver can handle a MTU size up to either 4500 or 18000 depending upon ring speed. The driver also changes the size of the receive buffers as part of the mtu re-sizing, so if you set mtu = 18000, you will need to be able to allocate 16 * (sk_buff with 18000 buffer size) call it 18500 bytes per ring diff --git a/Documentation/networking/README.ipw2200 b/Documentation/networking/README.ipw2200 index 616a8e540b0..b7658bed490 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/README.ipw2200 +++ b/Documentation/networking/README.ipw2200 @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ You can set the debug level via: Where $VALUE would be a number in the case of this sysfs entry. The input to sysfs files does not have to be a number. For example, the -firmware loader used by hotplug utilizes sysfs entries for transfering +firmware loader used by hotplug utilizes sysfs entries for transferring the firmware image from user space into the driver. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux exposes sysfs entries diff --git a/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt b/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt index 18afcd8afd5..88d4afbdef9 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -[state: 27-01-2011] +[state: 17-04-2011] BATMAN-ADV ---------- @@ -19,6 +19,7 @@ duce the overhead to a minimum. It does not depend on any (other) network driver, and can be used on wifi as well as ethernet lan, vpn, etc ... (anything with ethernet-style layer 2). + CONFIGURATION ------------- @@ -72,7 +73,7 @@ folder: # fragmentation gw_sel_class vis_mode -There is a special folder for debugging informations: +There is a special folder for debugging information: # ls /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/ # gateways socket transtable_global vis_data @@ -160,13 +161,13 @@ face. Each entry can/has to have the following values: -> "TQ mac value" - src mac's link quality towards mac address of a neighbor originator's interface which is being used for routing --> "HNA mac" - HNA announced by source mac +-> "TT mac" - TT announced by source mac -> "PRIMARY" - this is a primary interface -> "SEC mac" - secondary mac address of source (requires preceding PRIMARY) The TQ value has a range from 4 to 255 with 255 being the best. -The HNA entries are showing which hosts are connected to the mesh +The TT entries are showing which hosts are connected to the mesh via bat0 or being bridged into the mesh network. The PRIMARY/SEC values are only applied on primary interfaces @@ -199,7 +200,7 @@ abled during run time. Following log_levels are defined: 0 - All debug output disabled 1 - Enable messages related to routing / flooding / broadcasting -2 - Enable route or hna added / changed / deleted +2 - Enable route or tt entry added / changed / deleted 3 - Enable all messages The debug output can be changed at runtime using the file @@ -207,7 +208,7 @@ The debug output can be changed at runtime using the file # echo 2 > /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/log_level -will enable debug messages for when routes or HNAs change. +will enable debug messages for when routes or TTs change. BATCTL diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt index b36e741e94d..675612ff41a 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ Linux Ethernet Bonding Driver HOWTO - Latest update: 23 September 2009 + Latest update: 27 April 2011 Initial release : Thomas Davis <tadavis at lbl.gov> Corrections, HA extensions : 2000/10/03-15 : @@ -368,7 +368,7 @@ fail_over_mac gratuitous ARP is lost, communication may be disrupted. - When this policy is used in conjuction with the mii + When this policy is used in conjunction with the mii monitor, devices which assert link up prior to being able to actually transmit and receive are particularly susceptible to loss of the gratuitous ARP, and an @@ -585,25 +585,23 @@ mode chosen. num_grat_arp - - Specifies the number of gratuitous ARPs to be issued after a - failover event. One gratuitous ARP is issued immediately after - the failover, subsequent ARPs are sent at a rate of one per link - monitor interval (arp_interval or miimon, whichever is active). - - The valid range is 0 - 255; the default value is 1. This option - affects only the active-backup mode. This option was added for - bonding version 3.3.0. - num_unsol_na - Specifies the number of unsolicited IPv6 Neighbor Advertisements - to be issued after a failover event. One unsolicited NA is issued - immediately after the failover. + Specify the number of peer notifications (gratuitous ARPs and + unsolicited IPv6 Neighbor Advertisements) to be issued after a + failover event. As soon as the link is up on the new slave + (possibly immediately) a peer notification is sent on the + bonding device and each VLAN sub-device. This is repeated at + each link monitor interval (arp_interval or miimon, whichever + is active) if the number is greater than 1. - The valid range is 0 - 255; the default value is 1. This option - affects only the active-backup mode. This option was added for - bonding version 3.4.0. + The valid range is 0 - 255; the default value is 1. These options + affect only the active-backup mode. These options were added for + bonding versions 3.3.0 and 3.4.0 respectively. + + From Linux 2.6.40 and bonding version 3.7.1, these notifications + are generated by the ipv4 and ipv6 code and the numbers of + repetitions cannot be set independently. primary @@ -772,8 +770,17 @@ resend_igmp a failover event. One membership report is issued immediately after the failover, subsequent packets are sent in each 200ms interval. - The valid range is 0 - 255; the default value is 1. This option - was added for bonding version 3.7.0. + The valid range is 0 - 255; the default value is 1. A value of 0 + prevents the IGMP membership report from being issued in response + to the failover event. + + This option is useful for bonding modes balance-rr (0), active-backup + (1), balance-tlb (5) and balance-alb (6), in which a failover can + switch the IGMP traffic from one slave to another. Therefore a fresh + IGMP report must be issued to cause the switch to forward the incoming + IGMP traffic over the newly selected slave. + + This option was added for bonding version 3.7.0. 3. Configuring Bonding Devices ============================== diff --git a/Documentation/networking/caif/Linux-CAIF.txt b/Documentation/networking/caif/Linux-CAIF.txt index 7fe7a9a33a4..e52fd62bef3 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/caif/Linux-CAIF.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/caif/Linux-CAIF.txt @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ The CAIF Protocol implementation contains: - CFMUX CAIF Mux layer. Handles multiplexing between multiple physical bearers and multiple channels such as VEI, Datagram, etc. The MUX keeps track of the existing CAIF Channels and - Physical Instances and selects the apropriate instance based + Physical Instances and selects the appropriate instance based on Channel-Id and Physical-ID. - CFFRML CAIF Framing layer. Handles Framing i.e. Frame length diff --git a/Documentation/networking/caif/spi_porting.txt b/Documentation/networking/caif/spi_porting.txt index 0cb8cb9098f..9efd0687dc4 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/caif/spi_porting.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/caif/spi_porting.txt @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ static int sspi_init_xfer(struct cfspi_xfer *xfer, struct cfspi_dev *dev) void sspi_sig_xfer(bool xfer, struct cfspi_dev *dev) { /* If xfer is true then you should assert the SPI_INT to indicate to - * the master that you are ready to recieve the data from the master + * the master that you are ready to receive the data from the master * SPI. If xfer is false then you should de-assert SPI_INT to indicate * that the transfer is done. */ diff --git a/Documentation/networking/can.txt b/Documentation/networking/can.txt index 5b04b67ddca..56ca3b75376 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/can.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/can.txt @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ solution for a couple of reasons: the user application using the common CAN filter mechanisms. Inside this filter definition the (interested) type of errors may be selected. The reception of error frames is disabled by default. - The format of the CAN error frame is briefly decribed in the Linux + The format of the CAN error frame is briefly described in the Linux header file "include/linux/can/error.h". 4. How to use Socket CAN diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dns_resolver.txt b/Documentation/networking/dns_resolver.txt index 04ca06325b0..7f531ad8328 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dns_resolver.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dns_resolver.txt @@ -139,8 +139,8 @@ the key will be discarded and recreated when the data it holds has expired. dns_query() returns a copy of the value attached to the key, or an error if that is indicated instead. -See <file:Documentation/keys-request-key.txt> for further information about -request-key function. +See <file:Documentation/security/keys-request-key.txt> for further +information about request-key function. ========= diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt b/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt index 23c995e6403..f41ea240522 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ The Linux-ZigBee project goal is to provide complete implementation of IEEE 802.15.4 / ZigBee / 6LoWPAN protocols. IEEE 802.15.4 is a stack of protocols for organizing Low-Rate Wireless Personal Area Networks. -Currently only IEEE 802.15.4 layer is implemented. We have choosen +Currently only IEEE 802.15.4 layer is implemented. We have chosen to use plain Berkeley socket API, the generic Linux networking stack to transfer IEEE 802.15.4 messages and a special protocol over genetlink for configuration/management diff --git a/Documentation/networking/igb.txt b/Documentation/networking/igb.txt index 98953c0d534..9a2a037194a 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/igb.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/igb.txt @@ -93,6 +93,19 @@ Additional Configurations REQUIREMENTS: MSI-X support is required for Multiqueue. If MSI-X is not found, the system will fallback to MSI or to Legacy interrupts. + MAC and VLAN anti-spoofing feature + ---------------------------------- + When a malicious driver attempts to send a spoofed packet, it is dropped by + the hardware and not transmitted. An interrupt is sent to the PF driver + notifying it of the spoof attempt. + + When a spoofed packet is detected the PF driver will send the following + message to the system log (displayed by the "dmesg" command): + + Spoof event(s) detected on VF(n) + + Where n=the VF that attempted to do the spoofing. + Support ======= diff --git a/Documentation/networking/olympic.txt b/Documentation/networking/olympic.txt index c65a94010ea..b95b5bf9675 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/olympic.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/olympic.txt @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ together. Variable MTU size: -The driver can handle a MTU size upto either 4500 or 18000 depending upon +The driver can handle a MTU size up to either 4500 or 18000 depending upon ring speed. The driver also changes the size of the receive buffers as part of the mtu re-sizing, so if you set mtu = 18000, you will need to be able to allocate 16 * (sk_buff with 18000 buffer size) call it 18500 bytes per ring diff --git a/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt b/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt index 073894d1c09..4acea660372 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ we will get the following buffer structure: A frame can be of any size with the only condition it can fit in a block. A block can only hold an integer number of frames, or in other words, a frame cannot -be spawned accross two blocks, so there are some details you have to take into +be spawned across two blocks, so there are some details you have to take into account when choosing the frame_size. See "Mapping and use of the circular buffer (ring)". diff --git a/Documentation/networking/s2io.txt b/Documentation/networking/s2io.txt index 9d4e0f4df5a..4be0c039edb 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/s2io.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/s2io.txt @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ To associate an interface with a physical adapter use "ethtool -p <ethX>". The corresponding adapter's LED will blink multiple times. 3. Features supported: -a. Jumbo frames. Xframe I/II supports MTU upto 9600 bytes, +a. Jumbo frames. Xframe I/II supports MTU up to 9600 bytes, modifiable using ifconfig command. b. Offloads. Supports checksum offload(TCP/UDP/IP) on transmit @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ significant performance improvement on certain platforms(SGI Altix, IBM xSeries). d. MSI/MSI-X. Can be enabled on platforms which support this feature -(IA64, Xeon) resulting in noticeable performance improvement(upto 7% +(IA64, Xeon) resulting in noticeable performance improvement(up to 7% on certain platforms). e. Statistics. Comprehensive MAC-level and software statistics displayed diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tc-actions-env-rules.txt b/Documentation/networking/tc-actions-env-rules.txt index dcadf6f88e3..70d6cf60825 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/tc-actions-env-rules.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/tc-actions-env-rules.txt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ -The "enviromental" rules for authors of any new tc actions are: +The "environmental" rules for authors of any new tc actions are: 1) If you stealeth or borroweth any packet thou shalt be branching from the righteous path and thou shalt cloneth. @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ this way any action downstream can stomp on the packet. 3) Dropping packets you don't own is a no-no. You simply return TC_ACT_SHOT to the caller and they will drop it. -The "enviromental" rules for callers of actions (qdiscs etc) are: +The "environmental" rules for callers of actions (qdiscs etc) are: *) Thou art responsible for freeing anything returned as being TC_ACT_SHOT/STOLEN/QUEUED. If none of TC_ACT_SHOT/STOLEN/QUEUED is diff --git a/Documentation/power/devices.txt b/Documentation/power/devices.txt index f023ba6bba6..88880839ece 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/devices.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/devices.txt @@ -279,11 +279,15 @@ When the system goes into the standby or memory sleep state, the phases are: time.) Unlike the other suspend-related phases, during the prepare phase the device tree is traversed top-down. - The prepare phase uses only a bus callback. After the callback method - returns, no new children may be registered below the device. The method - may also prepare the device or driver in some way for the upcoming - system power transition, but it should not put the device into a - low-power state. + In addition to that, if device drivers need to allocate additional + memory to be able to hadle device suspend correctly, that should be + done in the prepare phase. + + After the prepare callback method returns, no new children may be + registered below the device. The method may also prepare the device or + driver in some way for the upcoming system power transition (for + example, by allocating additional memory required for this purpose), but + it should not put the device into a low-power state. 2. The suspend methods should quiesce the device to stop it from performing I/O. They also may save the device registers and put it into the @@ -367,7 +371,7 @@ Drivers need to be able to handle hardware which has been reset since the suspend methods were called, for example by complete reinitialization. This may be the hardest part, and the one most protected by NDA'd documents and chip errata. It's simplest if the hardware state hasn't changed since -the suspend was carried out, but that can't be guaranteed (in fact, it ususally +the suspend was carried out, but that can't be guaranteed (in fact, it usually is not the case). Drivers must also be prepared to notice that the device has been removed diff --git a/Documentation/power/notifiers.txt b/Documentation/power/notifiers.txt index ae1b7ec0768..c2a4a346c0d 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/notifiers.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/notifiers.txt @@ -1,46 +1,41 @@ Suspend notifiers - (C) 2007 Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>, GPL - -There are some operations that device drivers may want to carry out in their -.suspend() routines, but shouldn't, because they can cause the hibernation or -suspend to fail. For example, a driver may want to allocate a substantial amount -of memory (like 50 MB) in .suspend(), but that shouldn't be done after the -swsusp's memory shrinker has run. - -Also, there may be some operations, that subsystems want to carry out before a -hibernation/suspend or after a restore/resume, requiring the system to be fully -functional, so the drivers' .suspend() and .resume() routines are not suitable -for this purpose. For example, device drivers may want to upload firmware to -their devices after a restore from a hibernation image, but they cannot do it by -calling request_firmware() from their .resume() routines (user land processes -are frozen at this point). The solution may be to load the firmware into -memory before processes are frozen and upload it from there in the .resume() -routine. Of course, a hibernation notifier may be used for this purpose. - -The subsystems that have such needs can register suspend notifiers that will be -called upon the following events by the suspend core: + (C) 2007-2011 Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>, GPL + +There are some operations that subsystems or drivers may want to carry out +before hibernation/suspend or after restore/resume, but they require the system +to be fully functional, so the drivers' and subsystems' .suspend() and .resume() +or even .prepare() and .complete() callbacks are not suitable for this purpose. +For example, device drivers may want to upload firmware to their devices after +resume/restore, but they cannot do it by calling request_firmware() from their +.resume() or .complete() routines (user land processes are frozen at these +points). The solution may be to load the firmware into memory before processes +are frozen and upload it from there in the .resume() routine. +A suspend/hibernation notifier may be used for this purpose. + +The subsystems or drivers having such needs can register suspend notifiers that +will be called upon the following events by the PM core: PM_HIBERNATION_PREPARE The system is going to hibernate or suspend, tasks will be frozen immediately. PM_POST_HIBERNATION The system memory state has been restored from a - hibernation image or an error occured during the - hibernation. Device drivers' .resume() callbacks have + hibernation image or an error occurred during + hibernation. Device drivers' restore callbacks have been executed and tasks have been thawed. PM_RESTORE_PREPARE The system is going to restore a hibernation image. - If all goes well the restored kernel will issue a + If all goes well, the restored kernel will issue a PM_POST_HIBERNATION notification. -PM_POST_RESTORE An error occurred during the hibernation restore. - Device drivers' .resume() callbacks have been executed +PM_POST_RESTORE An error occurred during restore from hibernation. + Device drivers' restore callbacks have been executed and tasks have been thawed. -PM_SUSPEND_PREPARE The system is preparing for a suspend. +PM_SUSPEND_PREPARE The system is preparing for suspend. -PM_POST_SUSPEND The system has just resumed or an error occured during - the suspend. Device drivers' .resume() callbacks have - been executed and tasks have been thawed. +PM_POST_SUSPEND The system has just resumed or an error occurred during + suspend. Device drivers' resume callbacks have been + executed and tasks have been thawed. It is generally assumed that whatever the notifiers do for PM_HIBERNATION_PREPARE, should be undone for PM_POST_HIBERNATION. Analogously, diff --git a/Documentation/power/opp.txt b/Documentation/power/opp.txt index cd445582d1f..5ae70a12c1e 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/opp.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/opp.txt @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ opp_find_freq_ceil - Search for an available OPP which is *at least* the if (!IS_ERR(opp)) soc_switch_to_freq_voltage(freq); else - /* do something when we cant satisfy the req */ + /* do something when we can't satisfy the req */ /* do other stuff */ } diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt index bdec39b9bd7..b42419b52e4 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt @@ -53,11 +53,11 @@ static struct regulator_init_data regulator1_data = { Regulator-1 supplies power to Regulator-2. This relationship must be registered with the core so that Regulator-1 is also enabled when Consumer A enables its -supply (Regulator-2). The supply regulator is set by the supply_regulator_dev +supply (Regulator-2). The supply regulator is set by the supply_regulator field below:- static struct regulator_init_data regulator2_data = { - .supply_regulator_dev = &platform_regulator1_device.dev, + .supply_regulator = "regulator_name", .constraints = { .min_uV = 1800000, .max_uV = 2000000, diff --git a/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt b/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt index ea718891a66..ac190cf1963 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Q: There don't seem to be any generally useful behavioral distinctions between SUSPEND and FREEZE. A: Doing SUSPEND when you are asked to do FREEZE is always correct, -but it may be unneccessarily slow. If you want your driver to stay simple, +but it may be unnecessarily slow. If you want your driver to stay simple, slowness may not matter to you. It can always be fixed later. For devices like disk it does matter, you do not want to spindown for @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ disk. Whole sequence goes like running system, user asks for suspend-to-disk - user processes are stopped (in common case there are none, but with resume-from-initrd, noone knows) + user processes are stopped (in common case there are none, but with resume-from-initrd, no one knows) read image from disk diff --git a/Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt b/Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt index 81680f9f590..1101bee4e82 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ SNAPSHOT_S2RAM - suspend to RAM; using this call causes the kernel to The device's read() operation can be used to transfer the snapshot image from the kernel. It has the following limitations: - you cannot read() more than one virtual memory page at a time -- read()s accross page boundaries are impossible (ie. if ypu read() 1/2 of +- read()s across page boundaries are impossible (ie. if ypu read() 1/2 of a page in the previous call, you will only be able to read() _at_ _most_ 1/2 of the page in the next call) @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ mechanism and the userland utilities using the interface SHOULD use additional means, such as checksums, to ensure the integrity of the snapshot image. The suspending and resuming utilities MUST lock themselves in memory, -preferrably using mlockall(), before calling SNAPSHOT_FREEZE. +preferably using mlockall(), before calling SNAPSHOT_FREEZE. The suspending utility MUST check the value stored by SNAPSHOT_CREATE_IMAGE in the memory location pointed to by the last argument of ioctl() and proceed @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ in accordance with it: (a) The suspending utility MUST NOT close the snapshot device _unless_ the whole suspend procedure is to be cancelled, in which case, if the snapshot image has already been saved, the - suspending utility SHOULD destroy it, preferrably by zapping + suspending utility SHOULD destroy it, preferably by zapping its header. If the suspend is not to be cancelled, the system MUST be powered off or rebooted after the snapshot image has been saved. diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/hvcs.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/hvcs.txt index 6d8be3468d7..a730ca5a07f 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/hvcs.txt +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/hvcs.txt @@ -528,7 +528,7 @@ this driver assignment of hotplug added vty-servers may be in a different order than how they would be exposed on module load. Rebooting or reloading the module after dynamic addition may result in the /dev/hvcs* and vty-server coupling changing if a vty-server adapter was added in a -slot inbetween two other vty-server adapters. Refer to the section above +slot between two other vty-server adapters. Refer to the section above on how to determine which vty-server goes with which /dev/hvcs* node. Hint; look at the sysfs "index" attribute for the vty-server. diff --git a/Documentation/pti/pti_intel_mid.txt b/Documentation/pti/pti_intel_mid.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e7a5b6d1f7a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/pti/pti_intel_mid.txt @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +The Intel MID PTI project is HW implemented in Intel Atom +system-on-a-chip designs based on the Parallel Trace +Interface for MIPI P1149.7 cJTAG standard. The kernel solution +for this platform involves the following files: + +./include/linux/pti.h +./drivers/.../n_tracesink.h +./drivers/.../n_tracerouter.c +./drivers/.../n_tracesink.c +./drivers/.../pti.c + +pti.c is the driver that enables various debugging features +popular on platforms from certain mobile manufacturers. +n_tracerouter.c and n_tracesink.c allow extra system information to +be collected and routed to the pti driver, such as trace +debugging data from a modem. Although n_tracerouter +and n_tracesink are a part of the complete PTI solution, +these two line disciplines can work separately from +pti.c and route any data stream from one /dev/tty node +to another /dev/tty node via kernel-space. This provides +a stable, reliable connection that will not break unless +the user-space application shuts down (plus avoids +kernel->user->kernel context switch overheads of routing +data). + +An example debugging usage for this driver system: + *Hook /dev/ttyPTI0 to syslogd. Opening this port will also start + a console device to further capture debugging messages to PTI. + *Hook /dev/ttyPTI1 to modem debugging data to write to PTI HW. + This is where n_tracerouter and n_tracesink are used. + *Hook /dev/pti to a user-level debugging application for writing + to PTI HW. + *Use mipi_* Kernel Driver API in other device drivers for + debugging to PTI by first requesting a PTI write address via + mipi_request_masterchannel(1). + +Below is example pseudo-code on how a 'privileged' application +can hook up n_tracerouter and n_tracesink to any tty on +a system. 'Privileged' means the application has enough +privileges to successfully manipulate the ldisc drivers +but is not just blindly executing as 'root'. Keep in mind +the use of ioctl(,TIOCSETD,) is not specific to the n_tracerouter +and n_tracesink line discpline drivers but is a generic +operation for a program to use a line discpline driver +on a tty port other than the default n_tty. + +/////////// To hook up n_tracerouter and n_tracesink ///////// + +// Note that n_tracerouter depends on n_tracesink. +#include <errno.h> +#define ONE_TTY "/dev/ttyOne" +#define TWO_TTY "/dev/ttyTwo" + +// needed global to hand onto ldisc connection +static int g_fd_source = -1; +static int g_fd_sink = -1; + +// these two vars used to grab LDISC values from loaded ldisc drivers +// in OS. Look at /proc/tty/ldiscs to get the right numbers from +// the ldiscs loaded in the system. +int source_ldisc_num, sink_ldisc_num = -1; +int retval; + +g_fd_source = open(ONE_TTY, O_RDWR); // must be R/W +g_fd_sink = open(TWO_TTY, O_RDWR); // must be R/W + +if (g_fd_source <= 0) || (g_fd_sink <= 0) { + // doubt you'll want to use these exact error lines of code + printf("Error on open(). errno: %d\n",errno); + return errno; +} + +retval = ioctl(g_fd_sink, TIOCSETD, &sink_ldisc_num); +if (retval < 0) { + printf("Error on ioctl(). errno: %d\n", errno); + return errno; +} + +retval = ioctl(g_fd_source, TIOCSETD, &source_ldisc_num); +if (retval < 0) { + printf("Error on ioctl(). errno: %d\n", errno); + return errno; +} + +/////////// To disconnect n_tracerouter and n_tracesink //////// + +// First make sure data through the ldiscs has stopped. + +// Second, disconnect ldiscs. This provides a +// little cleaner shutdown on tty stack. +sink_ldisc_num = 0; +source_ldisc_num = 0; +ioctl(g_fd_uart, TIOCSETD, &sink_ldisc_num); +ioctl(g_fd_gadget, TIOCSETD, &source_ldisc_num); + +// Three, program closes connection, and cleanup: +close(g_fd_uart); +close(g_fd_gadget); +g_fd_uart = g_fd_gadget = NULL; diff --git a/Documentation/ptp/ptp.txt b/Documentation/ptp/ptp.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ae8fef86b83 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ptp/ptp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + +* PTP hardware clock infrastructure for Linux + + This patch set introduces support for IEEE 1588 PTP clocks in + Linux. Together with the SO_TIMESTAMPING socket options, this + presents a standardized method for developing PTP user space + programs, synchronizing Linux with external clocks, and using the + ancillary features of PTP hardware clocks. + + A new class driver exports a kernel interface for specific clock + drivers and a user space interface. The infrastructure supports a + complete set of PTP hardware clock functionality. + + + Basic clock operations + - Set time + - Get time + - Shift the clock by a given offset atomically + - Adjust clock frequency + + + Ancillary clock features + - One short or periodic alarms, with signal delivery to user program + - Time stamp external events + - Period output signals configurable from user space + - Synchronization of the Linux system time via the PPS subsystem + +** PTP hardware clock kernel API + + A PTP clock driver registers itself with the class driver. The + class driver handles all of the dealings with user space. The + author of a clock driver need only implement the details of + programming the clock hardware. The clock driver notifies the class + driver of asynchronous events (alarms and external time stamps) via + a simple message passing interface. + + The class driver supports multiple PTP clock drivers. In normal use + cases, only one PTP clock is needed. However, for testing and + development, it can be useful to have more than one clock in a + single system, in order to allow performance comparisons. + +** PTP hardware clock user space API + + The class driver also creates a character device for each + registered clock. User space can use an open file descriptor from + the character device as a POSIX clock id and may call + clock_gettime, clock_settime, and clock_adjtime. These calls + implement the basic clock operations. + + User space programs may control the clock using standardized + ioctls. A program may query, enable, configure, and disable the + ancillary clock features. User space can receive time stamped + events via blocking read() and poll(). One shot and periodic + signals may be configured via the POSIX timer_settime() system + call. + +** Writing clock drivers + + Clock drivers include include/linux/ptp_clock_kernel.h and register + themselves by presenting a 'struct ptp_clock_info' to the + registration method. Clock drivers must implement all of the + functions in the interface. If a clock does not offer a particular + ancillary feature, then the driver should just return -EOPNOTSUPP + from those functions. + + Drivers must ensure that all of the methods in interface are + reentrant. Since most hardware implementations treat the time value + as a 64 bit integer accessed as two 32 bit registers, drivers + should use spin_lock_irqsave/spin_unlock_irqrestore to protect + against concurrent access. This locking cannot be accomplished in + class driver, since the lock may also be needed by the clock + driver's interrupt service routine. + +** Supported hardware + + + Freescale eTSEC gianfar + - 2 Time stamp external triggers, programmable polarity (opt. interrupt) + - 2 Alarm registers (optional interrupt) + - 3 Periodic signals (optional interrupt) + + + National DP83640 + - 6 GPIOs programmable as inputs or outputs + - 6 GPIOs with dedicated functions (LED/JTAG/clock) can also be + used as general inputs or outputs + - GPIO inputs can time stamp external triggers + - GPIO outputs can produce periodic signals + - 1 interrupt pin + + + Intel IXP465 + - Auxiliary Slave/Master Mode Snapshot (optional interrupt) + - Target Time (optional interrupt) diff --git a/Documentation/ptp/testptp.c b/Documentation/ptp/testptp.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f59ded06610 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ptp/testptp.c @@ -0,0 +1,381 @@ +/* + * PTP 1588 clock support - User space test program + * + * Copyright (C) 2010 OMICRON electronics GmbH + * + * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify + * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by + * the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or + * (at your option) any later version. + * + * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + * GNU General Public License for more details. + * + * You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License + * along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software + * Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. + */ +#include <errno.h> +#include <fcntl.h> +#include <math.h> +#include <signal.h> +#include <stdio.h> +#include <stdlib.h> +#include <string.h> +#include <sys/ioctl.h> +#include <sys/mman.h> +#include <sys/stat.h> +#include <sys/time.h> +#include <sys/timex.h> +#include <sys/types.h> +#include <time.h> +#include <unistd.h> + +#include <linux/ptp_clock.h> + +#define DEVICE "/dev/ptp0" + +#ifndef ADJ_SETOFFSET +#define ADJ_SETOFFSET 0x0100 +#endif + +#ifndef CLOCK_INVALID +#define CLOCK_INVALID -1 +#endif + +/* When glibc offers the syscall, this will go away. */ +#include <sys/syscall.h> +static int clock_adjtime(clockid_t id, struct timex *tx) +{ + return syscall(__NR_clock_adjtime, id, tx); +} + +static clockid_t get_clockid(int fd) +{ +#define CLOCKFD 3 +#define FD_TO_CLOCKID(fd) ((~(clockid_t) (fd) << 3) | CLOCKFD) + + return FD_TO_CLOCKID(fd); +} + +static void handle_alarm(int s) +{ + printf("received signal %d\n", s); +} + +static int install_handler(int signum, void (*handler)(int)) +{ + struct sigaction action; + sigset_t mask; + + /* Unblock the signal. */ + sigemptyset(&mask); + sigaddset(&mask, signum); + sigprocmask(SIG_UNBLOCK, &mask, NULL); + + /* Install the signal handler. */ + action.sa_handler = handler; + action.sa_flags = 0; + sigemptyset(&action.sa_mask); + sigaction(signum, &action, NULL); + + return 0; +} + +static long ppb_to_scaled_ppm(int ppb) +{ + /* + * The 'freq' field in the 'struct timex' is in parts per + * million, but with a 16 bit binary fractional field. + * Instead of calculating either one of + * + * scaled_ppm = (ppb / 1000) << 16 [1] + * scaled_ppm = (ppb << 16) / 1000 [2] + * + * we simply use double precision math, in order to avoid the + * truncation in [1] and the possible overflow in [2]. + */ + return (long) (ppb * 65.536); +} + +static void usage(char *progname) +{ + fprintf(stderr, + "usage: %s [options]\n" + " -a val request a one-shot alarm after 'val' seconds\n" + " -A val request a periodic alarm every 'val' seconds\n" + " -c query the ptp clock's capabilities\n" + " -d name device to open\n" + " -e val read 'val' external time stamp events\n" + " -f val adjust the ptp clock frequency by 'val' ppb\n" + " -g get the ptp clock time\n" + " -h prints this message\n" + " -p val enable output with a period of 'val' nanoseconds\n" + " -P val enable or disable (val=1|0) the system clock PPS\n" + " -s set the ptp clock time from the system time\n" + " -S set the system time from the ptp clock time\n" + " -t val shift the ptp clock time by 'val' seconds\n", + progname); +} + +int main(int argc, char *argv[]) +{ + struct ptp_clock_caps caps; + struct ptp_extts_event event; + struct ptp_extts_request extts_request; + struct ptp_perout_request perout_request; + struct timespec ts; + struct timex tx; + + static timer_t timerid; + struct itimerspec timeout; + struct sigevent sigevent; + + char *progname; + int c, cnt, fd; + + char *device = DEVICE; + clockid_t clkid; + int adjfreq = 0x7fffffff; + int adjtime = 0; + int capabilities = 0; + int extts = 0; + int gettime = 0; + int oneshot = 0; + int periodic = 0; + int perout = -1; + int pps = -1; + int settime = 0; + + progname = strrchr(argv[0], '/'); + progname = progname ? 1+progname : argv[0]; + while (EOF != (c = getopt(argc, argv, "a:A:cd:e:f:ghp:P:sSt:v"))) { + switch (c) { + case 'a': + oneshot = atoi(optarg); + break; + case 'A': + periodic = atoi(optarg); + break; + case 'c': + capabilities = 1; + break; + case 'd': + device = optarg; + break; + case 'e': + extts = atoi(optarg); + break; + case 'f': + adjfreq = atoi(optarg); + break; + case 'g': + gettime = 1; + break; + case 'p': + perout = atoi(optarg); + break; + case 'P': + pps = atoi(optarg); + break; + case 's': + settime = 1; + break; + case 'S': + settime = 2; + break; + case 't': + adjtime = atoi(optarg); + break; + case 'h': + usage(progname); + return 0; + case '?': + default: + usage(progname); + return -1; + } + } + + fd = open(device, O_RDWR); + if (fd < 0) { + fprintf(stderr, "opening %s: %s\n", device, strerror(errno)); + return -1; + } + + clkid = get_clockid(fd); + if (CLOCK_INVALID == clkid) { + fprintf(stderr, "failed to read clock id\n"); + return -1; + } + + if (capabilities) { + if (ioctl(fd, PTP_CLOCK_GETCAPS, &caps)) { + perror("PTP_CLOCK_GETCAPS"); + } else { + printf("capabilities:\n" + " %d maximum frequency adjustment (ppb)\n" + " %d programmable alarms\n" + " %d external time stamp channels\n" + " %d programmable periodic signals\n" + " %d pulse per second\n", + caps.max_adj, + caps.n_alarm, + caps.n_ext_ts, + caps.n_per_out, + caps.pps); + } + } + + if (0x7fffffff != adjfreq) { + memset(&tx, 0, sizeof(tx)); + tx.modes = ADJ_FREQUENCY; + tx.freq = ppb_to_scaled_ppm(adjfreq); + if (clock_adjtime(clkid, &tx)) { + perror("clock_adjtime"); + } else { + puts("frequency adjustment okay"); + } + } + + if (adjtime) { + memset(&tx, 0, sizeof(tx)); + tx.modes = ADJ_SETOFFSET; + tx.time.tv_sec = adjtime; + tx.time.tv_usec = 0; + if (clock_adjtime(clkid, &tx) < 0) { + perror("clock_adjtime"); + } else { + puts("time shift okay"); + } + } + + if (gettime) { + if (clock_gettime(clkid, &ts)) { + perror("clock_gettime"); + } else { + printf("clock time: %ld.%09ld or %s", + ts.tv_sec, ts.tv_nsec, ctime(&ts.tv_sec)); + } + } + + if (settime == 1) { + clock_gettime(CLOCK_REALTIME, &ts); + if (clock_settime(clkid, &ts)) { + perror("clock_settime"); + } else { + puts("set time okay"); + } + } + + if (settime == 2) { + clock_gettime(clkid, &ts); + if (clock_settime(CLOCK_REALTIME, &ts)) { + perror("clock_settime"); + } else { + puts("set time okay"); + } + } + + if (extts) { + memset(&extts_request, 0, sizeof(extts_request)); + extts_request.index = 0; + extts_request.flags = PTP_ENABLE_FEATURE; + if (ioctl(fd, PTP_EXTTS_REQUEST, &extts_request)) { + perror("PTP_EXTTS_REQUEST"); + extts = 0; + } else { + puts("external time stamp request okay"); + } + for (; extts; extts--) { + cnt = read(fd, &event, sizeof(event)); + if (cnt != sizeof(event)) { + perror("read"); + break; + } + printf("event index %u at %lld.%09u\n", event.index, + event.t.sec, event.t.nsec); + fflush(stdout); + } + /* Disable the feature again. */ + extts_request.flags = 0; + if (ioctl(fd, PTP_EXTTS_REQUEST, &extts_request)) { + perror("PTP_EXTTS_REQUEST"); + } + } + + if (oneshot) { + install_handler(SIGALRM, handle_alarm); + /* Create a timer. */ + sigevent.sigev_notify = SIGEV_SIGNAL; + sigevent.sigev_signo = SIGALRM; + if (timer_create(clkid, &sigevent, &timerid)) { + perror("timer_create"); + return -1; + } + /* Start the timer. */ + memset(&timeout, 0, sizeof(timeout)); + timeout.it_value.tv_sec = oneshot; + if (timer_settime(timerid, 0, &timeout, NULL)) { + perror("timer_settime"); + return -1; + } + pause(); + timer_delete(timerid); + } + + if (periodic) { + install_handler(SIGALRM, handle_alarm); + /* Create a timer. */ + sigevent.sigev_notify = SIGEV_SIGNAL; + sigevent.sigev_signo = SIGALRM; + if (timer_create(clkid, &sigevent, &timerid)) { + perror("timer_create"); + return -1; + } + /* Start the timer. */ + memset(&timeout, 0, sizeof(timeout)); + timeout.it_interval.tv_sec = periodic; + timeout.it_value.tv_sec = periodic; + if (timer_settime(timerid, 0, &timeout, NULL)) { + perror("timer_settime"); + return -1; + } + while (1) { + pause(); + } + timer_delete(timerid); + } + + if (perout >= 0) { + if (clock_gettime(clkid, &ts)) { + perror("clock_gettime"); + return -1; + } + memset(&perout_request, 0, sizeof(perout_request)); + perout_request.index = 0; + perout_request.start.sec = ts.tv_sec + 2; + perout_request.start.nsec = 0; + perout_request.period.sec = 0; + perout_request.period.nsec = perout; + if (ioctl(fd, PTP_PEROUT_REQUEST, &perout_request)) { + perror("PTP_PEROUT_REQUEST"); + } else { + puts("periodic output request okay"); + } + } + + if (pps != -1) { + int enable = pps ? 1 : 0; + if (ioctl(fd, PTP_ENABLE_PPS, enable)) { + perror("PTP_ENABLE_PPS"); + } else { + puts("pps for system time request okay"); + } + } + + close(fd); + return 0; +} diff --git a/Documentation/ptp/testptp.mk b/Documentation/ptp/testptp.mk new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4ef2d975542 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ptp/testptp.mk @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +# PTP 1588 clock support - User space test program +# +# Copyright (C) 2010 OMICRON electronics GmbH +# +# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or +# (at your option) any later version. +# +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +# GNU General Public License for more details. +# +# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software +# Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. + +CC = $(CROSS_COMPILE)gcc +INC = -I$(KBUILD_OUTPUT)/usr/include +CFLAGS = -Wall $(INC) +LDLIBS = -lrt +PROGS = testptp + +all: $(PROGS) + +testptp: testptp.o + +clean: + rm -f testptp.o + +distclean: clean + rm -f $(PROGS) diff --git a/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt b/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt index 86f9f74b2b3..efe998becc5 100644 --- a/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt +++ b/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt @@ -2273,7 +2273,7 @@ IP forwarding is on. There is a lot of useful info in here best found by going in & having a look around, so I'll take you through some entries I consider important. -All the processes running on the machine have there own entry defined by +All the processes running on the machine have their own entry defined by /proc/<pid> So lets have a look at the init process cd /proc/1 diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-domains.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-domains.txt index 373ceacc367..b7ee379b651 100644 --- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-domains.txt +++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-domains.txt @@ -1,8 +1,7 @@ -Each CPU has a "base" scheduling domain (struct sched_domain). These are -accessed via cpu_sched_domain(i) and this_sched_domain() macros. The domain +Each CPU has a "base" scheduling domain (struct sched_domain). The domain hierarchy is built from these base domains via the ->parent pointer. ->parent -MUST be NULL terminated, and domain structures should be per-CPU as they -are locklessly updated. +MUST be NULL terminated, and domain structures should be per-CPU as they are +locklessly updated. Each scheduling domain spans a number of CPUs (stored in the ->span field). A domain's span MUST be a superset of it child's span (this restriction could @@ -26,11 +25,26 @@ is treated as one entity. The load of a group is defined as the sum of the load of each of its member CPUs, and only when the load of a group becomes out of balance are tasks moved between groups. -In kernel/sched.c, rebalance_tick is run periodically on each CPU. This -function takes its CPU's base sched domain and checks to see if has reached -its rebalance interval. If so, then it will run load_balance on that domain. -rebalance_tick then checks the parent sched_domain (if it exists), and the -parent of the parent and so forth. +In kernel/sched.c, trigger_load_balance() is run periodically on each CPU +through scheduler_tick(). It raises a softirq after the next regularly scheduled +rebalancing event for the current runqueue has arrived. The actual load +balancing workhorse, run_rebalance_domains()->rebalance_domains(), is then run +in softirq context (SCHED_SOFTIRQ). + +The latter function takes two arguments: the current CPU and whether it was idle +at the time the scheduler_tick() happened and iterates over all sched domains +our CPU is on, starting from its base domain and going up the ->parent chain. +While doing that, it checks to see if the current domain has exhausted its +rebalance interval. If so, it runs load_balance() on that domain. It then checks +the parent sched_domain (if it exists), and the parent of the parent and so +forth. + +Initially, load_balance() finds the busiest group in the current sched domain. +If it succeeds, it looks for the busiest runqueue of all the CPUs' runqueues in +that group. If it manages to find such a runqueue, it locks both our initial +CPU's runqueue and the newly found busiest one and starts moving tasks from it +to our runqueue. The exact number of tasks amounts to an imbalance previously +computed while iterating over this sched domain's groups. *** Implementing sched domains *** The "base" domain will "span" the first level of the hierarchy. In the case diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc index 5e83769c6aa..c56ec99d7b2 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ Changes from 20041229 to 20050110 lpfc_scsiport.c * In remote port changes: no longer nulling target->pnode when removing from mapped list. Pnode get nulled when the node is - freed (after nodev tmo). This bug was causing i/o recieved in + freed (after nodev tmo). This bug was causing i/o received in the small window while the device was blocked to be errored w/ did_no_connect. With the fix, it returns host_busy (per the pre-remote port changes). @@ -530,7 +530,7 @@ Changes from 20041018 to 20041123 coherent mappings. Note: There are more consistent mappings that are using pci_dma_sync calls. Probably these should be removed as well. - * Modified lpfc_free_scsi_buf to accomodate all three scsi_buf + * Modified lpfc_free_scsi_buf to accommodate all three scsi_buf free types to alleviate miscellaneous panics with cable pull testing. * Set hotplug to default 0 and lpfc_target_remove to not remove @@ -583,7 +583,7 @@ Changes from 20041018 to 20041123 included more than once. * Replaced "set_current_state(TASK_UNINTERRUPTIBLE); schedule_timeout(timeout)" with "msleep(timeout)". - * Fixnode was loosing starget when rediscovered. We saw messages + * Fixnode was losing starget when rediscovered. We saw messages like: lpfc 0000:04:02.0: 0:0263 Cannot block scsi target as a result. Moved starget field into struct lpfc_target which is referenced from the node. @@ -604,7 +604,7 @@ Changes from 20041018 to 20041123 * Make 3 functions static: lpfc_get_hba_sym_node_name, lpfc_intr_prep and lpfc_setup_slim_access. Move lpfc_intr_prep and lpfc_setup_slim_access so they're defined before being used. - * Remove an unecessary list_del() in lpfc_hbadisc.c. + * Remove an unnecessary list_del() in lpfc_hbadisc.c. * Set nlp_state before calling lpfc_nlp_list() since this will potentially call fc_target_unblock which may cause a race in queuecommand by releasing host_lock. @@ -753,7 +753,7 @@ Changes from 20040908 to 20040920 * Changed version number to 8.0.12 * Removed used #defines: DEFAULT_PCI_LATENCY_CLOCKS and PCI_LATENCY_VALUE from lpfc_hw.h. - * Changes to accomodate rnid. + * Changes to accommodate rnid. * Fix RSCN handling so RSCN NS queries only effect NPorts found in RSCN data. * If we rcv a plogi on a NPort queued up for discovery, clear the @@ -813,7 +813,7 @@ Changes from 20040908 to 20040920 counter instead, brd_no isn't reused anymore. Also some tiny whitespace cleanups in surrounding code. * Reorder functions in lpfc_els.c to remove need for prototypes. - * Removed unsed prototypes from lpfc_crtn.h - + * Removed unused prototypes from lpfc_crtn.h - lpfc_ip_timeout_handler, lpfc_read_pci and lpfc_revoke. * Removed some unused prototypes from lpfc_crtn.h - lpfc_scsi_hba_reset, lpfc_scsi_issue_inqsn, @@ -863,7 +863,7 @@ Changes from 20040823 to 20040908 * Minimal support for SCSI flat space addressing/volume set addressing. Use 16 bits of LUN address so that flat addressing/VSA will work. - * Changed 2 occurences of if( 1 != f(x)) to if(f(x) != 1) + * Changed 2 occurrences of if( 1 != f(x)) to if(f(x) != 1) * Drop include of lpfc_cfgparm.h. * Reduce stack usage of lpfc_fdmi_cmd in lpfc_ct.c. * Add minimum range checking property to /sys write/store @@ -1449,7 +1449,7 @@ Changes from 20040402 to 20040409 * Removed lpfc_els_chk_latt from the lpfc_config_post function. lpfc_els_chk_latt will enable the link event interrupts when flogi is pending which causes two discovery state machines - running parallely. + running parallelly. * Add pci_disable_device to unload path. * Move lpfc_sleep_event from lpfc_fcp.c to lpfc_util_ioctl.c * Call dma_map_single() & pci_map_single() directly instead of via @@ -1590,7 +1590,7 @@ Changes from 20040326 to 20040402 ELX_WRITE_HS ELX_WRITE_HA ELX_WRITE_CA ELX_READ_HC ELX_READ_HS ELX_READ_HA ELX_READ_CA ELX_READ_MB ELX_RESET ELX_READ_HBA ELX_INSTANCE ELX_LIP. Also introduced - attribute "set" to be used in conjuction with the above + attribute "set" to be used in conjunction with the above attributes. * Removed DLINK, enque and deque declarations now that clock doesn't use them anymore diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid index 5e07d320817..d2052fdbedd 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Older Version : 2.20.4.6 (scsi module), 2.20.2.6 (cmm module) 1. Sorted out PCI IDs to remove megaraid support overlaps. Based on the patch from Daniel, sorted out PCI IDs along with - charactor node name change from 'megadev' to 'megadev_legacy' to avoid + character node name change from 'megadev' to 'megadev_legacy' to avoid conflict. --- Hopefully we'll be getting the build restriction zapped much sooner, diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas index 4d9ce73ff73..9ed1d9d9678 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas @@ -1,3 +1,17 @@ +Release Date : Wed. May 11, 2011 17:00:00 PST 2010 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Adam Radford +Current Version : 00.00.05.38-rc1 +Old Version : 00.00.05.34-rc1 + 1. Remove MSI-X black list, use MFI_REG_STATE.ready.msiEnable. + 2. Remove un-used function megasas_return_cmd_for_smid(). + 3. Check MFI_REG_STATE.fault.resetAdapter in megasas_reset_fusion(). + 4. Disable interrupts/free_irq() in megasas_shutdown(). + 5. Fix bug where AENs could be lost in probe() and resume(). + 6. Convert 6,10,12 byte CDB's to 16 byte CDB for large LBA's for FastPath + IO. + 7. Add 1078 OCR support. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Release Date : Thu. Feb 24, 2011 17:00:00 PST 2010 - (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) Adam Radford diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.ncr53c8xx b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.ncr53c8xx index 8b278c10edf..9288e3d8974 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.ncr53c8xx +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.ncr53c8xx @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ Sun Feb 14:00 1999 Gerard Roudier (groudier@club-internet.fr) By default the driver uses both IRQF_SHARED and IRQF_DISABLED. Option 'ncr53c8xx=irqm:0x20' may be used when an IRQ is shared by a 53C8XX adapter and a network board. - - Tiny mispelling fixed (ABORT instead of ABRT). Was fortunately + - Tiny misspelling fixed (ABORT instead of ABRT). Was fortunately harmless. - Negotiate SYNC data transfers with CCS devices. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.sym53c8xx b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.sym53c8xx index 02ffbc1e8a8..c1933707d0b 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.sym53c8xx +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.sym53c8xx @@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ Fri Jan 1 20:00 1999 Gerard Roudier (groudier@club-internet.fr) Sat Dec 19 21:00 1998 Gerard Roudier (groudier@club-internet.fr) * version sym53c8xx-1.0 - Define some new IO registers for the 896 (istat1, mbox0, mbox1) - - Revamp slighly the Symbios NVRAM lay-out based on the excerpt of + - Revamp slightly the Symbios NVRAM lay-out based on the excerpt of the header file I received from Symbios. - Check the PCI bus number for the boot order (Using a fast PCI controller behing a PCI-PCI bridge seems sub-optimal). diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla2xxx b/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla2xxx index 9e15b4f9cd2..19e7cd4bba6 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla2xxx +++ b/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla2xxx @@ -1,11 +1,11 @@ -Copyright (c) 2003-2005 QLogic Corporation -QLogic Linux Fibre Channel HBA Driver +Copyright (c) 2003-2011 QLogic Corporation +QLogic Linux/ESX Fibre Channel HBA Driver -This program includes a device driver for Linux 2.6 that may be +This program includes a device driver for Linux 2.6/ESX that may be distributed with QLogic hardware specific firmware binary file. You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the -GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software -Foundation (version 2 or a later version). +GNU General Public License (a copy of which is attached hereto as +Exhibit A) published by the Free Software Foundation (version 2). You may redistribute the hardware specific firmware binary file under the following terms: @@ -43,3 +43,285 @@ OTHERWISE IN ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (PATENT, COPYRIGHT, TRADE SECRET, MASK WORK, OR OTHER PROPRIETARY RIGHT) EMBODIED IN ANY OTHER QLOGIC HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE EITHER SOLELY OR IN COMBINATION WITH THIS PROGRAM. + + +EXHIBIT A + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 2, June 1991 + + Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies + of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + Preamble + + The licenses for most software are designed to take away your +freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public +License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free +software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This +General Public License applies to most of the Free Software +Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to +using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by +the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to +your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not +price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you +have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for +this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it +if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it +in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid +anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. +These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you +distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether +gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that +you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the +source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their +rights. + + We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and +(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, +distribute and/or modify the software. + + Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain +that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free +software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we +want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so +that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original +authors' reputations. + + Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software +patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free +program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the +program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any +patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and +modification follow. + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION + + 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains +a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed +under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, +refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" +means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: +that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, +either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another +language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in +the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". + +Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not +covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of +running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program +is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the +Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). +Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. + + 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's +source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you +conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate +copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the +notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; +and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License +along with the Program. + +You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and +you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. + + 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion +of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and +distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 +above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices + stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. + + b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in + whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any + part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third + parties under the terms of this License. + + c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively + when run, you must cause it, when started running for such + interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an + announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a + notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide + a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under + these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this + License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but + does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on + the Program is not required to print an announcement.) + +These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If +identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, +and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in +themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those +sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you +distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based +on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of +this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the +entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. + +Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest +your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to +exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or +collective works based on the Program. + +In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program +with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of +a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under +the scope of this License. + + 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, +under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of +Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: + + a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable + source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections + 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, + + b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three + years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your + cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete + machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be + distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium + customarily used for software interchange; or, + + c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer + to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is + allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you + received the program in object code or executable form with such + an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) + +The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for +making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source +code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any +associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to +control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a +special exception, the source code distributed need not include +anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary +form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the +operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component +itself accompanies the executable. + +If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering +access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent +access to copy the source code from the same place counts as +distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not +compelled to copy the source along with the object code. + + 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program +except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt +otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is +void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. +However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under +this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such +parties remain in full compliance. + + 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not +signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or +distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are +prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by +modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the +Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and +all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying +the Program or works based on it. + + 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the +Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the +original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to +these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further +restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. +You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to +this License. + + 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent +infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), +conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or +otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not +excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot +distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this +License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you +may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent +license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by +all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then +the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to +refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. + +If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under +any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to +apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other +circumstances. + +It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any +patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any +such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the +integrity of the free software distribution system, which is +implemented by public license practices. Many people have made +generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed +through that system in reliance on consistent application of that +system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing +to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot +impose that choice. + +This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to +be a consequence of the rest of this License. + + 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in +certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the +original copyright holder who places the Program under this License +may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding +those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among +countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates +the limitation as if written in the body of this License. + + 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions +of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will +be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to +address new problems or concerns. + +Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program +specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any +later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions +either of that version or of any later version published by the Free +Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of +this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software +Foundation. + + 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free +programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author +to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free +Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes +make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals +of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and +of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. + + NO WARRANTY + + 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY +FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN +OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES +PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED +OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF +MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS +TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE +PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, +REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + + 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING +WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR +REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, +INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING +OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED +TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY +YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER +PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/aha152x.txt b/Documentation/scsi/aha152x.txt index 29ce6d87e45..94848734ac6 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/aha152x.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/aha152x.txt @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ in the partition table and therefore every operating system has to know the right geometry to be able to interpret it. Moreover there are certain limitations to the C/H/S addressing scheme, -namely the address space is limited to upto 255 heads, upto 63 sectors +namely the address space is limited to up to 255 heads, up to 63 sectors and a maximum of 1023 cylinders. The AHA-1522 BIOS calculates the geometry by fixing the number of heads diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/aic79xx.txt b/Documentation/scsi/aic79xx.txt index 16e054c9c70..64ac7093c87 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/aic79xx.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/aic79xx.txt @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: Option: tag_info:{{value[,value...]}[,{value[,value...]}...]} Definition: Set the per-target tagged queue depth on a per controller basis. Both controllers and targets - may be ommitted indicating that they should retain + may be omitted indicating that they should retain the default tag depth. Examples: tag_info:{{16,32,32,64,8,8,,32,32,32,32,32,32,32,32,32} On Controller 0 @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: The rd_strm_bitmask is a 16 bit hex value in which each bit represents a target. Setting the target's bit to '1' enables read streaming for that - target. Controllers may be ommitted indicating that + target. Controllers may be omitted indicating that they should retain the default read streaming setting. Example: rd_strm:{0x0041} On Controller 0 @@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: ----------------------------------------------------------------- Option: dv: {value[,value...]} Definition: Set Domain Validation Policy on a per-controller basis. - Controllers may be ommitted indicating that + Controllers may be omitted indicating that they should retain the default read streaming setting. Example: dv:{-1,0,,1,1,0} On Controller 0 leave DV at its default setting. @@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: Option: precomp: {value[,value...]} Definition: Set IO Cell precompensation value on a per-controller basis. - Controllers may be ommitted indicating that + Controllers may be omitted indicating that they should retain the default precompensation setting. Example: precomp:{0x1} On Controller 0 set precompensation to 1. @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: ----------------------------------------------------------------- Option: slewrate: {value[,value...]} Definition: Set IO Cell slew rate on a per-controller basis. - Controllers may be ommitted indicating that + Controllers may be omitted indicating that they should retain the default slew rate setting. Example: slewrate:{0x1} On Controller 0 set slew rate to 1. @@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: ----------------------------------------------------------------- Option: amplitude: {value[,value...]} Definition: Set IO Cell signal amplitude on a per-controller basis. - Controllers may be ommitted indicating that + Controllers may be omitted indicating that they should retain the default read streaming setting. Example: amplitude:{0x1} On Controller 0 set amplitude to 1. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt b/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt index 45d61ad8c6f..ac41a9fcac7 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt @@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ (scb) and calls a local function issue_cmd(), which writes a scb command into subsystem I/O ports. Once the scb command is carried out, the interrupt_handler() is invoked. If a device is determined to be - existant and it has not assigned any ldn, it gets one dynamically. + existent and it has not assigned any ldn, it gets one dynamically. For this, the whole stuff is done in ibmmca_queuecommand(). 2.6 Abort & Reset Commands @@ -741,7 +741,7 @@ some error appeared, else it is undefined. Now, this is fixed. Before any SCB command gets queued, the tsb.dev_status is set to 0, so the cmd->result won't screw up Linux higher level drivers. - 2) The reset-function has slightly improved. This is still planed for + 2) The reset-function has slightly improved. This is still planned for abort. During the abort and the reset function, no interrupts are allowed. This is however quite hard to cope with, so the INT-status register is read. When the interrupt gets queued, one can find its diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi-changer.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi-changer.txt index 032399b16a5..ade046ea7c1 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi-changer.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi-changer.txt @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Trouble? If you insmod the driver with "insmod debug=1", it will be verbose and prints a lot of stuff to the syslog. Compiling the kernel with -CONFIG_SCSI_CONSTANTS=y improves the quality of the error messages alot +CONFIG_SCSI_CONSTANTS=y improves the quality of the error messages a lot because the kernel will translate the error codes into human-readable strings then. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_eh.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_eh.txt index 7acbebb17fa..6ff16b620d8 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_eh.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_eh.txt @@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ scmd->allowed. SCSI transports/LLDDs automatically acquire sense data on command failures (autosense). Autosense is recommended for performance reasons and as sense information could get out of - sync inbetween occurrence of CHECK CONDITION and this action. + sync between occurrence of CHECK CONDITION and this action. Note that if autosense is not supported, scmd->sense_buffer contains invalid sense data when error-completing the scmd diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt index e00192de4d1..f79282fc48d 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ Transport <-> LLDD Interfaces : Vport support by LLDD: The LLDD indicates support for vports by supplying a vport_create() - function in the transport template. The presense of this function will + function in the transport template. The presence of this function will cause the creation of the new attributes on the fc_host. As part of the physical port completing its initialization relative to the transport, it should set the max_npiv_vports attribute to indicate the diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/sym53c8xx_2.txt b/Documentation/scsi/sym53c8xx_2.txt index 6f63b798967..6af8f7a7770 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/sym53c8xx_2.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/sym53c8xx_2.txt @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ from the driver. 7. Profiling information -This driver does not provide profiling informations as did its predecessors. +This driver does not provide profiling information as did its predecessors. This feature was not this useful and added complexity to the code. As the driver code got more complex, I have decided to remove everything that didn't seem actually useful. diff --git a/Documentation/security/00-INDEX b/Documentation/security/00-INDEX new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..19bc49439ca --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/security/00-INDEX @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +00-INDEX + - this file. +SELinux.txt + - how to get started with the SELinux security enhancement. +Smack.txt + - documentation on the Smack Linux Security Module. +apparmor.txt + - documentation on the AppArmor security extension. +credentials.txt + - documentation about credentials in Linux. +keys-request-key.txt + - description of the kernel key request service. +keys-trusted-encrypted.txt + - info on the Trusted and Encrypted keys in the kernel key ring service. +keys.txt + - description of the kernel key retention service. +tomoyo.txt + - documentation on the TOMOYO Linux Security Module. diff --git a/Documentation/SELinux.txt b/Documentation/security/SELinux.txt index 07eae00f331..07eae00f331 100644 --- a/Documentation/SELinux.txt +++ b/Documentation/security/SELinux.txt diff --git a/Documentation/Smack.txt b/Documentation/security/Smack.txt index e9dab41c0fe..e9dab41c0fe 100644 --- a/Documentation/Smack.txt +++ b/Documentation/security/Smack.txt diff --git a/Documentation/apparmor.txt b/Documentation/security/apparmor.txt index 93c1fd7d063..93c1fd7d063 100644 --- a/Documentation/apparmor.txt +++ b/Documentation/security/apparmor.txt diff --git a/Documentation/credentials.txt b/Documentation/security/credentials.txt index 995baf379c0..fc0366cbd7c 100644 --- a/Documentation/credentials.txt +++ b/Documentation/security/credentials.txt @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ The Linux kernel supports the following types of credentials: When a process accesses a key, if not already present, it will normally be cached on one of these keyrings for future accesses to find. - For more information on using keys, see Documentation/keys.txt. + For more information on using keys, see Documentation/security/keys.txt. (5) LSM diff --git a/Documentation/keys-request-key.txt b/Documentation/security/keys-request-key.txt index 69686ad12c6..51987bfecfe 100644 --- a/Documentation/keys-request-key.txt +++ b/Documentation/security/keys-request-key.txt @@ -3,8 +3,8 @@ =================== The key request service is part of the key retention service (refer to -Documentation/keys.txt). This document explains more fully how the requesting -algorithm works. +Documentation/security/keys.txt). This document explains more fully how +the requesting algorithm works. The process starts by either the kernel requesting a service by calling request_key*(): diff --git a/Documentation/keys-trusted-encrypted.txt b/Documentation/security/keys-trusted-encrypted.txt index 8fb79bc1ac4..8fb79bc1ac4 100644 --- a/Documentation/keys-trusted-encrypted.txt +++ b/Documentation/security/keys-trusted-encrypted.txt diff --git a/Documentation/keys.txt b/Documentation/security/keys.txt index 6523a9e6f29..4d75931d2d7 100644 --- a/Documentation/keys.txt +++ b/Documentation/security/keys.txt @@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ The main syscalls are: /sbin/request-key will be invoked in an attempt to obtain a key. The callout_info string will be passed as an argument to the program. - See also Documentation/keys-request-key.txt. + See also Documentation/security/keys-request-key.txt. The keyctl syscall functions are: @@ -864,7 +864,7 @@ payload contents" for more information. If successful, the key will have been attached to the default keyring for implicitly obtained request-key keys, as set by KEYCTL_SET_REQKEY_KEYRING. - See also Documentation/keys-request-key.txt. + See also Documentation/security/keys-request-key.txt. (*) To search for a key, passing auxiliary data to the upcaller, call: diff --git a/Documentation/tomoyo.txt b/Documentation/security/tomoyo.txt index 200a2d37cbc..200a2d37cbc 100644 --- a/Documentation/tomoyo.txt +++ b/Documentation/security/tomoyo.txt diff --git a/Documentation/serial/moxa-smartio b/Documentation/serial/moxa-smartio index d1044391868..5d2a33be0bd 100644 --- a/Documentation/serial/moxa-smartio +++ b/Documentation/serial/moxa-smartio @@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ Content spd_normal Use 38.4kb when the application requests 38.4kb. spd_cust Use the custom divisor to set the speed when the application requests 38.4kb. - divisor This option set the custom divison. + divisor This option set the custom division. baud_base This option set the base baud rate. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt b/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt index 397f41a1f15..a5d91126a8f 100644 --- a/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt +++ b/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ Major parts of the initialization program : /* configure the serial port : speed, flow control ... */ /* send the AT commands to switch the modem to CMUX mode - and check that it's succesful (should return OK) */ + and check that it's successful (should return OK) */ write(fd, "AT+CMUX=0\r", 10); /* experience showed that some modems need some time before diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index 3c1eddd9fcc..89757012c7f 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. "port" needs to match the BASE ADDRESS jumper on the card (0x220 or 0x240) or the value stored in the card's EEPROM for cards that have an EEPROM and their "CONFIG MODE" jumper set to "EEPROM SETTING". The other values can - be choosen freely from the options enumerated above. + be chosen freely from the options enumerated above. If dma2 is specified and different from dma1, the card will operate in full-duplex mode. When dma1=3, only dma2=0 is valid and the only way to @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. "port" needs to match the BASE ADDRESS jumper on the card (0x220 or 0x240) or the value stored in the card's EEPROM for cards that have an EEPROM and their "CONFIG MODE" jumper set to "EEPROM SETTING". The other values can - be choosen freely from the options enumerated above. + be chosen freely from the options enumerated above. If dma2 is specified and different from dma1, the card will operate in full-duplex mode. When dma1=3, only dma2=0 is valid and the only way to @@ -1230,6 +1230,13 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. This module supports multiple cards. The driver requires the firmware loader support on kernel. + Module snd-lola + --------------- + + Module for Digigram Lola PCI-e boards + + This module supports multiple cards. + Module snd-lx6464es ------------------- @@ -2229,7 +2236,7 @@ Proc interfaces (/proc/asound) /proc/asound/card#/pcm#[cp]/oss ------------------------------- - String "erase" - erase all additional informations about OSS applications + String "erase" - erase all additional information about OSS applications String "<app_name> <fragments> <fragment_size> [<options>]" <app_name> - name of application with (higher priority) or without path diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt index 0caf77e59be..d70c93bdcad 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ ALC662/663/272 3stack-dig 3-stack (2-channel) with SPDIF 3stack-6ch 3-stack (6-channel) 3stack-6ch-dig 3-stack (6-channel) with SPDIF - 6stack-dig 6-stack with SPDIF + 5stack-dig 5-stack with SPDIF lenovo-101e Lenovo laptop eeepc-p701 ASUS Eeepc P701 eeepc-ep20 ASUS Eeepc EP20 diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/SB-Live-mixer.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/SB-Live-mixer.txt index f5639d40521..f4b5988f450 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/SB-Live-mixer.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/SB-Live-mixer.txt @@ -87,14 +87,14 @@ accumulator. ALSA uses accumulators 0 and 1 for left and right PCM. The result is forwarded to the ADC capture FIFO (thus to the standard capture PCM device). -name='Music Playback Volume',index=0 +name='Synth Playback Volume',index=0 This control is used to attenuate samples for left and right MIDI FX-bus accumulators. ALSA uses accumulators 4 and 5 for left and right MIDI samples. The result samples are forwarded to the front DAC PCM slots of the AC97 codec. -name='Music Capture Volume',index=0 -name='Music Capture Switch',index=0 +name='Synth Capture Volume',index=0 +name='Synth Capture Switch',index=0 These controls are used to attenuate samples for left and right MIDI FX-bus accumulator. ALSA uses accumulators 4 and 5 for left and right PCM. diff --git a/Documentation/sound/oss/AudioExcelDSP16 b/Documentation/sound/oss/AudioExcelDSP16 index c0f08922993..e0dc0641b48 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/oss/AudioExcelDSP16 +++ b/Documentation/sound/oss/AudioExcelDSP16 @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ Driver ------ -Informations about Audio Excel DSP 16 driver can be found in the source +Information about Audio Excel DSP 16 driver can be found in the source file aedsp16.c Please, read the head of the source before using it. It contain useful -informations. +information. Configuration ------------- @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Sound cards supported This driver supports the SC-6000 and SC-6600 based Gallant's sound card. It don't support the Audio Excel DSP 16 III (try the SC-6600 code). I'm working on the III version of the card: if someone have useful -informations about it, please let me know. +information about it, please let me know. For all the non-supported audio cards, you have to boot MS-DOS (or WIN95) activating the audio card with the MS-DOS device driver, then you have to <ctrl>-<alt>-<del> and boot Linux. diff --git a/Documentation/sound/oss/README.OSS b/Documentation/sound/oss/README.OSS index c615debbf08..4be259428a1 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/oss/README.OSS +++ b/Documentation/sound/oss/README.OSS @@ -1352,7 +1352,7 @@ OSS-mixer. The PCM20 contains a radio tuner, which is also controlled by ACI. This radio tuner is supported by the ACI driver together with the miropcm20.o module. Also the 7-band equalizer is integrated -(limited by the OSS-design). Developement has started and maybe +(limited by the OSS-design). Development has started and maybe finished for the RDS decoder on this card, too. You will be able to read RadioText, the Programme Service name, Programme TYpe and others. Even the v4l radio module benefits from it with a refined diff --git a/Documentation/sound/oss/README.ymfsb b/Documentation/sound/oss/README.ymfsb index af8a7d3a4e8..b6b77906b58 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/oss/README.ymfsb +++ b/Documentation/sound/oss/README.ymfsb @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ FIRST OF ALL ============ This code references YAMAHA's sample codes and data sheets. - I respect and thank for all people they made open the informations + I respect and thank for all people they made open the information about YMF7xx cards. And this codes heavily based on Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com>'s diff --git a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx index 68a4fe3818a..493dada5737 100644 --- a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx +++ b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ configured to use SSPFRM instead. NOTE: the SPI driver cannot control the chip select if SSPFRM is used, so the chipselect is dropped after each spi_transfer. Most devices need chip select asserted around the complete message. Use SSPFRM as a GPIO (through cs_control) -to accomodate these chips. +to accommodate these chips. NSSP SLAVE SAMPLE diff --git a/Documentation/spi/spi-lm70llp b/Documentation/spi/spi-lm70llp index 34a9cfd746b..463f6d01fa1 100644 --- a/Documentation/spi/spi-lm70llp +++ b/Documentation/spi/spi-lm70llp @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ The hardware interfacing on the LM70 LLP eval board is as follows: Note that since the LM70 uses a "3-wire" variant of SPI, the SI/SO pin is connected to both pin D7 (as Master Out) and Select (as Master In) -using an arrangment that lets either the parport or the LM70 pull the +using an arrangement that lets either the parport or the LM70 pull the pin low. This can't be shared with true SPI devices, but other 3-wire devices might share the same SI/SO pin. diff --git a/Documentation/stable_api_nonsense.txt b/Documentation/stable_api_nonsense.txt index 847b342b7b2..db3be892afb 100644 --- a/Documentation/stable_api_nonsense.txt +++ b/Documentation/stable_api_nonsense.txt @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ operating system to suffer. In both of these instances, all developers agreed that these were important changes that needed to be made, and they were made, with -relatively little pain. If Linux had to ensure that it preserve a +relatively little pain. If Linux had to ensure that it will preserve a stable source interface, a new interface would have been created, and the older, broken one would have had to be maintained over time, leading to extra work for the USB developers. Since all Linux USB developers do diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/fs.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/fs.txt index 4af0614147e..88fd7f5c8dc 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/fs.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/fs.txt @@ -231,13 +231,6 @@ its creation). This directory contains configuration options for the epoll(7) interface. -max_user_instances ------------------- - -This is the maximum number of epoll file descriptors that a single user can -have open at a given time. The default value is 128, and should be enough -for normal users. - max_user_watches ---------------- diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt index 36f007514db..5e7cb39ad19 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt @@ -161,7 +161,8 @@ core_pattern is used to specify a core dumpfile pattern name. %s signal number %t UNIX time of dump %h hostname - %e executable filename + %e executable filename (may be shortened) + %E executable path %<OTHER> both are dropped . If the first character of the pattern is a '|', the kernel will treat the rest of the pattern as a command to run. The core dump will be diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt index cbd05ffc606..3201a7097e4 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt @@ -32,6 +32,17 @@ Table : Subdirectories in /proc/sys/net 1. /proc/sys/net/core - Network core options ------------------------------------------------------- +bpf_jit_enable +-------------- + +This enables Berkeley Packet Filter Just in Time compiler. +Currently supported on x86_64 architecture, bpf_jit provides a framework +to speed packet filtering, the one used by tcpdump/libpcap for example. +Values : + 0 - disable the JIT (default value) + 1 - enable the JIT + 2 - enable the JIT and ask the compiler to emit traces on kernel log. + rmem_default ------------ diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt index 30289fab86e..96f0ee825be 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt @@ -481,10 +481,10 @@ the DMA zone. Type(A) is called as "Node" order. Type (B) is "Zone" order. "Node order" orders the zonelists by node, then by zone within each node. -Specify "[Nn]ode" for zone order +Specify "[Nn]ode" for node order "Zone Order" orders the zonelists by zone type, then by node within each -zone. Specify "[Zz]one"for zode order. +zone. Specify "[Zz]one" for zone order. Specify "[Dd]efault" to request automatic configuration. Autoconfiguration will select "node" order in following case. diff --git a/Documentation/telephony/ixj.txt b/Documentation/telephony/ixj.txt index 4fb314d5170..db94fb6c567 100644 --- a/Documentation/telephony/ixj.txt +++ b/Documentation/telephony/ixj.txt @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ be removed to protect the rights of others. Specifically, very old Internet PhoneJACK cards have non-standard G.723.1 codecs (due to the early nature of the DSPs in those days). The auto-conversion code to bring those cards into compliance with -todays standards is available as a binary only module to those people +today's standards is available as a binary only module to those people needing it. If you bought your card after 1997 or so, you are OK - it's only the very old cards that are affected. diff --git a/Documentation/timers/timers-howto.txt b/Documentation/timers/timers-howto.txt index c9ef29d2ede..038f8c77a07 100644 --- a/Documentation/timers/timers-howto.txt +++ b/Documentation/timers/timers-howto.txt @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ ATOMIC CONTEXT: ndelay(unsigned long nsecs) udelay(unsigned long usecs) - mdelay(unsgined long msecs) + mdelay(unsigned long msecs) udelay is the generally preferred API; ndelay-level precision may not actually exist on many non-PC devices. diff --git a/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.txt b/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.txt index 6d27ab8d6e9..c83bd6b4e6e 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.txt +++ b/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.txt @@ -120,7 +120,6 @@ format: field:unsigned char common_flags; offset:2; size:1; signed:0; field:unsigned char common_preempt_count; offset:3; size:1;signed:0; field:int common_pid; offset:4; size:4; signed:1; - field:int common_lock_depth; offset:8; size:4; signed:1; field:unsigned long __probe_ip; offset:12; size:4; signed:0; field:int __probe_nargs; offset:16; size:4; signed:1; diff --git a/Documentation/trace/ring-buffer-design.txt b/Documentation/trace/ring-buffer-design.txt index d299ff31df5..7d350b49658 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/ring-buffer-design.txt +++ b/Documentation/trace/ring-buffer-design.txt @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ with the previous write. |written | +---------+ |written | - +---------+ <--- next positon for write (current commit) + +---------+ <--- next position for write (current commit) | empty | +---------+ diff --git a/Documentation/usb/callbacks.txt b/Documentation/usb/callbacks.txt index bfb36b34b79..9e85846bdb9 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/callbacks.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/callbacks.txt @@ -95,9 +95,11 @@ pre_reset int (*pre_reset)(struct usb_interface *intf); -Another driver or user space is triggering a reset on the device which -contains the interface passed as an argument. Cease IO and save any -device state you need to restore. +A driver or user space is triggering a reset on the device which +contains the interface passed as an argument. Cease IO, wait for all +outstanding URBs to complete, and save any device state you need to +restore. No more URBs may be submitted until the post_reset method +is called. If you need to allocate memory here, use GFP_NOIO or GFP_ATOMIC, if you are in atomic context. diff --git a/Documentation/usb/linux-cdc-acm.inf b/Documentation/usb/linux-cdc-acm.inf index 612e7220fb2..37a02ce5484 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/linux-cdc-acm.inf +++ b/Documentation/usb/linux-cdc-acm.inf @@ -90,10 +90,10 @@ ServiceBinary=%12%\USBSER.sys [SourceDisksFiles] [SourceDisksNames] [DeviceList] -%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_0525&PID_A4A7, USB\VID_0525&PID_A4AB&MI_02 +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_0525&PID_A4A7, USB\VID_1D6B&PID_0104&MI_02 [DeviceList.NTamd64] -%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_0525&PID_A4A7, USB\VID_0525&PID_A4AB&MI_02 +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_0525&PID_A4A7, USB\VID_1D6B&PID_0104&MI_02 ;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ diff --git a/Documentation/usb/linux.inf b/Documentation/usb/linux.inf index 4dee9585122..4ffa715b0ae 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/linux.inf +++ b/Documentation/usb/linux.inf @@ -18,15 +18,15 @@ DriverVer = 06/21/2006,6.0.6000.16384 ; Decoration for x86 architecture [LinuxDevices.NTx86] -%LinuxDevice% = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_0525&PID_a4a2, USB\VID_0525&PID_a4ab&MI_00 +%LinuxDevice% = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_0525&PID_a4a2, USB\VID_1d6b&PID_0104&MI_00 ; Decoration for x64 architecture [LinuxDevices.NTamd64] -%LinuxDevice% = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_0525&PID_a4a2, USB\VID_0525&PID_a4ab&MI_00 +%LinuxDevice% = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_0525&PID_a4a2, USB\VID_1d6b&PID_0104&MI_00 ; Decoration for ia64 architecture [LinuxDevices.NTia64] -%LinuxDevice% = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_0525&PID_a4a2, USB\VID_0525&PID_a4ab&MI_00 +%LinuxDevice% = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_0525&PID_a4a2, USB\VID_1d6b&PID_0104&MI_00 ;@@@ This is the common setting for setup [ControlFlags] diff --git a/Documentation/vgaarbiter.txt b/Documentation/vgaarbiter.txt index 43a9b0694fd..b7d401e0eae 100644 --- a/Documentation/vgaarbiter.txt +++ b/Documentation/vgaarbiter.txt @@ -14,11 +14,10 @@ the legacy VGA arbitration task (besides other bus management tasks) when more than one legacy device co-exists on the same machine. But the problem happens when these devices are trying to be accessed by different userspace clients (e.g. two server in parallel). Their address assignments conflict. Moreover, -ideally, being an userspace application, it is not the role of the the X -server to control bus resources. Therefore an arbitration scheme outside of -the X server is needed to control the sharing of these resources. This -document introduces the operation of the VGA arbiter implemented for Linux -kernel. +ideally, being a userspace application, it is not the role of the X server to +control bus resources. Therefore an arbitration scheme outside of the X server +is needed to control the sharing of these resources. This document introduces +the operation of the VGA arbiter implemented for the Linux kernel. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -39,7 +38,7 @@ I.1 vgaarb The vgaarb is a module of the Linux Kernel. When it is initially loaded, it scans all PCI devices and adds the VGA ones inside the arbitration. The arbiter then enables/disables the decoding on different devices of the VGA -legacy instructions. Device which do not want/need to use the arbiter may +legacy instructions. Devices which do not want/need to use the arbiter may explicitly tell it by calling vga_set_legacy_decoding(). The kernel exports a char device interface (/dev/vga_arbiter) to the clients, @@ -95,8 +94,8 @@ In the case of devices hot-{un,}plugged, there is a hook - pci_notify() - to notify them being added/removed in the system and automatically added/removed in the arbiter. -There's also a in-kernel API of the arbiter in the case of DRM, vgacon and -others which may use the arbiter. +There is also an in-kernel API of the arbiter in case DRM, vgacon, or other +drivers want to use it. I.2 libpciaccess @@ -117,9 +116,8 @@ Besides it, in pci_system were added: struct pci_device *vga_default_dev; -The vga_count is usually need to keep informed how many cards are being -arbitrated, so for instance if there's only one then it can totally escape the -scheme. +The vga_count is used to track how many cards are being arbitrated, so for +instance, if there is only one card, then it can completely escape arbitration. These functions below acquire VGA resources for the given card and mark those diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx index 31b485723bc..9aae449440d 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ 53 -> Pinnacle Hybrid Pro (em2881) 54 -> Kworld VS-DVB-T 323UR (em2882) [eb1a:e323] 55 -> Terratec Cinnergy Hybrid T USB XS (em2882) (em2882) [0ccd:005e,0ccd:0042] - 56 -> Pinnacle Hybrid Pro (2) (em2882) [2304:0226] + 56 -> Pinnacle Hybrid Pro (330e) (em2882) [2304:0226] 57 -> Kworld PlusTV HD Hybrid 330 (em2883) [eb1a:a316] 58 -> Compro VideoMate ForYou/Stereo (em2820/em2840) [185b:2041] 60 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 850 (em2883) [2040:651f] diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/README.pvrusb2 b/Documentation/video4linux/README.pvrusb2 index a747200fe67..2137b589276 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/README.pvrusb2 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/README.pvrusb2 @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Source file list / functional overview: to provide a streaming API usable by a read() system call style of I/O. Right now this is the only layer on top of pvrusb2-io.[ch], however the underlying architecture here was intended to allow for - other styles of I/O to be implemented with additonal modules, like + other styles of I/O to be implemented with additional modules, like mmap()'ed buffers or something even more exotic. pvrusb2-main.c - This is the top level of the driver. Module level diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran b/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran index c40e3bab08f..9ed629d4874 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran @@ -130,7 +130,6 @@ Card number: 4 Note: No module for the mse3000 is available yet Note: No module for the vpx3224 is available yet -Note: use encoder=X or decoder=X for non-default i2c chips =========================== diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Insmod-options b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Insmod-options index bbe3ed667d9..14c065fa23e 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Insmod-options +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Insmod-options @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ -Note: "modinfo <module>" prints various informations about a kernel +Note: "modinfo <module>" prints various information about a kernel module, among them a complete and up-to-date list of insmod options. This list tends to be outdated because it is updated manually ... diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/README b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/README index 3a367cdb664..7cbf4fb6cf3 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/README +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/README @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ If you have trouble with some specific TV card, try to ask there instead of mailing me directly. The chance that someone with the same card listens there is much higher... -For problems with sound: There are alot of different systems used +For problems with sound: There are a lot of different systems used for TV sound all over the world. And there are also different chips which decode the audio signal. Reports about sound problems ("stereo does'nt work") are pretty useless unless you include some details diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/README.freeze b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/README.freeze index 4259dccc828..5eddfa076cf 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/README.freeze +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/README.freeze @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ state is stuck. I've seen reports that bttv 0.7.x crashes whereas 0.8.x works rock solid for some people. Thus probably a small buglet left somewhere in bttv -0.7.x. I have no idea where exactly, it works stable for me and alot of +0.7.x. I have no idea where exactly, it works stable for me and a lot of other people. But in case you have problems with the 0.7.x versions you can give 0.8.x a try ... diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Sound-FAQ b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Sound-FAQ index 1e6328f9108..395f6c6fdd9 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Sound-FAQ +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Sound-FAQ @@ -2,13 +2,13 @@ bttv and sound mini howto ========================= -There are alot of different bt848/849/878/879 based boards available. +There are a lot of different bt848/849/878/879 based boards available. Making video work often is not a big deal, because this is handled completely by the bt8xx chip, which is common on all boards. But sound is handled in slightly different ways on each board. To handle the grabber boards correctly, there is a array tvcards[] in -bttv-cards.c, which holds the informations required for each board. +bttv-cards.c, which holds the information required for each board. Sound will work only, if the correct entry is used (for video it often makes no difference). The bttv driver prints a line to the kernel log, telling which card type is used. Like this one: diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/et61x251.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/et61x251.txt index 1247566c4de..e0cdae49185 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/et61x251.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/et61x251.txt @@ -191,10 +191,10 @@ Syntax: <n> Description: Debugging information level, from 0 to 3: 0 = none (use carefully) 1 = critical errors - 2 = significant informations + 2 = significant information 3 = more verbose messages Level 3 is useful for testing only, when only one device - is used at the same time. It also shows some more informations + is used at the same time. It also shows some more information about the hardware being detected. This module parameter can be changed at runtime thanks to the /sys filesystem interface. Default: 2 diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 5c542e60f51..5bfa9a777d2 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -275,6 +275,7 @@ pac7302 093a:2629 Genious iSlim 300 pac7302 093a:262a Webcam 300k pac7302 093a:262c Philips SPC 230 NC jeilinj 0979:0280 Sakar 57379 +jeilinj 0979:0280 Sportscam DV15 zc3xx 0ac8:0302 Z-star Vimicro zc0302 vc032x 0ac8:0321 Vimicro generic vc0321 vc032x 0ac8:0323 Vimicro Vc0323 diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/pxa_camera.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/pxa_camera.txt index 4f6d0ca0195..51ed1578b0e 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/pxa_camera.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/pxa_camera.txt @@ -84,12 +84,12 @@ DMA usage transfer is not started. On "End Of Frame" interrupt, the irq handler starts the DMA chain. - capture of one videobuffer - The DMA chain starts transfering data into videobuffer RAM pages. - When all pages are transfered, the DMA irq is raised on "ENDINTR" status + The DMA chain starts transferring data into videobuffer RAM pages. + When all pages are transferred, the DMA irq is raised on "ENDINTR" status - finishing one videobuffer The DMA irq handler marks the videobuffer as "done", and removes it from the active running queue - Meanwhile, the next videobuffer (if there is one), is transfered by DMA + Meanwhile, the next videobuffer (if there is one), is transferred by DMA - finishing the last videobuffer On the DMA irq of the last videobuffer, the QCI is stopped. @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ DMA usage This structure is pointed by dma->sg_cpu. The descriptors are used as follows : - - desc-sg[i]: i-th descriptor, transfering the i-th sg + - desc-sg[i]: i-th descriptor, transferring the i-th sg element to the video buffer scatter gather - finisher: has ddadr=DADDR_STOP, dcmd=ENDIRQEN - linker: has ddadr= desc-sg[0] of next video buffer, dcmd=0 diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/sh_mobile_ceu_camera.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/sh_mobile_ceu_camera.txt index cb47e723af7..1e96ce6e2d2 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/sh_mobile_ceu_camera.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/sh_mobile_ceu_camera.txt @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Generic scaling / cropping scheme -1'- In the above chart minuses and slashes represent "real" data amounts, points and -accents represent "useful" data, basically, CEU scaled amd cropped output, +accents represent "useful" data, basically, CEU scaled and cropped output, mapped back onto the client's source plane. Such a configuration can be produced by user requests: @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Do not touch input rectangle - it is already optimal. 1. Calculate current sensor scales: - scale_s = ((3') - (3)) / ((2') - (2)) + scale_s = ((2') - (2)) / ((3') - (3)) 2. Calculate "effective" input crop (sensor subwindow) - CEU crop scaled back at current sensor scales onto input window - this is user S_CROP: @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ window: 4. Calculate sensor output window by applying combined scales to real input window: - width_s_out = ((2') - (2)) / scale_comb + width_s_out = ((7') - (7)) = ((2') - (2)) / scale_comb 5. Apply iterative sensor S_FMT for sensor output window. diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/sn9c102.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/sn9c102.txt index 73de4050d63..b4f67040403 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/sn9c102.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/sn9c102.txt @@ -214,10 +214,10 @@ Syntax: <n> Description: Debugging information level, from 0 to 3: 0 = none (use carefully) 1 = critical errors - 2 = significant informations + 2 = significant information 3 = more verbose messages Level 3 is useful for testing only. It also shows some more - informations about the hardware being detected. + information about the hardware being detected. This parameter can be changed at runtime thanks to the /sys filesystem interface. Default: 2 diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/uvcvideo.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/uvcvideo.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..848d620dcc5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/uvcvideo.txt @@ -0,0 +1,239 @@ +Linux USB Video Class (UVC) driver +================================== + +This file documents some driver-specific aspects of the UVC driver, such as +driver-specific ioctls and implementation notes. + +Questions and remarks can be sent to the Linux UVC development mailing list at +linux-uvc-devel@lists.berlios.de. + + +Extension Unit (XU) support +--------------------------- + +1. Introduction + +The UVC specification allows for vendor-specific extensions through extension +units (XUs). The Linux UVC driver supports extension unit controls (XU controls) +through two separate mechanisms: + + - through mappings of XU controls to V4L2 controls + - through a driver-specific ioctl interface + +The first one allows generic V4L2 applications to use XU controls by mapping +certain XU controls onto V4L2 controls, which then show up during ordinary +control enumeration. + +The second mechanism requires uvcvideo-specific knowledge for the application to +access XU controls but exposes the entire UVC XU concept to user space for +maximum flexibility. + +Both mechanisms complement each other and are described in more detail below. + + +2. Control mappings + +The UVC driver provides an API for user space applications to define so-called +control mappings at runtime. These allow for individual XU controls or byte +ranges thereof to be mapped to new V4L2 controls. Such controls appear and +function exactly like normal V4L2 controls (i.e. the stock controls, such as +brightness, contrast, etc.). However, reading or writing of such a V4L2 controls +triggers a read or write of the associated XU control. + +The ioctl used to create these control mappings is called UVCIOC_CTRL_MAP. +Previous driver versions (before 0.2.0) required another ioctl to be used +beforehand (UVCIOC_CTRL_ADD) to pass XU control information to the UVC driver. +This is no longer necessary as newer uvcvideo versions query the information +directly from the device. + +For details on the UVCIOC_CTRL_MAP ioctl please refer to the section titled +"IOCTL reference" below. + + +3. Driver specific XU control interface + +For applications that need to access XU controls directly, e.g. for testing +purposes, firmware upload, or accessing binary controls, a second mechanism to +access XU controls is provided in the form of a driver-specific ioctl, namely +UVCIOC_CTRL_QUERY. + +A call to this ioctl allows applications to send queries to the UVC driver that +directly map to the low-level UVC control requests. + +In order to make such a request the UVC unit ID of the control's extension unit +and the control selector need to be known. This information either needs to be +hardcoded in the application or queried using other ways such as by parsing the +UVC descriptor or, if available, using the media controller API to enumerate a +device's entities. + +Unless the control size is already known it is necessary to first make a +UVC_GET_LEN requests in order to be able to allocate a sufficiently large buffer +and set the buffer size to the correct value. Similarly, to find out whether +UVC_GET_CUR or UVC_SET_CUR are valid requests for a given control, a +UVC_GET_INFO request should be made. The bits 0 (GET supported) and 1 (SET +supported) of the resulting byte indicate which requests are valid. + +With the addition of the UVCIOC_CTRL_QUERY ioctl the UVCIOC_CTRL_GET and +UVCIOC_CTRL_SET ioctls have become obsolete since their functionality is a +subset of the former ioctl. For the time being they are still supported but +application developers are encouraged to use UVCIOC_CTRL_QUERY instead. + +For details on the UVCIOC_CTRL_QUERY ioctl please refer to the section titled +"IOCTL reference" below. + + +4. Security + +The API doesn't currently provide a fine-grained access control facility. The +UVCIOC_CTRL_ADD and UVCIOC_CTRL_MAP ioctls require super user permissions. + +Suggestions on how to improve this are welcome. + + +5. Debugging + +In order to debug problems related to XU controls or controls in general it is +recommended to enable the UVC_TRACE_CONTROL bit in the module parameter 'trace'. +This causes extra output to be written into the system log. + + +6. IOCTL reference + +---- UVCIOC_CTRL_MAP - Map a UVC control to a V4L2 control ---- + +Argument: struct uvc_xu_control_mapping + +Description: + This ioctl creates a mapping between a UVC control or part of a UVC + control and a V4L2 control. Once mappings are defined, userspace + applications can access vendor-defined UVC control through the V4L2 + control API. + + To create a mapping, applications fill the uvc_xu_control_mapping + structure with information about an existing UVC control defined with + UVCIOC_CTRL_ADD and a new V4L2 control. + + A UVC control can be mapped to several V4L2 controls. For instance, + a UVC pan/tilt control could be mapped to separate pan and tilt V4L2 + controls. The UVC control is divided into non overlapping fields using + the 'size' and 'offset' fields and are then independantly mapped to + V4L2 control. + + For signed integer V4L2 controls the data_type field should be set to + UVC_CTRL_DATA_TYPE_SIGNED. Other values are currently ignored. + +Return value: + On success 0 is returned. On error -1 is returned and errno is set + appropriately. + + ENOMEM + Not enough memory to perform the operation. + EPERM + Insufficient privileges (super user privileges are required). + EINVAL + No such UVC control. + EOVERFLOW + The requested offset and size would overflow the UVC control. + EEXIST + Mapping already exists. + +Data types: + * struct uvc_xu_control_mapping + + __u32 id V4L2 control identifier + __u8 name[32] V4L2 control name + __u8 entity[16] UVC extension unit GUID + __u8 selector UVC control selector + __u8 size V4L2 control size (in bits) + __u8 offset V4L2 control offset (in bits) + enum v4l2_ctrl_type + v4l2_type V4L2 control type + enum uvc_control_data_type + data_type UVC control data type + struct uvc_menu_info + *menu_info Array of menu entries (for menu controls only) + __u32 menu_count Number of menu entries (for menu controls only) + + * struct uvc_menu_info + + __u32 value Menu entry value used by the device + __u8 name[32] Menu entry name + + + * enum uvc_control_data_type + + UVC_CTRL_DATA_TYPE_RAW Raw control (byte array) + UVC_CTRL_DATA_TYPE_SIGNED Signed integer + UVC_CTRL_DATA_TYPE_UNSIGNED Unsigned integer + UVC_CTRL_DATA_TYPE_BOOLEAN Boolean + UVC_CTRL_DATA_TYPE_ENUM Enumeration + UVC_CTRL_DATA_TYPE_BITMASK Bitmask + + +---- UVCIOC_CTRL_QUERY - Query a UVC XU control ---- + +Argument: struct uvc_xu_control_query + +Description: + This ioctl queries a UVC XU control identified by its extension unit ID + and control selector. + + There are a number of different queries available that closely + correspond to the low-level control requests described in the UVC + specification. These requests are: + + UVC_GET_CUR + Obtain the current value of the control. + UVC_GET_MIN + Obtain the minimum value of the control. + UVC_GET_MAX + Obtain the maximum value of the control. + UVC_GET_DEF + Obtain the default value of the control. + UVC_GET_RES + Query the resolution of the control, i.e. the step size of the + allowed control values. + UVC_GET_LEN + Query the size of the control in bytes. + UVC_GET_INFO + Query the control information bitmap, which indicates whether + get/set requests are supported. + UVC_SET_CUR + Update the value of the control. + + Applications must set the 'size' field to the correct length for the + control. Exceptions are the UVC_GET_LEN and UVC_GET_INFO queries, for + which the size must be set to 2 and 1, respectively. The 'data' field + must point to a valid writable buffer big enough to hold the indicated + number of data bytes. + + Data is copied directly from the device without any driver-side + processing. Applications are responsible for data buffer formatting, + including little-endian/big-endian conversion. This is particularly + important for the result of the UVC_GET_LEN requests, which is always + returned as a little-endian 16-bit integer by the device. + +Return value: + On success 0 is returned. On error -1 is returned and errno is set + appropriately. + + ENOENT + The device does not support the given control or the specified + extension unit could not be found. + ENOBUFS + The specified buffer size is incorrect (too big or too small). + EINVAL + An invalid request code was passed. + EBADRQC + The given request is not supported by the given control. + EFAULT + The data pointer references an inaccessible memory area. + +Data types: + * struct uvc_xu_control_query + + __u8 unit Extension unit ID + __u8 selector Control selector + __u8 query Request code to send to the device + __u16 size Control data size (in bytes) + __u8 *data Control value diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt index 3b15608ee07..cf21f7aae97 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt @@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ ignored. If you want to check for errors use this: err = v4l2_device_call_until_err(v4l2_dev, 0, core, g_chip_ident, &chip); Any error except -ENOIOCTLCMD will exit the loop with that error. If no -errors (except -ENOIOCTLCMD) occured, then 0 is returned. +errors (except -ENOIOCTLCMD) occurred, then 0 is returned. The second argument to both calls is a group ID. If 0, then all subdevs are called. If non-zero, then only those whose group ID match that value will diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/w9968cf.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/w9968cf.txt index 05138e8aea0..9649450f3b9 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/w9968cf.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/w9968cf.txt @@ -413,7 +413,7 @@ Syntax: <n> Description: Debugging information level, from 0 to 6: 0 = none (use carefully) 1 = critical errors - 2 = significant informations + 2 = significant information 3 = configuration or general messages 4 = warnings 5 = called functions diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/zc0301.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/zc0301.txt index befdfdacdc5..b41c83cf09f 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/zc0301.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/zc0301.txt @@ -181,10 +181,10 @@ Syntax: <n> Description: Debugging information level, from 0 to 3: 0 = none (use carefully) 1 = critical errors - 2 = significant informations + 2 = significant information 3 = more verbose messages Level 3 is useful for testing only, when only one device - is used at the same time. It also shows some more informations + is used at the same time. It also shows some information about the hardware being detected. This module parameter can be changed at runtime thanks to the /sys filesystem interface. Default: 2 @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ the fingerprint is: '88E8 F32F 7244 68BA 3958 5D40 99DA 5D2A FCE6 35A4'. 11. Credits =========== -- Informations about the chip internals needed to enable the I2C protocol have +- Information about the chip internals needed to enable the I2C protocol have been taken from the documentation of the ZC030x Video4Linux1 driver written by Andrew Birkett <andy@nobugs.org>; - The initialization values of the ZC0301 controller connected to the PAS202BCB diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/00-INDEX b/Documentation/virtual/00-INDEX new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..fe0251c4cfb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/virtual/00-INDEX @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +Virtualization support in the Linux kernel. + +00-INDEX + - this file. +kvm/ + - Kernel Virtual Machine. See also http://linux-kvm.org +lguest/ + - Extremely simple hypervisor for experimental/educational use. +uml/ + - User Mode Linux, builds/runs Linux kernel as a userspace program. diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/api.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt index 9bef4e4cec5..42542eb802c 100644 --- a/Documentation/kvm/api.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt @@ -175,7 +175,10 @@ Parameters: vcpu id (apic id on x86) Returns: vcpu fd on success, -1 on error This API adds a vcpu to a virtual machine. The vcpu id is a small integer -in the range [0, max_vcpus). +in the range [0, max_vcpus). You can use KVM_CAP_NR_VCPUS of the +KVM_CHECK_EXTENSION ioctl() to determine the value for max_vcpus at run-time. +If the KVM_CAP_NR_VCPUS does not exist, you should assume that max_vcpus is 4 +cpus max. 4.8 KVM_GET_DIRTY_LOG (vm ioctl) @@ -261,7 +264,7 @@ See KVM_GET_REGS for the data structure. 4.13 KVM_GET_SREGS Capability: basic -Architectures: x86 +Architectures: x86, ppc Type: vcpu ioctl Parameters: struct kvm_sregs (out) Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error @@ -279,6 +282,8 @@ struct kvm_sregs { __u64 interrupt_bitmap[(KVM_NR_INTERRUPTS + 63) / 64]; }; +/* ppc -- see arch/powerpc/include/asm/kvm.h */ + interrupt_bitmap is a bitmap of pending external interrupts. At most one bit may be set. This interrupt has been acknowledged by the APIC but not yet injected into the cpu core. @@ -286,7 +291,7 @@ but not yet injected into the cpu core. 4.14 KVM_SET_SREGS Capability: basic -Architectures: x86 +Architectures: x86, ppc Type: vcpu ioctl Parameters: struct kvm_sregs (in) Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error @@ -1263,6 +1268,29 @@ struct kvm_assigned_msix_entry { __u16 padding[3]; }; +4.54 KVM_SET_TSC_KHZ + +Capability: KVM_CAP_TSC_CONTROL +Architectures: x86 +Type: vcpu ioctl +Parameters: virtual tsc_khz +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +Specifies the tsc frequency for the virtual machine. The unit of the +frequency is KHz. + +4.55 KVM_GET_TSC_KHZ + +Capability: KVM_CAP_GET_TSC_KHZ +Architectures: x86 +Type: vcpu ioctl +Parameters: none +Returns: virtual tsc-khz on success, negative value on error + +Returns the tsc frequency of the guest. The unit of the return value is +KHz. If the host has unstable tsc this ioctl returns -EIO instead as an +error. + 5. The kvm_run structure Application code obtains a pointer to the kvm_run structure by diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/cpuid.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/cpuid.txt index 882068538c9..882068538c9 100644 --- a/Documentation/kvm/cpuid.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/cpuid.txt diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/locking.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/locking.txt index 3b4cd3bf563..3b4cd3bf563 100644 --- a/Documentation/kvm/locking.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/locking.txt diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/mmu.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/mmu.txt index 142cc513665..f46aa58389c 100644 --- a/Documentation/kvm/mmu.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/mmu.txt @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ The mmu code attempts to satisfy the following requirements: and framebuffer-based displays - footprint: keep the amount of pinned kernel memory low (most memory should be shrinkable) -- reliablity: avoid multipage or GFP_ATOMIC allocations +- reliability: avoid multipage or GFP_ATOMIC allocations Acronyms ======== diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/msr.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/msr.txt index d079aed27e0..d079aed27e0 100644 --- a/Documentation/kvm/msr.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/msr.txt diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/ppc-pv.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/ppc-pv.txt index a7f2244b3be..3ab969c5904 100644 --- a/Documentation/kvm/ppc-pv.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/ppc-pv.txt @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Patched instructions ==================== The "ld" and "std" instructions are transormed to "lwz" and "stw" instructions -respectively on 32 bit systems with an added offset of 4 to accomodate for big +respectively on 32 bit systems with an added offset of 4 to accommodate for big endianness. The following is a list of mapping the Linux kernel performs when running as diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/review-checklist.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/review-checklist.txt index 730475ae1b8..a850986ed68 100644 --- a/Documentation/kvm/review-checklist.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/review-checklist.txt @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ Review checklist for kvm patches 2. Patches should be against kvm.git master branch. 3. If the patch introduces or modifies a new userspace API: - - the API must be documented in Documentation/kvm/api.txt + - the API must be documented in Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt - the API must be discoverable using KVM_CHECK_EXTENSION 4. New state must include support for save/restore. diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/timekeeping.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/timekeeping.txt index 0c5033a58c9..df8946377cb 100644 --- a/Documentation/kvm/timekeeping.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/timekeeping.txt @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Mode 0: Single Timeout. This is a one-shot software timeout that counts down when the gate is high (always true for timers 0 and 1). When the count reaches zero, the output goes high. -Mode 1: Triggered One-shot. The output is intially set high. When the gate +Mode 1: Triggered One-shot. The output is initially set high. When the gate line is set high, a countdown is initiated (which does not stop if the gate is lowered), during which the output is set low. When the count reaches zero, the output goes high. diff --git a/Documentation/lguest/.gitignore b/Documentation/virtual/lguest/.gitignore index 115587fd5f6..115587fd5f6 100644 --- a/Documentation/lguest/.gitignore +++ b/Documentation/virtual/lguest/.gitignore diff --git a/Documentation/lguest/Makefile b/Documentation/virtual/lguest/Makefile index bebac6b4f33..bebac6b4f33 100644 --- a/Documentation/lguest/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/virtual/lguest/Makefile diff --git a/Documentation/lguest/extract b/Documentation/virtual/lguest/extract index 7730bb6e4b9..7730bb6e4b9 100644 --- a/Documentation/lguest/extract +++ b/Documentation/virtual/lguest/extract diff --git a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c b/Documentation/virtual/lguest/lguest.c index d9da7e14853..d9da7e14853 100644 --- a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c +++ b/Documentation/virtual/lguest/lguest.c diff --git a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.txt b/Documentation/virtual/lguest/lguest.txt index dad99978a6a..bff0c554485 100644 --- a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/lguest/lguest.txt @@ -74,7 +74,8 @@ Running Lguest: - Run an lguest as root: - Documentation/lguest/lguest 64 vmlinux --tunnet=192.168.19.1 --block=rootfile root=/dev/vda + Documentation/virtual/lguest/lguest 64 vmlinux --tunnet=192.168.19.1 \ + --block=rootfile root=/dev/vda Explanation: 64: the amount of memory to use, in MB. diff --git a/Documentation/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/virtual/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt index 9b7e1904db1..5d0fc8bfcdb 100644 --- a/Documentation/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt @@ -1182,6 +1182,16 @@ forge.net/> and explains these in detail, as well as some other issues. + There is also a related point-to-point only "ucast" transport. + This is useful when your network does not support multicast, and + all network connections are simple point to point links. + + The full set of command line options for this transport are + + + ethn=ucast,ethernet address,remote address,listen port,remote port + + 66..66.. TTUUNN//TTAAPP wwiitthh tthhee uummll__nneett hheellppeerr diff --git a/Documentation/vm/active_mm.txt b/Documentation/vm/active_mm.txt index 4ee1f643d89..dbf45817405 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/active_mm.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/active_mm.txt @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ we have a user context", and is generally done by the page fault handler and things like that). Anyway, I put a pre-patch-2.3.13-1 on ftp.kernel.org just a moment ago, -because it slightly changes the interfaces to accomodate the alpha (who +because it slightly changes the interfaces to accommodate the alpha (who would have thought it, but the alpha actually ends up having one of the ugliest context switch codes - unlike the other architectures where the MM and register state is separate, the alpha PALcode joins the two, and you diff --git a/Documentation/vm/cleancache.txt b/Documentation/vm/cleancache.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..36c367c7308 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/vm/cleancache.txt @@ -0,0 +1,278 @@ +MOTIVATION + +Cleancache is a new optional feature provided by the VFS layer that +potentially dramatically increases page cache effectiveness for +many workloads in many environments at a negligible cost. + +Cleancache can be thought of as a page-granularity victim cache for clean +pages that the kernel's pageframe replacement algorithm (PFRA) would like +to keep around, but can't since there isn't enough memory. So when the +PFRA "evicts" a page, it first attempts to use cleancache code to +put the data contained in that page into "transcendent memory", memory +that is not directly accessible or addressable by the kernel and is +of unknown and possibly time-varying size. + +Later, when a cleancache-enabled filesystem wishes to access a page +in a file on disk, it first checks cleancache to see if it already +contains it; if it does, the page of data is copied into the kernel +and a disk access is avoided. + +Transcendent memory "drivers" for cleancache are currently implemented +in Xen (using hypervisor memory) and zcache (using in-kernel compressed +memory) and other implementations are in development. + +FAQs are included below. + +IMPLEMENTATION OVERVIEW + +A cleancache "backend" that provides transcendent memory registers itself +to the kernel's cleancache "frontend" by calling cleancache_register_ops, +passing a pointer to a cleancache_ops structure with funcs set appropriately. +Note that cleancache_register_ops returns the previous settings so that +chaining can be performed if desired. The functions provided must conform to +certain semantics as follows: + +Most important, cleancache is "ephemeral". Pages which are copied into +cleancache have an indefinite lifetime which is completely unknowable +by the kernel and so may or may not still be in cleancache at any later time. +Thus, as its name implies, cleancache is not suitable for dirty pages. +Cleancache has complete discretion over what pages to preserve and what +pages to discard and when. + +Mounting a cleancache-enabled filesystem should call "init_fs" to obtain a +pool id which, if positive, must be saved in the filesystem's superblock; +a negative return value indicates failure. A "put_page" will copy a +(presumably about-to-be-evicted) page into cleancache and associate it with +the pool id, a file key, and a page index into the file. (The combination +of a pool id, a file key, and an index is sometimes called a "handle".) +A "get_page" will copy the page, if found, from cleancache into kernel memory. +A "flush_page" will ensure the page no longer is present in cleancache; +a "flush_inode" will flush all pages associated with the specified file; +and, when a filesystem is unmounted, a "flush_fs" will flush all pages in +all files specified by the given pool id and also surrender the pool id. + +An "init_shared_fs", like init_fs, obtains a pool id but tells cleancache +to treat the pool as shared using a 128-bit UUID as a key. On systems +that may run multiple kernels (such as hard partitioned or virtualized +systems) that may share a clustered filesystem, and where cleancache +may be shared among those kernels, calls to init_shared_fs that specify the +same UUID will receive the same pool id, thus allowing the pages to +be shared. Note that any security requirements must be imposed outside +of the kernel (e.g. by "tools" that control cleancache). Or a +cleancache implementation can simply disable shared_init by always +returning a negative value. + +If a get_page is successful on a non-shared pool, the page is flushed (thus +making cleancache an "exclusive" cache). On a shared pool, the page +is NOT flushed on a successful get_page so that it remains accessible to +other sharers. The kernel is responsible for ensuring coherency between +cleancache (shared or not), the page cache, and the filesystem, using +cleancache flush operations as required. + +Note that cleancache must enforce put-put-get coherency and get-get +coherency. For the former, if two puts are made to the same handle but +with different data, say AAA by the first put and BBB by the second, a +subsequent get can never return the stale data (AAA). For get-get coherency, +if a get for a given handle fails, subsequent gets for that handle will +never succeed unless preceded by a successful put with that handle. + +Last, cleancache provides no SMP serialization guarantees; if two +different Linux threads are simultaneously putting and flushing a page +with the same handle, the results are indeterminate. Callers must +lock the page to ensure serial behavior. + +CLEANCACHE PERFORMANCE METRICS + +Cleancache monitoring is done by sysfs files in the +/sys/kernel/mm/cleancache directory. The effectiveness of cleancache +can be measured (across all filesystems) with: + +succ_gets - number of gets that were successful +failed_gets - number of gets that failed +puts - number of puts attempted (all "succeed") +flushes - number of flushes attempted + +A backend implementatation may provide additional metrics. + +FAQ + +1) Where's the value? (Andrew Morton) + +Cleancache provides a significant performance benefit to many workloads +in many environments with negligible overhead by improving the +effectiveness of the pagecache. Clean pagecache pages are +saved in transcendent memory (RAM that is otherwise not directly +addressable to the kernel); fetching those pages later avoids "refaults" +and thus disk reads. + +Cleancache (and its sister code "frontswap") provide interfaces for +this transcendent memory (aka "tmem"), which conceptually lies between +fast kernel-directly-addressable RAM and slower DMA/asynchronous devices. +Disallowing direct kernel or userland reads/writes to tmem +is ideal when data is transformed to a different form and size (such +as with compression) or secretly moved (as might be useful for write- +balancing for some RAM-like devices). Evicted page-cache pages (and +swap pages) are a great use for this kind of slower-than-RAM-but-much- +faster-than-disk transcendent memory, and the cleancache (and frontswap) +"page-object-oriented" specification provides a nice way to read and +write -- and indirectly "name" -- the pages. + +In the virtual case, the whole point of virtualization is to statistically +multiplex physical resources across the varying demands of multiple +virtual machines. This is really hard to do with RAM and efforts to +do it well with no kernel change have essentially failed (except in some +well-publicized special-case workloads). Cleancache -- and frontswap -- +with a fairly small impact on the kernel, provide a huge amount +of flexibility for more dynamic, flexible RAM multiplexing. +Specifically, the Xen Transcendent Memory backend allows otherwise +"fallow" hypervisor-owned RAM to not only be "time-shared" between multiple +virtual machines, but the pages can be compressed and deduplicated to +optimize RAM utilization. And when guest OS's are induced to surrender +underutilized RAM (e.g. with "self-ballooning"), page cache pages +are the first to go, and cleancache allows those pages to be +saved and reclaimed if overall host system memory conditions allow. + +And the identical interface used for cleancache can be used in +physical systems as well. The zcache driver acts as a memory-hungry +device that stores pages of data in a compressed state. And +the proposed "RAMster" driver shares RAM across multiple physical +systems. + +2) Why does cleancache have its sticky fingers so deep inside the + filesystems and VFS? (Andrew Morton and Christoph Hellwig) + +The core hooks for cleancache in VFS are in most cases a single line +and the minimum set are placed precisely where needed to maintain +coherency (via cleancache_flush operations) between cleancache, +the page cache, and disk. All hooks compile into nothingness if +cleancache is config'ed off and turn into a function-pointer- +compare-to-NULL if config'ed on but no backend claims the ops +functions, or to a compare-struct-element-to-negative if a +backend claims the ops functions but a filesystem doesn't enable +cleancache. + +Some filesystems are built entirely on top of VFS and the hooks +in VFS are sufficient, so don't require an "init_fs" hook; the +initial implementation of cleancache didn't provide this hook. +But for some filesystems (such as btrfs), the VFS hooks are +incomplete and one or more hooks in fs-specific code are required. +And for some other filesystems, such as tmpfs, cleancache may +be counterproductive. So it seemed prudent to require a filesystem +to "opt in" to use cleancache, which requires adding a hook in +each filesystem. Not all filesystems are supported by cleancache +only because they haven't been tested. The existing set should +be sufficient to validate the concept, the opt-in approach means +that untested filesystems are not affected, and the hooks in the +existing filesystems should make it very easy to add more +filesystems in the future. + +The total impact of the hooks to existing fs and mm files is only +about 40 lines added (not counting comments and blank lines). + +3) Why not make cleancache asynchronous and batched so it can + more easily interface with real devices with DMA instead + of copying each individual page? (Minchan Kim) + +The one-page-at-a-time copy semantics simplifies the implementation +on both the frontend and backend and also allows the backend to +do fancy things on-the-fly like page compression and +page deduplication. And since the data is "gone" (copied into/out +of the pageframe) before the cleancache get/put call returns, +a great deal of race conditions and potential coherency issues +are avoided. While the interface seems odd for a "real device" +or for real kernel-addressable RAM, it makes perfect sense for +transcendent memory. + +4) Why is non-shared cleancache "exclusive"? And where is the + page "flushed" after a "get"? (Minchan Kim) + +The main reason is to free up space in transcendent memory and +to avoid unnecessary cleancache_flush calls. If you want inclusive, +the page can be "put" immediately following the "get". If +put-after-get for inclusive becomes common, the interface could +be easily extended to add a "get_no_flush" call. + +The flush is done by the cleancache backend implementation. + +5) What's the performance impact? + +Performance analysis has been presented at OLS'09 and LCA'10. +Briefly, performance gains can be significant on most workloads, +especially when memory pressure is high (e.g. when RAM is +overcommitted in a virtual workload); and because the hooks are +invoked primarily in place of or in addition to a disk read/write, +overhead is negligible even in worst case workloads. Basically +cleancache replaces I/O with memory-copy-CPU-overhead; on older +single-core systems with slow memory-copy speeds, cleancache +has little value, but in newer multicore machines, especially +consolidated/virtualized machines, it has great value. + +6) How do I add cleancache support for filesystem X? (Boaz Harrash) + +Filesystems that are well-behaved and conform to certain +restrictions can utilize cleancache simply by making a call to +cleancache_init_fs at mount time. Unusual, misbehaving, or +poorly layered filesystems must either add additional hooks +and/or undergo extensive additional testing... or should just +not enable the optional cleancache. + +Some points for a filesystem to consider: + +- The FS should be block-device-based (e.g. a ram-based FS such + as tmpfs should not enable cleancache) +- To ensure coherency/correctness, the FS must ensure that all + file removal or truncation operations either go through VFS or + add hooks to do the equivalent cleancache "flush" operations +- To ensure coherency/correctness, either inode numbers must + be unique across the lifetime of the on-disk file OR the + FS must provide an "encode_fh" function. +- The FS must call the VFS superblock alloc and deactivate routines + or add hooks to do the equivalent cleancache calls done there. +- To maximize performance, all pages fetched from the FS should + go through the do_mpag_readpage routine or the FS should add + hooks to do the equivalent (cf. btrfs) +- Currently, the FS blocksize must be the same as PAGESIZE. This + is not an architectural restriction, but no backends currently + support anything different. +- A clustered FS should invoke the "shared_init_fs" cleancache + hook to get best performance for some backends. + +7) Why not use the KVA of the inode as the key? (Christoph Hellwig) + +If cleancache would use the inode virtual address instead of +inode/filehandle, the pool id could be eliminated. But, this +won't work because cleancache retains pagecache data pages +persistently even when the inode has been pruned from the +inode unused list, and only flushes the data page if the file +gets removed/truncated. So if cleancache used the inode kva, +there would be potential coherency issues if/when the inode +kva is reused for a different file. Alternately, if cleancache +flushed the pages when the inode kva was freed, much of the value +of cleancache would be lost because the cache of pages in cleanache +is potentially much larger than the kernel pagecache and is most +useful if the pages survive inode cache removal. + +8) Why is a global variable required? + +The cleancache_enabled flag is checked in all of the frequently-used +cleancache hooks. The alternative is a function call to check a static +variable. Since cleancache is enabled dynamically at runtime, systems +that don't enable cleancache would suffer thousands (possibly +tens-of-thousands) of unnecessary function calls per second. So the +global variable allows cleancache to be enabled by default at compile +time, but have insignificant performance impact when cleancache remains +disabled at runtime. + +9) Does cleanache work with KVM? + +The memory model of KVM is sufficiently different that a cleancache +backend may have less value for KVM. This remains to be tested, +especially in an overcommitted system. + +10) Does cleancache work in userspace? It sounds useful for + memory hungry caches like web browsers. (Jamie Lokier) + +No plans yet, though we agree it sounds useful, at least for +apps that bypass the page cache (e.g. O_DIRECT). + +Last updated: Dan Magenheimer, April 13 2011 diff --git a/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt b/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt index 457634c1e03..f8551b3879f 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ number of huge pages requested. This is the most reliable method of allocating huge pages as memory has not yet become fragmented. Some platforms support multiple huge page sizes. To allocate huge pages -of a specific size, one must preceed the huge pages boot command parameters +of a specific size, one must precede the huge pages boot command parameters with a huge page size selection parameter "hugepagesz=<size>". <size> must be specified in bytes with optional scale suffix [kKmMgG]. The default huge page size may be selected with the "default_hugepagesz=<size>" boot parameter. diff --git a/Documentation/vm/locking b/Documentation/vm/locking index 25fadb44876..f61228bd639 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/locking +++ b/Documentation/vm/locking @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ in some cases it is not really needed. Eg, vm_start is modified by expand_stack(), it is hard to come up with a destructive scenario without having the vmlist protection in this case. -The page_table_lock nests with the inode i_mmap_lock and the kmem cache +The page_table_lock nests with the inode i_mmap_mutex and the kmem cache c_spinlock spinlocks. This is okay, since the kmem code asks for pages after dropping c_spinlock. The page_table_lock also nests with pagecache_lock and pagemap_lru_lock spinlocks, and no code asks for memory with these locks diff --git a/Documentation/vm/overcommit-accounting b/Documentation/vm/overcommit-accounting index 21c7b1f8f32..706d7ed9d8d 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/overcommit-accounting +++ b/Documentation/vm/overcommit-accounting @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ The Linux kernel supports the following overcommit handling modes address space are refused. Used for a typical system. It ensures a seriously wild allocation fails while allowing overcommit to reduce swap usage. root is allowed to - allocate slighly more memory in this mode. This is the + allocate slightly more memory in this mode. This is the default. 1 - Always overcommit. Appropriate for some scientific diff --git a/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_ds2423 b/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_ds2423 index 90a65d23cf5..3f98b505a0e 100644 --- a/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_ds2423 +++ b/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_ds2423 @@ -21,8 +21,8 @@ value and associated ram buffer is outpputed to own line. Each lines will contain the values of 42 bytes read from the counter and memory page along the crc=YES or NO for indicating whether the read operation -was successfull and CRC matched. -If the operation was successfull, there is also in the end of each line +was successful and CRC matched. +If the operation was successful, there is also in the end of each line a counter value expressed as an integer after c= Meaning of 42 bytes represented is following: @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ Meaning of 42 bytes represented is following: - crc=YES/NO indicating whether read was ok and crc matched - c=<int> current counter value -example from the successfull read: +example from the successful read: 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 6d 38 00 ff ff 00 00 fe ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff crc=YES c=2 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 e0 1f 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff crc=YES c=2 00 29 c6 5d 18 00 00 00 00 04 37 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff crc=YES c=408798761 diff --git a/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink b/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink index 804445f745e..f59a31965d5 100644 --- a/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink +++ b/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ which will contain list of all registered master ids in the following format: cn_msg (CN_W1_IDX.CN_W1_VAL as id, len is equal to sizeof(struct - w1_netlink_msg) plus number of masters multipled by 4) + w1_netlink_msg) plus number of masters multiplied by 4) w1_netlink_msg (type: W1_LIST_MASTERS, len is equal to number of masters multiplied by 4 (u32 size)) id0 ... idN diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/hpwdt.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/hpwdt.txt index 9c24d5ffbb0..9488078900e 100644 --- a/Documentation/watchdog/hpwdt.txt +++ b/Documentation/watchdog/hpwdt.txt @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ Last reviewed: 06/02/2009 The HP iLO2 NMI Watchdog driver is a kernel module that provides basic watchdog functionality and the added benefit of NMI sourcing. Both the watchdog functionality and the NMI sourcing capability need to be enabled - by the user. Remember that the two modes are not dependant on one another. + by the user. Remember that the two modes are not dependent on one another. A user can have the NMI sourcing without the watchdog timer and vice-versa. Watchdog functionality is enabled like any other common watchdog driver. That diff --git a/Documentation/workqueue.txt b/Documentation/workqueue.txt index 01c513fac40..a0b577de918 100644 --- a/Documentation/workqueue.txt +++ b/Documentation/workqueue.txt @@ -12,6 +12,7 @@ CONTENTS 4. Application Programming Interface (API) 5. Example Execution Scenarios 6. Guidelines +7. Debugging 1. Introduction @@ -379,3 +380,42 @@ If q1 has WQ_CPU_INTENSIVE set, * Unless work items are expected to consume a huge amount of CPU cycles, using a bound wq is usually beneficial due to the increased level of locality in wq operations and work item execution. + + +7. Debugging + +Because the work functions are executed by generic worker threads +there are a few tricks needed to shed some light on misbehaving +workqueue users. + +Worker threads show up in the process list as: + +root 5671 0.0 0.0 0 0 ? S 12:07 0:00 [kworker/0:1] +root 5672 0.0 0.0 0 0 ? S 12:07 0:00 [kworker/1:2] +root 5673 0.0 0.0 0 0 ? S 12:12 0:00 [kworker/0:0] +root 5674 0.0 0.0 0 0 ? S 12:13 0:00 [kworker/1:0] + +If kworkers are going crazy (using too much cpu), there are two types +of possible problems: + + 1. Something beeing scheduled in rapid succession + 2. A single work item that consumes lots of cpu cycles + +The first one can be tracked using tracing: + + $ echo workqueue:workqueue_queue_work > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace_pipe > out.txt + (wait a few secs) + ^C + +If something is busy looping on work queueing, it would be dominating +the output and the offender can be determined with the work item +function. + +For the second type of problems it should be possible to just check +the stack trace of the offending worker thread. + + $ cat /proc/THE_OFFENDING_KWORKER/stack + +The work item's function should be trivially visible in the stack +trace. diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt index 092e596a130..c54b4f503e2 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ IOMMU (input/output memory management unit) (e.g. because you have < 3 GB memory). Kernel boot message: "PCI-DMA: Disabling IOMMU" - 2. <arch/x86_64/kernel/pci-gart.c>: AMD GART based hardware IOMMU. + 2. <arch/x86/kernel/amd_gart_64.c>: AMD GART based hardware IOMMU. Kernel boot message: "PCI-DMA: using GART IOMMU" 3. <arch/x86_64/kernel/pci-swiotlb.c> : Software IOMMU implementation. Used diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/email-clients.txt b/Documentation/zh_CN/email-clients.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5d65e323d06 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/email-clients.txt @@ -0,0 +1,210 @@ +锘?Chinese translated version of Documentation/email-clients.txt + +If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the +original document maintainer directly. However, if you have a problem +communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for +help. Contact the Chinese maintainer if this translation is outdated +or if there is a problem with the translation. + +Chinese maintainer: Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> +--------------------------------------------------------------------- +Documentation/email-clients.txt ???涓????缈昏?? + +濡??????宠??璁烘????存?版???????????瀹癸??璇风?存?ヨ??绯诲?????妗ｇ??缁存?よ?????濡????浣?浣跨?ㄨ?辨?? +浜ゆ???????伴?剧??璇?锛?涔????浠ュ??涓???????缁存?よ??姹???┿??濡???????缈昏????存?颁???????舵?????缈? +璇?瀛???ㄩ??棰?锛?璇疯??绯讳腑??????缁存?よ????? + +涓???????缁存?よ??锛? 璐惧??濞? Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> +涓???????缈昏?????锛? 璐惧??濞? Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> +涓?????????¤?????锛? Yinglin Luan <synmyth@gmail.com> + Xiaochen Wang <wangxiaochen0@gmail.com> + yaxinsn <yaxinsn@163.com> + +浠ヤ??涓烘?ｆ?? +--------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Linux???浠跺?㈡?风?????缃?淇℃?? +====================================================================== + +?????????缃? +---------------------------------------------------------------------- +Linux?????歌ˉ涓???????杩????浠惰?????浜ょ??锛????濂芥??琛ヤ??浣?涓洪??浠朵????????宓?????????????浜?缁存?よ?? +??ユ?堕??浠讹??浣???????浠剁?????瀹规?煎??搴?璇ユ??"text/plain"?????惰??锛????浠朵????????涓?璧???????锛? +???涓鸿??浼?浣胯ˉ涓????寮???ㄩ?ㄥ????ㄨ??璁鸿??绋?涓???????寰???伴?俱?? + +??ㄦ?ュ?????Linux?????歌ˉ涓???????浠跺?㈡?风????ㄥ?????琛ヤ????跺??璇ュ??浜?????????????濮???舵?????渚?濡?锛? +浠?浠?涓???芥?瑰?????????????ゅ?惰〃绗???????绌烘?硷???????虫????ㄦ??涓?琛????寮?澶存?????缁?灏俱?? + +涓?瑕????杩?"format=flowed"妯″????????琛ヤ?????杩???蜂??寮?璧蜂?????棰????浠ュ?????瀹崇?????琛???? + +涓?瑕?璁╀????????浠跺?㈡?风??杩?琛??????ㄦ?㈣?????杩???蜂??浼???村??浣????琛ヤ????? + +???浠跺?㈡?风??涓???芥?瑰???????????瀛?绗????缂??????瑰?????瑕??????????琛ヤ???????芥??ASCII??????UTF-8缂??????瑰??锛? +濡????浣?浣跨??UTF-8缂??????瑰???????????浠讹????ｄ??浣?灏?浼???垮??涓?浜??????藉????????瀛?绗???????棰???? + +???浠跺?㈡?风??搴?璇ュ舰???骞朵??淇???? References: ?????? In-Reply-To: ???棰?锛???ｄ?? +???浠惰??棰?灏变??浼?涓??????? + +澶???剁??甯?(?????????璐寸??甯?)???甯镐????界?ㄤ??琛ヤ??锛????涓哄?惰〃绗?浼?杞????涓虹┖??笺??浣跨??xclipboard, xclip +??????xcutsel涔?璁稿??浠ワ??浣???????濂芥??璇?涓?涓?????????垮??浣跨?ㄥ????剁??甯???? + +涓?瑕???ㄤ娇???PGP/GPG缃插????????浠朵腑??????琛ヤ?????杩???蜂??浣垮??寰?澶???????涓???借?诲??????????ㄤ??浣????琛ヤ????? +锛?杩?涓????棰?搴?璇ユ?????浠ヤ慨澶????锛? + +??ㄧ???????搁??浠跺??琛ㄥ?????琛ヤ??涔????锛?缁????宸卞?????涓?涓?琛ヤ?????涓?涓???????涓绘??锛?淇?瀛???ユ?跺?扮?? +???浠讹??灏?琛ヤ?????'patch'??戒护???涓?锛?濡??????????浜?锛????缁??????搁??浠跺??琛ㄥ???????? + + +涓?浜????浠跺?㈡?风?????绀? +---------------------------------------------------------------------- +杩????缁???轰??浜?璇?缁????MUA???缃????绀猴?????浠ョ?ㄤ??缁?Linux?????稿?????琛ヤ?????杩?浜?骞朵???????虫?? +?????????杞?浠跺?????缃???荤????? + +璇存??锛? +TUI = 浠ユ?????涓哄?虹???????ㄦ?锋?ュ?? +GUI = ??惧舰?????㈢?ㄦ?锋?ュ?? + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Alpine (TUI) + +???缃????椤癸?? +???"Sending Preferences"??ㄥ??锛? + +- "Do Not Send Flowed Text"蹇?椤诲????? +- "Strip Whitespace Before Sending"蹇?椤诲?抽?? + +褰???????浠舵?讹????????搴?璇ユ?惧?ㄨˉ涓?浼???虹?扮????版?癸????跺?????涓?CTRL-R缁???????锛?浣挎??瀹???? +琛ヤ?????浠跺????ュ?伴??浠朵腑??? + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Evolution (GUI) + +涓?浜?寮????????????????浣跨?ㄥ????????琛ヤ?? + +褰??????╅??浠堕??椤癸??Preformat + 浠?Format->Heading->Preformatted (Ctrl-7)??????宸ュ?锋?? + +??跺??浣跨??锛? + Insert->Text File... (Alt-n x)?????ヨˉ涓????浠躲?? + +浣?杩????浠?"diff -Nru old.c new.c | xclip"锛???????Preformat锛???跺??浣跨?ㄤ腑??撮??杩?琛?绮?甯???? + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Kmail (GUI) + +涓?浜?寮????????????????浣跨?ㄥ????????琛ヤ????? + +榛?璁よ?剧疆涓?涓?HTML??煎??????????????锛?涓?瑕??????ㄥ????? + +褰?涔????涓?灏????浠剁????跺??锛???ㄩ??椤逛?????涓?瑕??????╄????ㄦ?㈣????????涓????缂虹?瑰氨???浣???ㄩ??浠朵腑杈???ョ??浠讳???????? +??戒??浼?琚??????ㄦ?㈣??锛????姝や??蹇?椤诲?ㄥ?????琛ヤ??涔?????????ㄦ?㈣????????绠?????????规??灏辨???????ㄨ????ㄦ?㈣????ヤ功??????浠讹?? +??跺?????瀹?淇?瀛?涓鸿??绋裤??涓????浣???ㄨ??绋夸腑???娆℃??寮?瀹?锛?瀹?宸茬????ㄩ?ㄨ????ㄦ?㈣??浜?锛???ｄ??浣???????浠惰?界?舵病??? +?????╄????ㄦ?㈣??锛?浣????杩?涓?浼?澶卞?诲凡???????????ㄦ?㈣????? + +??ㄩ??浠剁??搴????锛??????ヨˉ涓?涔????锛???句??甯哥?ㄧ??琛ヤ??瀹????绗?锛?涓?涓?杩?瀛????(---)??? + +??跺?????"Message"????????＄??锛??????╂????ユ??浠讹????ョ????????浣????琛ヤ?????浠躲??杩????涓?涓?棰?澶???????椤癸??浣????浠? +???杩?瀹????缃?浣???????浠跺缓绔?宸ュ?锋????????锛?杩????浠ュ甫涓?"insert file"??炬????? + +浣????浠ュ????ㄥ?伴??杩?GPG???璁伴??浠讹??浣???????宓?琛ヤ?????濂戒??瑕?浣跨??GPG???璁板??浠????浣?涓哄??宓??????????绛惧??琛ヤ??锛? +褰?浠?GPG涓???????7浣?缂??????朵??浣夸??浠?????????村??澶??????? + +濡????浣????瑕?浠ラ??浠剁??褰㈠????????琛ヤ??锛???ｄ??灏卞?抽????瑰?婚??浠讹????跺?????涓?灞???э??绐????"Suggest automatic +display"锛?杩???峰??宓????浠舵?村?规??璁╄?昏???????般?? + +褰?浣?瑕?淇?瀛?灏?瑕?????????????宓???????琛ヤ??锛?浣????浠ヤ??娑???????琛ㄧ????奸????╁?????琛ヤ????????浠讹????跺????冲?婚????? +"save as"???浣????浠ヤ娇??ㄤ??涓?娌℃????存?圭????????琛ヤ????????浠讹??濡????瀹????浠ユ?ｇ‘???褰㈠??缁???????褰?浣?姝ｇ????ㄥ?? +???宸辩??绐???ｄ??涓?瀵????锛???ｆ?舵病??????椤瑰??浠ヤ??瀛????浠?--宸茬?????涓?涓?杩???风??bug琚?姹???ュ?颁??kmail???bugzilla +骞朵??甯????杩?灏?浼?琚?澶??????????浠舵??浠ュ?????瀵规??涓???ㄦ?峰??璇诲???????????琚?淇?瀛????锛????浠ュ?????浣???虫?????浠跺????跺?板?朵????版?癸?? +浣?涓?寰?涓????浠?浠????????????逛负缁?????????翠?????璇汇?? + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Lotus Notes (GUI) + +涓?瑕?浣跨?ㄥ????? + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Mutt (TUI) + +寰?澶?Linux寮????浜哄??浣跨??mutt瀹㈡?风??锛????浠ヨ?????瀹????瀹?宸ヤ????????甯告??浜???? + +Mutt涓????甯?缂?杈????锛????浠ヤ??绠′??浣跨?ㄤ??涔?缂?杈???ㄩ?戒??搴?璇ュ甫????????ㄦ??琛????澶у????扮??杈???ㄩ?藉甫??? +涓?涓?"insert file"???椤癸??瀹????浠ラ??杩?涓???瑰?????浠跺??瀹圭????瑰???????ユ??浠躲?? + +'vim'浣?涓?mutt???缂?杈????锛? + set editor="vi" + + 濡????浣跨??xclip锛???插?ヤ互涓???戒护 + :set paste + ???涓????涔??????????shift-insert??????浣跨?? + :r filename + +濡??????宠?????琛ヤ??浣?涓哄??宓?????????? +(a)ttach宸ヤ?????寰?濂斤??涓?甯????"set paste"??? + +???缃????椤癸?? +瀹?搴?璇ヤ互榛?璁よ?剧疆???褰㈠??宸ヤ????? +??惰??锛????"send_charset"璁剧疆涓?"us-ascii::utf-8"涔????涓?涓?涓???????涓绘????? + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Pine (TUI) + +Pine杩???绘??涓?浜?绌烘?煎????????棰?锛?浣????杩?浜???板?ㄥ??璇ラ?借??淇?澶?浜???? + +濡???????浠ワ??璇蜂娇???alpine(pine???缁ф?胯??) + +???缃????椤癸?? +- ???杩?????????????瑕?娑???ゆ??绋??????? +- "no-strip-whitespace-before-send"???椤逛????????瑕??????? + + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Sylpheed (GUI) + +- ???宓??????????浠ュ??濂界??宸ヤ??锛???????浣跨?ㄩ??浠讹????? +- ???璁镐娇??ㄥ????ㄧ??缂?杈???ㄣ?? +- 瀵逛?????褰?杈?澶???堕??甯告????? +- 濡???????杩?non-SSL杩???ワ?????娉?浣跨??TLS SMTP????????? +- ??ㄧ?????绐???ｄ腑???涓?涓?寰??????ㄧ??ruler bar??? +- 缁???板?????涓?娣诲????板??灏变??浼?姝ｇ‘???浜?瑙ｆ?剧ず?????? + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Thunderbird (GUI) + +榛?璁ゆ????典??锛?thunderbird寰?瀹规??????????????锛?浣????杩????涓?浜???规?????浠ュ己??跺?????寰???村ソ??? + +- ??ㄧ?ㄦ?峰????疯?剧疆???锛?缁???????瀵诲??锛?涓?瑕???????"Compose messages in HTML format"??? + +- 缂?杈?浣????Thunderbird???缃?璁剧疆??ヤ娇瀹?涓?瑕????琛?浣跨??锛?user_pref("mailnews.wraplength", 0); + +- 缂?杈?浣????Thunderbird???缃?璁剧疆锛?浣垮??涓?瑕?浣跨??"format=flowed"??煎??锛?user_pref("mailnews. + send_plaintext_flowed", false); + +- 浣????瑕?浣?Thunderbird???涓洪???????煎????瑰??锛? + 濡????榛?璁ゆ????典??浣?涔??????????HTML??煎??锛???ｄ?????寰???俱??浠?浠?浠????棰???????涓????妗?涓???????"Preformat"??煎????? + 濡????榛?璁ゆ????典??浣?涔??????????????????煎??锛?浣?涓?寰????瀹???逛负HTML??煎??锛?浠?浠?浣?涓轰??娆℃?х??锛???ヤ功?????扮??娑????锛? + ??跺??寮哄?朵娇瀹??????版???????煎??锛???????瀹?灏变?????琛????瑕?瀹???板??锛???ㄥ??淇＄????炬??涓?浣跨??shift?????ヤ娇瀹????涓?HTML + ??煎??锛???跺?????棰???????涓????妗?涓???????"Preformat"??煎????? + +- ???璁镐娇??ㄥ????ㄧ??缂?杈????锛? + ???瀵?Thunderbird???琛ヤ?????绠?????????规??灏辨??浣跨?ㄤ??涓?"external editor"??╁??锛???跺??浣跨?ㄤ????????娆㈢?? + $EDITOR??ヨ?诲???????????骞惰ˉ涓???版?????涓????瑕?瀹???板??锛????浠ヤ??杞藉苟涓?瀹?瑁?杩?涓???╁??锛???跺??娣诲??涓?涓?浣跨?ㄥ????? + ??????View->Toolbars->Customize...??????褰?浣?涔????淇℃???????跺??浠?浠???瑰?诲??灏卞??浠ヤ????? + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +TkRat (GUI) + +???浠ヤ娇??ㄥ?????浣跨??"Insert file..."??????澶???ㄧ??缂?杈???ㄣ?? + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Gmail (Web GUI) + +涓?瑕?浣跨?ㄥ????????琛ヤ????? + +Gmail缃?椤靛?㈡?风???????ㄥ?版????惰〃绗?杞????涓虹┖??笺?? + +??界?跺?惰〃绗?杞????涓虹┖??奸??棰????浠ヨ??澶???ㄧ??杈???ㄨВ??筹???????跺??杩?浼?浣跨?ㄥ??杞???㈣?????姣?琛???????涓?78涓?瀛?绗???? + +???涓?涓????棰????Gmail杩?浼????浠讳??涓????ASCII???瀛?绗????淇℃????逛负base64缂???????瀹????涓?瑗垮????????娆ф床浜虹?????瀛???? + + ### |